JP7670968B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine for some time (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (the configurations of the corresponding embodiments are shown in parentheses).
The present invention (sixth embodiment) is
A control chip (main chip 55) is included.
The control chip has a plurality of (71) pins (55a);
The surface of the control chip has a plurality of recesses (steps 55c, 55d, 55i),
Among the plurality of recesses, a first recess (e.g., step portion 55c) and a second recess (e.g., step portion 55d) have different depths ,
A recess (depression portion 55b) is provided at approximately the center of a predetermined side in the longitudinal direction of the control chip,
The plurality of pins are arranged on the predetermined side,
The recess of the predetermined side is free of the plurality of pins,
Of the plurality of pins on the predetermined side, the predetermined pins adjacent to the recess (pin 55a(17), pin 55a(54)) are connected to GND.
It is an amusement machine.

The present invention can improve the performance of the gaming machine.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on a reel in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel and the pay lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the names of the symbol positions. FIG. 1 is a diagram (1) showing the types of roles, pattern combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing condition devices and winning roles in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a transition diagram of a game state in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing variable conditions of a game state in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small role A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small role B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small role C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the middle first stop when the small role C1 condition device is activated. This is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win C2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the small win D1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows a pattern combination in which only the pattern on the middle reel is in the "PB=1" configuration, among the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows a pattern combination in which only the pattern on the right reel is in the "PB=1" configuration, among the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows a pattern combination in which only the pattern on the left reel is in the "PB=1" configuration, among the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 01 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 02 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 03 is won. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 05 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 06 is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on a reel in a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (1) showing the types of roles, pattern combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a number setting table in the second embodiment. A transition diagram of the game state in the second embodiment. A diagram showing variable conditions of the game state in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small role A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small role B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small role C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the middle first stop when the small role C1 condition device is activated. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing the arrangement of symbols on reels in the first embodiment and modified examples of the second embodiment. In a modified example of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small role A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small role B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small role C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the first middle stop when the small role C1 condition device is activated. In a variant of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 01 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 02 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 03 is won. In a variant of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 05 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 06 is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a main CPU, a ROM, and an RWM in a third embodiment. A figure showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment. A figure showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 34. 13A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a management information display LED in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 3, (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 6, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power return process (M_POWER_ON) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an initialization process (M_INI_SET) according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blink request flag generation process (S_LED_FLASH) in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rate display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the third embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signals output from the output ports 3 and 6 in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit and the like for executing an interrupt process in the fourth embodiment. 13 shows examples of programs for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission in the fourth embodiment, in which (A) and (B) show main processing programs, and (C) shows an interrupt processing program. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power return process (M_POWER_ON) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an initialization process (M_INI_SET) according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, showing an example in which there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main processing. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, showing an example in which there is an interrupt disabled period in the main processing. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an interrupt period in a case where there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main process in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an interrupt prohibited period in the main process is set between interrupt process 1 and interrupt process 2 in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between the rotation of the reels and the detection and notification of errors in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the process of FIG. 76 (Example 1). 13 is a time chart (example 2) showing a case in which settings are changed after an error is detected during rotation of the reels in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the process of FIG. 78 (Example 2). 13 is a time chart showing a case (example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during setting confirmation in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 shows an error history screen including the process shown in FIG. 80 (Example 3). This is a time chart showing a case (example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch is operated (game begins)) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the process of FIG. 82 (Example 4). FIG. 23 is an external perspective view showing a main control board, a socket, and a main chip not yet mounted in the socket in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing in more detail the main chip mounted in the socket. This is an arrow view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in Figure 85. This is a view (side view) taken along the Z2 direction in Figure 85. 1A is an enlarged view of the product name and company name, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Z3-Z3 in FIG. 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views showing the relationship between three types of step portions. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in a seventh embodiment, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a front view. 90(A) is a view taken along the line Z4 in FIG. 90(A), and FIG. 90(B) is a view taken along the line Z5 in FIG. 90(B) (the bottom side of the connector). 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 2) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a side view (enlarged view). 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the positional relationship (example 3) between a substrate and a specified electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows a front view (the mounting surface of the specified electronic component), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. 94A and 94B are diagrams showing a modified example of Example 3 in FIG. 93, in which (A) shows a front view (the surface on which a specified electronic component is mounted), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in RWM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining an interrupt initial setting address in the eighth embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram showing data details of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority levels and interrupt priority setting values. 13A and 13B are diagrams for explaining vector address values and data values stored in vector addresses in the eighth embodiment, in which (A) shows vector address values, (B) shows the relationship between interrupt causes and automatically assigned values, and (C) shows an example of data values of vector addresses. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a process from when the power is turned on until when the mode changes to a user mode in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a program starting from "0000H" in a program area in a use area of a built-in ROM in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example in which the vector address is "00F4H" in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process called by a RST command in the eighth embodiment, where (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing program code area setting addresses and their data values in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment. A block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (5) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (4) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (5) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (6) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (7) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (8) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during a door opening notification in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during a door opening notification in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during a door opening notification in the ninth embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows:
A "bet" refers to placing a bet on medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, actual medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credits (also called "reserves")" are different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refer to the storing of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, the term "credits" is used in a sense that does not include "bet".
Furthermore, "inserting" refers to betting or crediting medals.
In addition, the "prescribed number" refers to the number of bets that can be placed to start (execute) the game in question. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For ease of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "number of bets."
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "prescribed number." For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3," when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the number of bets is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Maintenance" refers to a player inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 47 (described below).
A “care bet” refers to a player betting medals by care of the medals through the medal insertion slot 47 .
The term "care credit" refers to a player crediting medals (adding credits) by care of medals through the medal insertion slot 47.

"Bet Medals" refers to medals that have been bet on.
"Stored medals" refers to medals that have been credited (stored).
A "reserved bet" refers to a player operating a bet switch 40 (described below) to bet some or all of his/her credited medals to play a game, within the range that can be bet for that game.
The "automatic bet" refers to a process in which, when a replay wins, the slot machine 10 automatically bets the number of medals that was bet in the previous game through the control process.
Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to a small win is displayed stopped (meaning that it stops on a winning line; the same applies below), this is called a "winning small win."
On the other hand, the "Rules Concerning the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" interprets that when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, this is the activation of a condition device related to a replay, and not a "winning move."
However, in this application (this specification etc.), a replay is also treated as one of the roles (replay role), and the stopped display of a pattern combination corresponding to a replay may be referred to as a "winning replay."
The term "settlement" refers to paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to the payment of medals to a player based on the winning combination, or the payment of medals through the above settlement. When medals are paid out to a player based on the winning combination, this includes both storing the medals as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described below)) and actually paying out medals from a payout port (not shown). For example, "50" medals are credited as the limit number, and any medals that exceed "50" are controlled to actually be paid out to the player.
In addition, "payout" may be referred to as "grantment." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "game medium" is a medal, but in the case of an enclosed (ECO) game machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium. Note that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, the "electronic information" is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and part or all of the electronic information can be credited to the game machine as a game medium for playing games on the game machine.
In addition, "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

In addition, when the gaming medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) the medals to a gaming medium credit device installed in the gaming machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from a hopper 35 (described below), but also includes the process of crediting (adding) electronic information of the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination to the gaming medium credit device.

When a game progresses from the "N-1" game, to the "N" game, to the "N+1" game, ... (where "N" is an integer of 2 or more), and the current game is the "N" game, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game." The "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a number with "(B)" added to the end (especially 8-bit) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)", "H" or "h" added to the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a number showing "16" in decimal is written as "00010000(B)" in binary, and as "10(H)", "10H" or "10h" in hexadecimal. Furthermore, a number showing a decimal number is written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the final symbol "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" may be omitted.

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol to be displayed on a pay line can be stopped on the pay line during the period from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving frames) is called the "pull-in rate (PB)."
Furthermore, unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate position on the reel 31 (at a timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on a winning line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol cannot be stopped on a winning line (pulled in to the winning line), which is called "PB≠1."
In contrast, the ability to always stop (pull in) the target symbol on a valid line regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switch 42) is called "PB=1."

Further, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on an active line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that has a payout or has a large payout number, an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that transitions (promotes) to an advantageous RT, or an operation mode that stops a symbol combination that does not transition (fall) to an unfavorable RT, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 produces an advantageous/disadvantageous game result (symbol combination that stops on a winning line). The "advantageous operation mode" is also called the correct operation mode or the correct push order.

"Games in which the game outcome is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" corresponds, for example, to a game in which multiple types of small roles (bells) with different payout amounts are won (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won), and the type of small role (bell) won (the number of payouts is different) differs depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. It also corresponds, for example, to a game in which multiple types of replays are won (when multiple replays are won, a game in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), and the RT shifts depending on the type of replay won.

The "instruction function" refers to a function of instructing the player on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. In principle, the instruction function is a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "indicating feature" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
In addition, "display" refers to visibly showing the contents of an "instruction," and "notification" refers to informing the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and an "notification function."

Furthermore, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be the "activation of the instruction function".
For example, if the push order bell has six options, the payout when the push order bell is won will be one, three, four, ten, or no prize (no win), depending on the push order.
Here, notifying the user of the order in which to press buttons to win a 10-coin winning combination is, of course, a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and corresponds to the "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the button press sequence to win a 1-coin, 3-coin, or 4-coin prize may be considered as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of the instruction function)" or not as "notification of an advantageous operation mode."

The push order for winning a 4-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not allow a 10-coin combination to be won. However, since the payout amount is "4" for the bet amount "3" and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", it is an operation mode that increases the difference in the number of coins, and is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode.
Similarly, the push order for winning a 3-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not allow a 10-coin combination to be won. However, since the payout amount is "3" for the bet amount "3" and the difference in the number of coins is maintained as it is (the difference in the number of coins is not decreased), it is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode.

Similarly, the push order for winning a 1-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the push order that will not win a 10-coin combination. Furthermore, it is an operation mode that reduces the difference in the number of coins by paying out "1" for a bet of "3." However, it can also be said to be an operation mode that will not miss out on a combination, so it may not be an unfavorable operation mode.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated to notify the player of the operation mode (correct push order) that will result in the winning combination with the highest payout amount.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous zone approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)") but there is still room for the number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone clear counter value described later), when the push order bell is won, it is possible to announce the push order that will result in, for example, a three-coin or four-coin role, as described above, and to control the difference counter value so that it remains at its current state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the activation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the instruction function is set to "3." In this case, in a game during the AT with a specified number of "2" or "3," if the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. In contrast, if the game is started with a bet number of "2," the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "game zone" includes a "normal zone (non-advantageous zone)" and a "advantageous zone". Note that the 5.9 machine had a "waiting zone" (a game zone where the player has won the advantageous zone lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous zone), but the current rules for the 6 machine do not provide a "waiting zone". However, this is not limited to this, and game zones other than the normal zone and the advantageous zone may be provided.
The "normal section" refers to a play section in which signals related to the instruction function, specifically the push order instruction number and winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described below, are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (e.g., sub-control board 80), and which does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a play section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to drawing lots for roles, a decision can be made (by drawing lots, etc.) as to whether or not to move to an advantageous section.

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a specified display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and since signals related to the instruction function are not transmitted to the peripheral boards, advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed (notified) by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the "advantageous zone" is a play zone that has the capability related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically refers to a play zone in which, when the instruction function is activated, a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when push order instruction information is displayed so that the instruction content (the operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified on the main control board 60. In other words, the advantageous zone is a play zone in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a play zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output effects that contradict the instructions given by the main control board 60 or the signals related to the instruction functions that it has received.

Furthermore, even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage/disadvantage in the advantageous zone, the indication function does not have to be activated.
On the other hand, during a favorable zone, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 determines an advantage/disadvantage in the game outcome, the indication function may be constantly activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
The AT (notification game state) is a game state that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which an advantage/disadvantage occurs in the game result depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the AT is always in an advantageous zone, and is not executed in a non-advantageous zone.

In addition, the AT may always (100%) report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome; however, it is also possible that the AT may not report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome, for example, in order to keep the ball payout rate in a specified period within a range specified by the rules.
For example, if the difference counter approaches its upper limit during the AT but there are still AT games remaining, it may be possible to temporarily not notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (not activate the instruction function) in order to prolong the life of the AT.

The relationship between the advantageous zone and the AT can be set in various ways. For example, the first setting is "advantageous zone = AT". In this case, winning the advantageous zone and winning the AT are equivalent. The AT starts from the first play in the advantageous zone. The AT ends when the advantageous zone ends.

Secondly, the AT can be set to "AT ≠ advantageous zone."
In this case, the condition for starting (executing) the AT is not satisfied simply by moving to the advantageous zone, and whether or not to execute the AT is determined by a lottery or the like, provided that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when it is decided to execute the AT, the AT is executed until a predetermined end condition for the AT is satisfied. In addition, when the player is not in the AT upon moving to the advantageous zone, the main game state may be set to, for example, a normal zone, a premonition, CZ (chance zone (period in which it is easy to win the AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a premonition after transitioning to an advantageous zone, the game may always transition to the real premonition, and transition to the AT after a predetermined number of plays of the real premonition is completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous zone or after transitioning to an advantageous zone, whether the premonition is real or a false premonition may be determined by lottery or the like, and when the real premonition is determined, transition to the AT may be made after the end of the real premonition. Also, when the false premonition is determined, the advantageous zone may be maintained or transition to the normal zone may be made after the end of the false premonition.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is met, both the AT and the advantageous zone may be terminated. Alternatively, the AT may be terminated, but when the advantageous zone termination condition is not met, the advantageous zone may be continued (non-AT and advantageous zone). The same applies when the AT is started at the same time as the advantageous zone.

In addition, the number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined when the advantageous zone starts, and during the advantageous zone, lotteries or the like are not conducted regarding the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, when the advantageous zone starts, the initial number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined, and during the advantageous zone, a decision is made (by lottery, etc.) as to whether or not to add (add) to the (remaining) number of plays in the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, a specified end condition can be set for the advantageous zone, and when the specified end condition for the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone can be ended at that point, even if there are remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone (or remaining number of plays in the AT).

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous zone is when the difference counter value described below exceeds "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous zone clear counter described below (the number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone) reaches "0". When either of these conditions is met, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, and the next play will transition to the normal zone (non-advantageous zone). In this case, even if the final play is an AT, the AT will also end at the same time as the advantageous zone ends.

In the advantageous zone, a later-described advantageous zone display LED (also referred to as a "zone indicator") 77 is turned on. The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous zone, but may also be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after transition to the advantageous zone.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" refers to, for example, when the indication function is activated in a game state in which the zone Sim payout rate exceeds "1." Note that once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains turned on during the advantageous zone.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) payout rate" is the payout rate when it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is always stopped (even when the role of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped), and when there are multiple symbol combinations corresponding to the winning role, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high-eye bell that will pay out the maximum) is stopped. The calculation of the interval Sim payout rate does not include the payout (number of payouts) due to the operation of the role (1BB operation, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a replay is won, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in a replay based on the winning of a replay (the next game after the game in which a replay is won), the number of bets is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts is "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts in a game in which a replay is won and the number of bets in the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "game state in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds "1"" includes an RT or main game state in which the interval Sim payout rate is set to exceed "1".
Here, an example of an RT in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is an RT in which the probability of winning a replay is set high.
In addition, assuming that main gaming states include normal, CZ (chance zone), AT, and pull-back zone, the AT is an example of a main gaming state in which the zone Sim payout rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous zone ends, more specifically, in the final play of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, for example, during the play end check process described below, or during the play start set process for the next play of the final play of the advantageous zone. When the advantageous zone end condition is met, the advantageous zone display LED flag initialization process described below is executed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Examples of "processing related to favorable zones" include the following processing.
1) Drawing lots for (transition to) advantageous zones 2) Updating (subtracting, clearing) the advantageous zone clear counter
3) Update the difference counter (calculate, clear)
4) Updating the advantageous zone type flag 5) Controlling the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updating the advantageous zone display LED flag)

In addition, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining number of games becomes "0"), the AT game number counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared)
4) In the case of a difference number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), update the AT difference number counter (subtract, add, clear)

And, the current rules stipulate that both the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one specified number in one game state (RT), except for the following: Therefore, in this embodiment, the specified number of "3" makes it possible to execute the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number of "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous zone and the processing related to the instruction function.
However, during the favorable zone, updating of the favorable zone clear counter and updating of the difference counter must be performed regardless of which specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is not a winning combination (for example, when the winning number in FIG. 26 described later is "0"), in other words, when the condition device is not in operation, the process related to the advantageous zone (lottery for transition to the advantageous zone) is not executed. However, without being limited to this, the process related to the advantageous zone may be executed even if the result of the lottery is not a winning combination.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the result of the role lottery is a non-winning result, if the probability of non-winning is a predetermined value or higher (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, 1/17,500 or higher), processing related to the instruction function (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, if the result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone will be entered from the next game. Therefore, in a game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is executed and the advantageous zone is won, the notification of the correct button press order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed.
However, it is acceptable to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific role lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous zone and an AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called the "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display") 74 is, for example, made up of four LEDs, and is composed of a two-digit identification segment (an LED that displays which of the five items below it is, using a specified symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (7U.), or instruction-included role ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Ratio of gimmicks (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Ratio of consecutive features (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role Ratio (Cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative" refers to the sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting continues until it reaches at least "175,000" games played. When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by blinking, and when it is "175,000" games played or more, the ratio is displayed, for example, by lighting up. The cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value that can be stored in a specified address of RWM 53 (upper limit value), even after it reaches "175,000" games played or more.
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The "profitable zone ratio" refers to the ratio (proportion) of time spent in the profitable zone to the total play zone (non-profitable zone + profitable zone). Specifically, for example, if the number of plays in the total play zone is "1000" and the number of plays in the profitable zone during that time is "700," the profitable zone ratio is "70%."
The "ratio of special features with instructions" is the sum of the payout number when the special feature is activated and the payout number in the game with the instruction function activated, divided by the total payout number. In slot machines without special features, the "ratio of special features with instructions" is the sum of the payout number in the game with the instruction function activated, divided by the total payout number.
The sum of the number of payouts when the device is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by an instruction-included device counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in the push order displayed by the activation of the instruction function; for example, when 10 bells are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included feature counter.
On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, and, for example, one bell is won, "1" is added to the instruction-included role counter.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the instruction-included combination counter is not incremented. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

When the common bell is won during the AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the push order bell is won, and push order instruction information (dummy) is displayed on the number of wins display LED 78, or the instruction function is not activated. If the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts for that game is added to the instruction-included feature counter.

On the other hand, if the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the payout number for that game will not be added to the instruction-included feature counter. However, the total payout number will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct button press order by image or sound.

Special roles (roles) include BB (first type of role continuous operation device; first type big bonus), RB (first type of special role; regular bonus), and MB (second type of role continuous operation device; second type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, RB games are executed continuously during BB games. Furthermore, during RB games, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during RB games exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during BB games exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game ends.

The MB is a device that can continuously operate the CB (second type special role). In other words, the CB game is executed continuously during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game ends.

When a special combination is won, the winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special combination stops on an effective line.
A game in which a special role is not won is called a "non-internal game," and a game in which a special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the special role that has been won does not stop on an active line, i.e., a game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over, is called an "internal game."

In addition, if BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on a winning line (BB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but BB game will start from the next game. During BB game, RB game is executed continuously, increasing the probability of winning a small prize. Then, when the number of medals paid out during BB game exceeds a predetermined number, BB game ends, and from the next game, the game returns to the game state before switching to BB game.

Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the BB is carried over is called "inside the BB".
The timing of the transition into the BB can be set appropriately. For example, the transition into the BB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped in the game in which the BB has been won, or the transition into the BB may not be made in the game in which the BB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

In addition, if RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on a winning line (RB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but RB game will start from the next game. During RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Then, if the number of medals paid out during RB game exceeds a specified number, RB game ends, and from the next game, the game state before switching to RB game will be restored.

Furthermore, if the RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
The timing of the transition into the RB can be set appropriately, similar to the timing of the transition into the BB. For example, the transition into the RB may be made after all the reels 31 have stopped in the game in which the RB has been won, or the transition into the RB may not be made in the game in which the RB has been won, but may be made in the next game.

Also, when MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to MB stops on a winning line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but MB game starts from the next game. During MB game, CB game is executed continuously. Then, when the number of medals paid out during MB game exceeds a predetermined number, MB game ends, and from the next game, the game returns to the game state before the transition to MB game.
Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on a winning line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on a winning line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside MB".

"RT" means that the type (number) of roles to be selected and their winning probabilities are in a unique selection state, and "RT transition" means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be selected changes by transitioning from one RT to another RT.
Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replays and their winning probabilities will not all be the same in one RT and another RT. However, it is acceptable for the total value of the winning probability of replays to be the same in one RT and another RT.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0." Therefore, when "RT" is mentioned in this specification, it includes non-RT.

The "continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to the "number of payouts during 1BB activation to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in 6000 games is 2000 coins, and of that, the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated is 500 coins, then the "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" will be 25(%).

In addition, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the payout number when the role is activated to the total payout number. Here, "role" includes the above-mentioned first-class special role, as well as the second-class special role (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second-class role continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).
In addition, in gaming machines that do not have the functions corresponding to the above five items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the reel is not equipped with an "RB (first type special reel)," there is no continuous reel ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing.

In addition, the rules stipulate that the ratio of advantageous zones and the ratio of instructed features should be 70% or less. It also states that the ratio of features should be 70% or less, and the ratio of consecutive features should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information falls within the range stipulated by the regulations.

In addition, gaming machines with specifications that set the advantageous zone ratio to 70% or less are called "7U" type, and gaming machines with specifications that set the instruction-included feature ratio to 70% or less are called "7P" type. Gaming machines with advantageous zones are either "7U" type or "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included feature ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous zone to the entire play period must be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the device may be 70% or less of the total number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the play period may be the advantageous zone.

For example, when moving to a non-favorable zone, it is possible to set it so that there is a 100% probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is an almost 100% (for example, about 98%) probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the favorable zone lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to instruction functions (such as AT lottery) by referring to the set value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to instruction functions by referring to the set value itself.

In addition, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, similar to the case of a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine). It then displays the real-time (during measurement) base value (the "base value" indicates the number of safe balls per 100 out balls) for each "60,000" out balls, and the base values one time before, two times before, and three times before for each "60,000" balls in sequence. For example, the identification segment of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification segment of the base value one time before is displayed as "b1.", the identification segment of the base value two times before is displayed as "b2.", and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is not limited to slot machines, but is also applicable to pachinko machines.

First Embodiment
The first embodiment is a slot machine in which, in a game in which multiple types of minor prizes (bells) with different payout numbers are won (a game in which the so-called ``push order bell'' is won), the type of minor prize that is won (the pattern combination that is stopped and displayed on the winning line) differs depending on the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch 42, resulting in an advantage/disadvantage in the game outcome (number of payout coins).
Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
Representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is provided with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it is provided with only those shown in FIG. 1).

1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection part to which signals from the operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection part to which signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, input peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC with calculation functions) provided on the main control board 50, which executes programs and performs calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and more specifically, performs the drawing of winning roles, the drive control of the reels 31, and the payout when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be mounted inside the MPU or may be provided externally.
Incidentally, an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Incidentally, the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, a medal inserted through a medal insertion port 47 is sent to the inside of a medal selector.
As shown in Figure 1, the medal selector is provided with a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a deposit sensor 44 (a pair of deposit sensors 44a and 44b) (but is not limited to these), which are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
A medal inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is configured to be detected first by the passage sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is used to permit/prohibit the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. In contrast, when the insertion of medals is permitted, it forms a medal passage for guiding medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is composed of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (the opening leading to the medal return port) formed in part of the medal passage in the medal selector to form a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side, and an actuator for driving the switching member, etc.

The blocker 45 does not permit the insertion of medals during play (from the time the reels 31 start to spin, until all reels 31 stop, and until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination, if a winning combination is achieved). In other words, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when play is not being performed.

Inside the medal selector, a throw-in sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the throw-in sensor 44 is made up of a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and is configured so that a medal is detected by one throw-in sensor 44a and then detected by the other throw-in sensor 44b a predetermined time later. Then, based on the timing at which each of the pair of throw-in sensors 44 turns on/off, it is determined whether the correct medal has been inserted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to operation switches operated by the player, such as a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a stop switch 42 (left, center, right), and a settlement switch 43.
Here, an "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" refers to a device (including an electrical circuit and/or electrical components) that switches an electrical signal on/off based on (receiving external force) the operation of an operating object by a player (operator), and does not limit the shape of the operating object operated by the player.

When the operation switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light-emitting element continues to be incident on the light-receiving element (when the light-receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the OFF state). Then, when the operation switch (the operating object) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light-emitting element is no longer incident on the light-receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned ON is sent to the main control board 50. Note that, conversely to the above, the operation switch may be configured so that when the operation switch is in the OFF state, light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element, and when light from the light-emitting element enters the light-receiving element, the switch is turned ON.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is in the shape of a lever (rod) (hence, it is also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), and the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, the stop switch 42, and the settlement switch 43 are in the shape of push buttons (hence, they are also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40", the "stop button (switch) 42", and the "settlement button (switch) 43").

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, for example, and when the operation of the operation switch is not permitted, the LED of the operation switch emits red light, for example, to indicate to the player the permitted/not permitted state of the operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all reels 31 are spinning and the operation of the stop switches 42 is acceptable, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 are illuminated in blue to indicate to the player that they are operable. Then, when one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. The remaining stop switches 42 are then operable after the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 ends and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 turns off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 are illuminated in red. Then, when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 turns off, the LED of the stop switch 42 that has already been operated continues to emit red light, but the LED of the stop switch 42 that has not yet been operated is illuminated in blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by a player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, the bet switch 40 includes a 1 bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3 bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (the maximum number, the specified number).
However, this is not limiting, and a bet switch for betting two coins may be provided.

The specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the reel is inactive/active. Specifically, it is set to three medals when the reel is inactive, when SB is active, and when 1BB is active, and two medals when 2BB is active. Operating the 1 bet switch 40a twice allows two medals to be inserted, and operating it three times allows three medals to be inserted. Also, when the specified number is three medals, operating the 3 bet switch 40b allows three medals to be inserted at once, and when the specified number is two medals, operating the 3 bet switch 40b allows two medals to be inserted at once. If the 3 bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, bet processing is performed so that the number of medals bet is three.

The start switch 41 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when starting all of the reels 31 (left, center, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three reels 31 (left, center, right), and are operation switches that are operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reel 31.
Furthermore, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when paying out medals bet and/or accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

As shown in Fig. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other, but the relay board is not shown in Fig. 1. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay board or the like) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the number of winnings won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and, like the credit number display LED 76, is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may display "0".

Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it also functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (indicates advantageous push order) in a game in which the push order is notified during the AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error content, and push order instruction information. However, it is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED for displaying push order instruction information.
During the AT, notification of advantageous button pressing sequences is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the symbol display device and the like.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive each of the reels 31 , and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65 which will be described later.
Here, the reels 31 consist of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the stop switch 42 operated to stop the middle reel 31 is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.
The left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the center reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and has a reel tape attached to its outer periphery on which a number of types of symbols (symbols constituting symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed.
Each reel 31 is provided with one index (it may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, etc. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33. A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When an index detects (breaks) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

The symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in the ROM 54. This makes it possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Furthermore, it becomes possible to identify how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 needs to be driven from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in order to stop the symbol on the pay line, counting from the symbol on the reference position.

The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a medal payout device. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when medals in the hopper 35 are paid out from a payout port, and a payout sensor 37 for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36.

The medals that are received through the medal insertion port 47 and accepted (determined to be normal) are configured to be stored in the hopper 35 .
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 is made up of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member is moved by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by the movement of the predetermined moving member. Whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly is determined based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

For example, when the pair of payout sensors 37 are not detected as being on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When a player starts a game, he or she inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (accumulated bet) or inserts medals manually through the medal insertion slot 47 (maintenance bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of medals for that game bet, a signal is generated at that time and input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described below) receives this signal, it performs a lottery using the role selection means 61 and controls the drive of all the motors 32 to rotate all the reels 31. In this way, the reels 31 are rotated by the motors 32, and the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player presses a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and controls the stop of the reel 31 related to that motor 32 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the role selection means 61 (the result determined by the internal selection means).

The game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active line (when that winning combination is won), the medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out, etc.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role selection means 61, etc. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role selection means 61 selects (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "selection of the winning number by the role selection means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the Amusement and Entertainment Act Regulations (regulations on the certification of gaming machines and the inspection of models, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as the "Regulations"). The result of the selection by the role selection means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as the "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations.
When the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the role condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and the role condition devices that are operable in the game are determined. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also called a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for the lottery (such as a hardware random number generator), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a winning number determining means for determining the winning number based on the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random numbers are generated by a counter that performs one count every 200 n (nano) seconds, and continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. The counter continues to count random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, which in this embodiment is when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each role based on the lottery results by the role selection means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When any role is selected as a winning role in the lottery by the role selection means 61, the winning flag for that role is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that winning roles can occur when there is one winning role (single win) or when there are multiple winning roles (multiple wins).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the result of the winning number selection by the role selection means 61 (when the push order bell or push order replay is won).
The "push order" of the push order instruction number selected here means the push order that is advantageous to the player (the correct push order). For example, when the push order bell is won, it refers to the push order that will result in a high bell (the correct push order). Also, when a replay is won multiple times, it refers to the push order that will promote the player to an advantageous RT or will not cause the player to fall into an unfavorable RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with its own unique push order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically information such as "=*"("*" = 1, 2, ...), on the above-mentioned winning number display LED 78. In this way, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a condition device having an advantageous push order is activated is also called an instruction function.
In addition, when the push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 sends a command corresponding to the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined).
When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it displays an image of the correct button press sequence on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can only be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous period (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 during the normal period, that push order instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that it is not necessary to select a push order instruction number during the normal period.

The performance group number selection means 64 selects a performance group number corresponding to the winning number and is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated to determine the winning number, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 transmits the selected effect group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning role based on the received effect group number. Unlike the push order instruction number, the effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number for that game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number for that game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives an effect group number for each game, it is possible to output an effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct push order based on the effect group number. In contrast, during the AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

When the reel control means 65 receives a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when it detects operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment, it controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating.
Furthermore, after the winning number is determined by the role selection means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off state of the winning flag for the current game and selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off state of the winning flag, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and drives and controls the motor 32 to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 to stop within the range of the reel 31 stop control so that a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is on) can be stopped on an active line, and controls the reel 31 to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than the winning role (a role for which the winning flag is off) is not stopped on an active line.

Here, "within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31" means within the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)).
In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 are stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation (for example, the center reel 31). As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to four symbols, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 75 ms. As a result, for a specific reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the symbol is controlled to stop on the predetermined effective line when the stop switch 42 is operated.
In other words, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the specified pay line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the reel 31 stop control until the reel 31 is stopped, so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped on the specified pay line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and a symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number stops on an active line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 when the reel 31 stops, so that the symbol combination of a winning combination not corresponding to the winning number does not stop on an active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which multiple winning combinations are achieved (for example, when the push order bell is achieved), the priority of the winning combinations is predetermined according to the order of pushing the stop switch 42 and the timing of operating the stop switch 42, and the pulling-in stop control of the symbol associated with the most prioritized combination is performed according to the predetermined priority order.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination on the reel 31 that has stopped on the pay line corresponds to any winning combination when the reel 31 stops.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on an active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the winning determination means 66 determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line before the reel 31 actually stops, or determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line after the reel 31 stops.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) required for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80 .
Control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is won), performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning role, etc.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during play and during game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) transmits information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance unidirectionally to the sub-control board 80 via parallel communication.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following performance peripheral devices such as the performance lamps 21 as shown in Fig. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the performance peripheral devices are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data etc. acquired when the sub-CPU 85 controls the performance.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when conducting lotteries related to performance, as performance data.

The performance lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is met. The performance lamps 21 include back lamps that are arranged on the inner circumference of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from above and below through the display window) from behind, fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above the reels 31, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved, etc.

The speaker 22 also outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to provide various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 consists of an LCD display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various presentation images during play (such as correct button presses, presentations corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game), game information (such as the number of plays and number of coins won when the reels are activated or during the advantageous zone (AT)), etc.

In this embodiment, the "special role (role)" includes "1BB (first type role continuous operation device; first type big bonus)" and "RB (first type special role; regular bonus)". Therefore, the "special game" includes "1BB game" and "RB game".
In this embodiment, "1BB" includes two types, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B." Hereinafter, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B" will be collectively referred to as "1BB."

During 1BB game, RB game is executed continuously.
In this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to RB is not set. Therefore, during the 1BB game, the RB game is continuously executed without the symbol combination corresponding to RB being stopped and displayed.

During RB play, a "1-coin role ALL" or "small role ALL" is won in every play by the role lottery means 61. As a result, during RB play, i.e., during 1BB play, the probability of winning a small role is higher than during non-internal play and during 1BB internal play.
Furthermore, during RB play, the prescribed number (the number of medals bet to start playing) becomes "3", and the "1 medal ALL" is won with a probability of "60535/65536", and "1" medal is paid out. Therefore, during RB play, i.e., during 1BB play, the player's medals are decreasing.
Furthermore, the RB game ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied. That is, the end condition of the RB game is set to when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied.

The 1BB game continues until the total number of medals acquired (the number of medals paid out, the number of medals awarded) exceeds 210, and ends when the total number of medals acquired exceeds 210. In other words, the end condition of the 1BB game is set to be when the total number of medals acquired exceeds 210.
When the RB game ends, if the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, the RB game is executed again. In this manner, the RB game is executed continuously during the 1BB game.
Also, when the RB game ends, if the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied, the 1BB game ends and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when a condition for ending the 1BB game is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game is ended, the 1BB game is ended, and a transition is made to a non-internal state.

The role selection means 61 also determines a "winning number" by lottery. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as a "winning number selection (determination, selection) means." Furthermore, when the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to that winning number is generated. When the condition device number is generated, a condition device corresponding to that condition device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the role corresponding to the activated condition device can be displayed stopped on the pay line (the role will win).

In addition, the "condition device number" includes a "gimmick condition device number" and a "minor winnings and replay condition device number."
Furthermore, the "gimmick condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special role (gimmick), and in this embodiment, includes "1" to "2" as shown in FIG. 9 described later.
Furthermore, the "small win and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a small win or a replay, and in this embodiment, includes numbers "1" to "18" as shown in Figures 6 to 8 described later.

In addition, when a special role is won, a role condition device corresponding to the winning of the special role becomes operable. For example, when 1BB is won, a 1BB condition device becomes operable.
Furthermore, when a small win is won, a small win condition device corresponding to the winning of the small win becomes operable, and when a replay is won, a replay condition device corresponding to the winning of the replay becomes operable. For example, when a small win A1 is won, a small win A1 condition device becomes operable.

When a special combination capable of carrying over winning information to the next game or later is won, the winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed on an effective line (the special combination wins).
Furthermore, when a special combination is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped and displayed on the pay line, this is called "inside". In other words, a game in which the winning information of the special combination is carried over is called "inside".

In contrast, a game in which the winning information of a special role that can be carried over to the next game or later is not won is called a "non-internal game". In other words, a game in which the winning information of a special role is not carried over is called a "non-internal game".
In this embodiment, the game in which a special role is won is included in the "non-internal" category, but the game in which a special role is won may also be included in the "internal" category.
"1BB" is a special role that allows the winning information to be carried over to the next game or later, and when "1BB" is won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the winning line, it is called "inside 1BB."

In addition, the "special game" is also called "operation of a special feature." For example, the "1BB game" is also called "1BB operation," and the "RB game" is also called "RB operation."
Furthermore, "when the reel is not activated" includes a state in which the reel condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to the activated reel condition device is not displayed stopped on the pay line.
For example, when the "1BB condition device" is not activated, or when the "1BB condition device" is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line, it is called "1BB not activated". In other words, when "1BB" is not won, or when "1BB" is won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line (within 1BB), it is "1BB not activated".

As described above, in this embodiment, "1BB" has two types, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B", and "gimmick condition device" has two types, "1BB-A condition device" and "1BB-B condition device".
Furthermore, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B".

Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is not inside, a lottery is drawn only when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2"), and no lottery is drawn when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"). In other words, when the "1BB-A condition device" is not inside, a lottery is drawn when two medals are inserted, but no lottery is drawn when three medals are inserted.
In contrast, in the "1BB-B condition device," when not inside, a lottery is drawn only when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"), and no lottery is drawn when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2"). In other words, in the "1BB-B condition device," when three medals are inserted, the lottery is drawn, but when two medals are inserted, the lottery is not drawn.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can win a prize).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-A win" occurs, and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-A game" (when 1BB-A is activated) from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the game will transition to "1BB-A inside" from the next game.
Furthermore, when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can result in a win), but when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on an active line.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the pay line (can win a prize).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-B win" occurs, and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-B game" (when 1BB-B is activated) from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the game will transition to "1BB-B inside" from the next game.
Furthermore, when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can result in a win), but when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on an active line.

The "setting value" relates to the degree of advantage given to the player, and although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, six levels are provided, from setting 1 to setting 6. The higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage given to the player.
Furthermore, when the power is turned off and the setting key switch 152 is turned on and then the power is turned on in this state, the device transitions to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the setting values can be changed. At this time, an initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed to initialize a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed but the device transitions to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start condition of the "advantageous zone" is set to be that in the non-advantageous zone, one of the winning numbers "1" (small prize A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) is won (determined) by a lottery by the role selection means 61.
In other words, in the non-advantageous zone, if the winning number selected by the role selection means 61 is any of the winning numbers "1" (small role A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device), the player will move to the advantageous zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, the end condition of the "favorable zone" is set to when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", when the favorable zone clear counter (remaining number of plays in the favorable zone) reaches "0", or when the notification game (AT) ends.
In other words, when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400 coins, the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches 1,500 plays, or the notification game (AT) ends, the advantageous zone ends and transitions to a non-advantageous zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, during non-internal play, the probability of winning any of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) in the lottery by the role selection means 61 is "50536/65536".
Therefore, even if the advantageous zone ends and a transition to a non-advantageous zone occurs, if the player subsequently plays "1" to "2" and wins any of the winning numbers "1" (small prize A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device), the player will transition to the advantageous zone.

In this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed when any of the winning numbers "13" (small prize G condition device) to "15" (small prize I condition device) is won (determined) in the lottery by the prize lottery means 61. The "small prize G condition device" to "small prize I condition device" have a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and are called "rare prizes" or "rare small prizes". The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "small prize G condition device" to "small prize I condition device" are activated is set to "10"%.
Furthermore, if the player wins the AT lottery, the player is granted the right to play the notification game. If the player has the right to play the notification game and the start condition of the notification game is satisfied, the notification game starts.

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of times the notification game can be played is set to 50. When the right to play the notification game is granted and the start condition of the notification game is satisfied, the notification game is played for 50 games.
Furthermore, in the case where a player already has the right to play the notification game, when the player wins the AT lottery, the number of rights to play the notification game is increased (added). For example, when a player has "2" rights to play the notification game, the player can play the notification game for "(50 games + 50 games =) 100 games".

Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during the execution of the notification game, the remaining number of times of the notification game is added. For example, when the AT lottery is won when the remaining number of times of the notification game is "20", the remaining number of times of the notification game becomes "(20 games + 50 games =) 70 games".
In addition, the indication function can be activated and the push order suggestion effect can be executed only during the advantageous zone, and the indication function can not be activated and the push order suggestion effect cannot be executed in the non-advantageous zone. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the indication function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is executed, it is considered to be an advantageous zone.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in this embodiment.
2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is made up of 20 pieces, i.e., each reel 31 has 20 symbols.
In addition, the symbol numbers are also shown in Fig. 2. For example, the symbol number "0" on the left reel 31 is "blue 7".

In this embodiment, the time from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is set to within "190" ms. As a result, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is "4".
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated immediately before the "replay" number "1" on the left reel 31 crosses the pay line, the number can move up to a maximum of "4" from that symbol, and stop on the pay line up to the "red 7" number "5".
Therefore, if "4" specific symbols are arranged on one reel 31 with an interval of "5" symbols, the specific symbols can always be stopped on an active line regardless of when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replays" are arranged at numbers "1", "6", "11" and "16". That is, on the left reel 31, "Replays" are arranged at intervals of "5" symbols, "4". Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, "Replays" can always be stopped on an active line.
In this way, a symbol arrangement in which the target symbol can always be stopped on a pay line regardless of when the stop switch 42 is operated is called a "PB=1" arrangement.
In contrast, a symbol arrangement in which the target symbol cannot be stopped on a valid line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at the appropriate timing (within the range of the maximum number of moving symbols from the valid line) is called a "PB≠1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, in addition to "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" are also arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are consecutively (in order) arranged in "4" positions. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged at numbers "1" to "3", consecutively arranged at numbers "6" to "8", consecutively arranged at numbers "11" to "13", and consecutively arranged at numbers "16" to "18".

In addition, on the left reel 31, the "blue 7" at number "0", the "red 7" at number "5", the "black BAR" at number "10", and the "white BAR" at number "15" combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement for a total of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR", or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on a winning line.

Similarly, on the left reel 31, the "Cherry" symbols "4", "9", and "14", as well as the "Blank" symbol "19", combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "Cherry" or "Blank" symbol on the left reel 31 can be stopped on a winning line.

Also, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" is arranged above "Watermelon", "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is arranged above "Cherry/Blank", and "Replay" is arranged above "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR". That is, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged between "Watermelon" and "Replay".
As a result, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry/Blank" are arranged consecutively (in order) at "4" positions. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry/Blank" are arranged consecutively (in order) at numbers "0" to "4", consecutively at numbers "5" to "9", consecutively at numbers "10" to "14", and consecutively at numbers "15" to "19".

Additionally, on the center reel 31, the "cherry", "bell", "replay" and "watermelon" are each arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the center reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged in "4" positions. Specifically, on the center reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", and "Watermelon" are consecutively arranged from number "0" to number "3", consecutively arranged from number "5" to number "8", consecutively arranged from number "10" to number "13", and consecutively arranged from number "15" to number "18".

Furthermore, on the center reel 31, the "blue 7" at number "4", the "red 7" at number "9", the "black BAR" at number "14", and the "white BAR" at number "19" are arranged as "PB=1" when these "4" symbols are combined. Therefore, no matter when the center stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR", or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 can be stopped on an active line.

Also, on the center reel 31, the "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is arranged between the "Watermelon" and the "Cherry" (above the "Watermelon" and below the "Cherry").
As a result, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon", and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at "4" positions on the center reel 31. Specifically, on the center reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon", and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at numbers "0" to "4", consecutively at numbers "5" to "9", consecutively at numbers "10" to "14", and consecutively at numbers "15" to "19".

Additionally, on the right reel 31, the "replay", "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry" are each in the "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" are consecutively (in order) arranged in "4" positions. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" are consecutively (in order) arranged at number "19", at numbers "0" to "2", consecutively arranged at numbers "4" to "7", consecutively arranged at numbers "9" to "12", and consecutively arranged at numbers "14" to "17".

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "blue 7" at number "3", the "red 7" at number "8", the "black BAR" at number "13", and the "white BAR" at number "18" combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement for a total of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the center stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR", or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on an active line.

Also, on the right reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is arranged between "Cherry" and "Replay" (above "Cherry" and below "Replay").
As a result, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at "4" positions on the right reel 31. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged consecutively (in order) at number "19", "0" to "3", also consecutively at numbers "4" to "8", also consecutively at numbers "9" to "13", and also consecutively at numbers "14" to "18".

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the display window 18, the relative positions of the reels 31, and the pay lines (display lines that show symbol combinations).
The reels 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18.
As a result, when each reel 31 stops, consecutive "3" symbols on each reel 31 are seen stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window 18. Therefore, when all reels 31 stop, a total of "9" symbols (frames) are visible through the display window 18.
In addition, in FIG. 3(A), the numbers at the bottom right of each pattern indicate the pattern number.

FIG. 3B illustrates the names of the symbol positions in this embodiment.
The positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when each reel 31 stops are referred to as the "upper row,""middlerow," and "lower row" from top to bottom. Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when the left reel 31 stops are referred to as the "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row" from top to bottom. Similarly, the positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when the center reel 31 stops are referred to as the "upper middle row,""middle middle row," and "lower middle row" from top to bottom, and the positions of the "3" symbols displayed in the display window 18 when the right reel 31 stops are referred to as the "upper right row,""middle right row," and "lower right row" from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 3A, a pay line is set for the "9" symbols visible through the display window 18.
Here, an "effective line" refers to a line of symbols arranged when the reel 31 stops, which is a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and which will result in the winning of a certain role when a symbol combination corresponding to that role stops on that line.
Furthermore, an "invalid line" refers to a pattern combination line that is not set as an effective line and is not a target for forming a pattern combination.
In this embodiment, the only valid line, regardless of the game state or number of bets, is the straight "middle line" that passes through "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle" as shown in Figure 3 (A), and all other lines are invalid lines.

For example, in this embodiment, the following lines are all invalid: an "upper line" that is a straight line passing through "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right", an "upper line" that is a straight line passing through "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right", an "upward right line" that is a straight line passing through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right", an "upward right line" that is a straight line passing through "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right", an "small mountain line" that is a small mountain shape passing through "lower left" - "middle middle" - "lower right", an "small V line" that is a small V shape passing through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "upper right", and an "bent line" that is a bent line passing through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "middle right".

The effective lines and ineffective lines are collectively referred to as "symbol combination lines."
The position and number of the pay lines may be different for each game state or each bet amount. For example, in a specific game state, the line sloping downward to the right may be the pay line. Also, for a specific bet amount, there may be multiple pay lines ("5" total: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, a right upward line, and a right downward line).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in this embodiment.
The winning combinations are broadly divided into special winning combinations, replay winning combinations, and small winning combinations.
A symbol combination corresponding to each role and the number of medals to be paid out when a winning combination is achieved are also determined. When all the reels 31 come to a stop, if a symbol combination corresponding to any of the roles stops on an active line (the role is a winning combination), the number of medals corresponding to the role is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded).
However, the number of coins to be paid out when a special combination is won is set to 0. In addition, in the case of a replay, coins are automatically inserted, and a replay can be executed.

4 and 5, the game state of this embodiment includes not in the internal state, in the 1BB internal state (in the 1BB-A internal state, in the 1BB-B internal state), and in the 1BB game state (in the 1BB-A game state, in the 1BB-B game state). In addition, in the non-internal state, the lottery objects are different when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") and when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3").
4 and 5, "2 medals" indicates "when two medals are inserted," and "3 medals" indicates "when three medals are inserted." In addition, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A and inside 1BB-B)," and "in 1BB" indicates "during 1BB play (during 1BB-A play and 1BB-B play)."

The winning numbers "1" to "82" shown in Figures 4 and 5 correspond to small winnings. In this embodiment, the small winnings include "82" types of "small winnings 01" to "small winnings 82".
As shown in Figures 4 and 5, "Small prize 01" to "Small prize 82" are subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted outside the inside, when three medals are inserted outside the inside, when inside 1BB, and when playing 1BB, and the corresponding symbol combinations can be displayed stopped on an active line (winning).

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, for "Small Prize 01" to "Small Prize 06", the number of medals paid out (awarded) when winning is set to "10" in all cases, when two medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when three medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 4 and 5, for "Small Prize 07" to "Small Prize 78", the number of medals paid out (awarded) when a prize is won is set to "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when three medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, for "small prize 79" to "small prize 82", the number of medals paid out (awarded) when winning is set to "3" in all cases when two medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when three medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 01" is only one type of symbol number "1", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1". In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all "3" reels 31 arranged in "PB=1" (which can always be displayed on a pay line regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 19(1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 01" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 01" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "downward right line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small role 02" is only one type, the role number "2", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 03" is only one type, the role number "3". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 04" is only one type, the role number "4", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 05" is only one type, the role number "5". Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "small role 06" is only one type, the role number "6".
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 02" to "small win 06" are all, like "small win 01", in which the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in "PB = 1". In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 02" to "small win 06" are all, like "small win 01", in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are arranged in "PB = 1".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19(2) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small Win 02" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "top line" (invalid line) passing through the "top left"-"top middle"-"top right"
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19(3) described later, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", and when "Small win 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "small win 04" is won), "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right"

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(2) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 05" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 05" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "Small hill line" (invalid line) passing through the "bottom left"-"middle middle"-"bottom right".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(3) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 06" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small win 06" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "bottom line" (invalid line) passing through the "bottom left"-"bottom middle"-"bottom right".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 07" is only one type of symbol number "7", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbol on the center reel 31 is arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 07" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement (the symbols can always be displayed stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switch 42), and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (middle reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement (the symbols can sometimes be displayed stopped on an active line and sometimes not depending on the timing of operation of the stop switch 42).

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 08" is only one type, which is the role number "8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 09" is only one type, which is the role number "9", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 10" is only one type, which is the role number "10".
In addition, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 08" to "Small Winning 10," like "Small Winning 07," the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1," but the symbols on the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1."
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 08" to "Small Winning 10", like "Small Winning 07", are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the middle reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 11" is only one type, which is the role number "11". The symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 11" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 12" is only one type, which is the role number "12", the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 13" is only one type, which is the role number "13", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 14" is only one type, which is the role number "14".
In addition, in the pattern combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 12" to "Small Winning 14," like "Small Winning 11," the patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1," but the patterns on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1."
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 12" to "small win 14" are all, like "small win 11", symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 15" is only one type, which is the symbol number "15". The symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 15" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 16" is only one type, which is the role number "16", the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 17" is only one type, which is the role number "17", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 18" is only one type, which is the role number "18".
In addition, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 16" to "Small Winning 18," like "Small Winning 15," the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1," but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1."
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 16" to "Small Winning 18" are all, like "Small Winning 15", symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 19" is only one type of role number "11", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 20" is only one type of role number "20". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 21" is only one type of role number "21", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 22" is only one type of role number "22".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 19" to "Small Winning 22", like "Small Winning 11" to "Small Winning 14", are such that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winnings 19" to "Small Winnings 22", like "Small Winnings 11" to "Small Winnings 14", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 23" is only one type of role number "23", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 24" is only one type of role number "24". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 25" is only one type of role number "25", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 26" is only one type of role number "26".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 23" to "Small Winning 26", like "Small Winning 15" to "Small Winning 18", are such that the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration.
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winnings 23" to "Small Winnings 26", like "Small Winnings 15" to "Small Winnings 18", are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 27" is only one type of role number "27", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 28" is only one type of role number "28". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 29" is only one type of role number "29", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small role 30" is only one type of role number "30".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 27" to "Small Winning 30", like "Small Winning 07" to "Small Winning 10", are such that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 27" to "Small Winning 30", like "Small Winning 07" to "Small Winning 10", are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the middle reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is only one type, which is the symbol number "31". The symbols on the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (middle reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 32" to "small prize 46" are each only one of the prize numbers "32" to "46".
In addition, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 32" to "Small Winning 46," the symbols on the center reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1," similar to "Small Winning 31," but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1."
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 32" to "small win 46" are all, like "small win 31," symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (middle reel 31) is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 47" is only one type, which is the symbol number "47". The symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (the right reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 48" to "small prize 62" are each only one of the prize numbers "48" to "62".
In addition, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 48" to "small win 62," the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, similar to "small win 47," but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration.
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 48" to "small prize 62" are all, like "small prize 47", symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (the right reel 31) is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 63" is only one type of symbol number "63", and the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 64" to "small prize 78" are only one type each of the prize numbers "64" to "78".
In addition, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 64" to "Small Winning 78," like "Small Winning 63," the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in "PB=1," but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1," respectively.
In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 64" to "small prize 78" are all, like "small prize 63", symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 79" is only one type, the prize number "79", and the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 79" is displayed stopped on the valid line (middle line) (when "small prize 79" is won), "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" are displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right"

The only symbol combination that corresponds to "small win 80" is the symbol number "80". As with "small win 79", the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1", but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged as "PB≠1".
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 80", like "small win 79", is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 80" is displayed stopped on the valid line (middle line) (when "small win 80" is won), "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" are displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle"-"upper right" in the same way as "small win 79".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 81" is only one type, the prize number "81", and the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration.
In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 81" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 81" is "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry", and when the "small win 81" is won, "cherry"-"cherry"-"cherry" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 82" is only one type of symbol number "82", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 82" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small prize 82" is "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon", and when the "small prize 82" is won, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).

The symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is only one type, which is the winning number "83", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged as "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay", and when "Replay" is won, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line).

As shown in FIG. 5, a "replay" becomes the subject of a lottery when two medals are inserted outside the internal reel, when three medals are inserted outside the internal reel, and when the reel is inside the 1BB reel, and the corresponding symbol combination can stop on an active line (win). However, during 1BB play, the replay is not the subject of a lottery, and therefore the corresponding symbol combination will not stop on an active line (win).
Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is displayed (a winning combination), a medal is automatically inserted and the player can play the game again.

5 correspond to special roles (roles). In this embodiment, there are two types of special roles: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B".
As shown in Fig. 5, "1BB-A" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted during non-internal play, and is not eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted. In contrast, "1BB-B" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted during non-internal play, and is not eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is only one type, which is the role number "84", and the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration.
As described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can win a prize).

When the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-A win" occurs, and although no medals are paid out in the current game, the game transitions to "1BB-A game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A inside".

In this embodiment, when two medals are inserted outside the inside, the "1BB-A condition device" can be activated alone (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-A condition device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on an active line in the game in which the "1BB-A condition device" is activated alone, the game will transition to "1BB-A inside" from the next game.
In addition, if the role selection means 61 determines that a non-winning combination occurs when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on the active line; however, in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 does not determine that a non-winning combination occurs "inside 1BB-A", so once the game moves to "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

In addition, there is only one symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B", which is the role number "85". As with "1BB-A", the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
As described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can win a prize).

When the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-B win" is achieved, and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-B game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B inside".

In this embodiment, when three medals are inserted outside the internal reel, the "1BB-B condition device" can be activated alone (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is activated alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on an active line in the game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is activated alone, the game will transition to "1BB-B internal reel" from the next game.
In addition, if the role selection means 61 determines that a non-winning combination is not won when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the active line; however, in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 does not determine that a non-winning combination is won "inside 1BB-B", so once the game moves to "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

For each of the above-mentioned roles, when a winning combination of symbols corresponding to the winning role is not displayed on a winning line in a game, roles that are carried over to the next game and roles that are not carried over are determined.
In this embodiment, the carried over combination is 1BB ("1BB-A" and "1BB-B"). In this embodiment, all symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB are set to "PB ≠ 1", so even if 1BB is won, there are cases where the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed on the pay line (1BB does not win). When 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later until 1BB is won.

On the other hand, when a minor win or replay is won, the winning combination is only valid for the current game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. In other words, in a game in which such a combination is won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed on an active line, but regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on an active line or not, the right to the winning combination will be extinguished at the end of the game.

6 to 9 are diagrams showing a condition device in this embodiment.
6 to 8 show the small winning combination and replay condition device in this embodiment.
In the notes column of Figures 6 and 7, "push order 123" indicates the push order of "left, center, right," and "push order 132" indicates the push order of "left, right, center." Also, "push order 213" indicates the push order of "center, left, right," and "push order 231" indicates the push order of "center, right, left." Furthermore, "push order 312" indicates the push order of "right, left, center," and "push order 321" indicates the push order of "right, center, left."

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, there are 17 types of small win condition devices, ranging from a "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "1" to a "small win ALL condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "17."
In addition, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role I Condition Device" are subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) when two medals are inserted while not inside, when three medals are inserted while not inside, and when inside 1BB, but are not subject to a lottery (a lottery is not held) during 1BB play.

Furthermore, the "1-coin role ALL condition device" is subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) when two medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when three medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when inside the 1BB reel, and when playing with the 1BB reel.
Furthermore, the "small prize ALL condition device" is not subject to a lottery (lottery is not held) when two medals are inserted while not inside, when three medals are inserted while not inside, or when inside 1BB, but is only subject to a lottery (lottery is held) during 1BB play.

Here, the following methods can be mentioned for controlling the stopping of the reel 31 when multiple types of minor winning combinations with different payout amounts of medals are won.
As a first priority, when all of the symbols (on the reel 31) that constitute the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the pay line, the reel 31 is stopped in that position.
Next, when all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the pay lines (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the reels 31 are controlled to stop according to either "number priority" or "piece priority" as the second priority.

In addition, "number of medals priority" means that, among the symbol combinations of the overlapping winning roles, the symbol of the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination with the greatest number of medals to be paid out is given priority in being stopped and displayed (pulled in) on the pay line.
On the other hand, the "number priority" refers to giving priority to the symbols on the reel 31 in question being displayed stopped on the pay lines so as to maximize the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the pay lines.

In this embodiment, when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Prize F2 Condition Device" are activated, the player will be in a state where multiple types of small prizes (bells) with different payout numbers of medals are won (the so-called "push order bell" state).
When the push order bell is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of coins if the push order is correct, and is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of coins if the push order is incorrect.
As a result, when the push order bell is won, the type of winning minor prize (the symbol combination that stops and is displayed on the winning line) will differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, which will result in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (the number of medals paid out).

The "small win A1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG.
When the winning number "1" is selected by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, a small win and a replay condition device number "1" are generated from the winning number "1". Then, a "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and the replay condition device number "1" is activated.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning combination column in FIG. 6 are won in duplicate.

Furthermore, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "left, center, right (123)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.
When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row due to number priority, when the second middle stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and when the third right stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" to be displayed stopped on an active line with "PB=1".

In this way, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the left reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize A1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 19(1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 01" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on a downward sloping right line (inactive line).

In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, "REPLAY" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (active line).
As a result, at the first left stop when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "replay" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the left reel stops first during operation of the "small win A1 condition device", "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR", "replay" and "bell" on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 01" is one type, "replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 01" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 01" is one type, "watermelon."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 07" or "small win 08" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the left middle row, and then at the second right stop, a "bell" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the right middle row to allow either a "small prize 07" or a "small prize 08" to be won, based on the number of pieces being given priority. After that, at the third middle stop, a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on the "4" symbol, so unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" through "4" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "red 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on the "9" symbol, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "5" to "9" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle row is "1/4".
From the above, since the probability of getting a "Blue 7" or a "Red 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is "1/2", the probability of getting a symbol combination corresponding to a "Small win 07" or a "Small win 08" to stop on an active line is also "1/2".

In this way, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, then due to quantity priority, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 07" or "small prize 08" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops on the left, but is incorrect when the second reel stops on the right, a "bell" which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 01" and which is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31 will be displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing the "minor prize 01" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting "small win 07" and "small win 08" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting "small win 07" and "small win 08" is only one type, "bell".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the "red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and at the third right stop, the "red 7" or "blue 7" (both PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "red 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "5" symbol, so unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "1" through "5" on the left reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

In addition, since the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is only positioned at number "8", unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "4" through "8" on the right reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is only positioned at number "3", unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "19" or "0" through "3" on the right reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor symbol 31" or "minor symbol 32" being displayed on the winning line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped for the first time, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 31" or "small prize 32" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line, due to the priority of the number of coins.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 01" and which is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "minor prize 01" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 31" and "small win 32" is only one type, "red 7", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 31" and "small win 32" is only one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, left, right (213)."

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described below, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 will have a "cherry" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the left reel 31 will have a "white BAR" (PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row, and at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 will have a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the center middle row.

2, since the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "15" symbol, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "11" to "15" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle left is "1/4".
In addition, since the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on the "14" symbol, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "10" to "14" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at number "19", unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "15" to "19" on the center reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small symbol 53" or "small symbol 54" stopping to be displayed on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "small prize A1 condition device" is in operation, the number of medals is prioritized, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 53" or "small prize 54" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the right, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 01" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing the "minor win 01" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 53" and "small win 54" is only one type, "white BAR", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 53" and "small win 54" is only one type, "cherry".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)."

As shown in FIG. 14 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Prize 01", "Small Prize 07", "Small Prize 08", "Small Prize 31", "Small Prize 32", "Small Prize 53" or "Small Prize 54".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" and "small win 08" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 31", "small prize 32", "small prize 53" and "small prize 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Thus, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4". Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on all "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement (1), and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement (2).

In addition, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all three reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is "blank"-"red 7"-"replay", which is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of reel 31 with number priority when the "small win A1 condition device" inside "1BB-A" is activated.
For example, since the symbol on the center reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "red 7," the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is "red 7" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A" is "two." Therefore, since the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is "watermelon" is the same as the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is "watermelon," the "watermelon" on the center reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line at the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrect) in a game in which the "small role A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A," by prioritizing the number of symbols.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "blank" symbol that is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with the number of pieces being prioritized when the "small win A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated.
Similarly, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "replay", which is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with the number of pieces being prioritized when the "small win A1 condition device" of "1BB-A inside" is activated.

The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B", like the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A", is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number of symbols when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B".
Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number of pieces when the "small win A2 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" inside "1BB-A" are activated.
Similarly, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of reel 31 with number priority when the "small prize A2 condition device" to "small prize F2 condition device" inside "1BB-B" are activated.

In this embodiment, there are two types of "1BB", "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". When two medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-A" is held and a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed. When three medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-B" is held and a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of medals inserted may be always "3" with "1BB" as one type. In this case, it is preferable that the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with the priority on the number when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" in "1BB" are activated.

The "small prize A2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6, and when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "Small Prize A2 Condition Device" is activated, just as when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "left, center, right (123)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 09" or "small win 10" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 33" or "small win 34" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 33" or "small win 34" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, in the same way as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, left, right (213)."

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/8" based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small Prize A2 Condition Device" replaces the "Small Prize 07" and "Small Prize 08" of the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 09" and "Small Prize 10", replaces the "Small Prize 31" and "Small Prize 32" of the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 33" and "Small Prize 34", and replaces the "Small Prize 53" and "Small Prize 54" of the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 49" and "Small Prize 50".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated.

The "small prize B1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6, and when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "left, right, center (132)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left first stop is reached, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row due to number priority, when the right second stop is reached, the "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, and when the middle third stop is reached, the "Cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" to be displayed stopped on an active line with "PB=1".

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win B1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 19(2) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the upper line (inactive line).

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (active line).
As a result, at the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Black BAR" or "White BAR" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the left reel stops first during operation of the "small win B1 condition device", "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR", "replay" and "bell" on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 02" is only one type, "Replay", the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 02" is only one type, "Cherry", and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 02" is only one type, "Replay".
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" or "small win 12" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the left middle row, and then at the second middle stop, a "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row to allow either a "small win 11" or a "small win 12" to be won, based on the number of units. After that, at the third right stop, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on number "13", so unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on the "18" symbol, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the “black BAR” or “white BAR” on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the right middle row is “1/2”, and therefore the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the “small win 11” or “small win 12” being stopped and displayed on the active line is “1/2”.

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, then due to number priority, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 11" or "small win 12" (both paying out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" (paying out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops on the left, but is incorrect when the second reel stops in the middle, a "bell" which is a different symbol from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and which is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, will be displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the pay line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor prize 02" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 11" and "small win 12" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the center reel 31 constituting the "small win 11" and "small win 12" is only one type, "bell".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center left right (213)" push order, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 35" or "small win 36" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, when the left second stop occurs, the "black BAR" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "10" symbol, so unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "6" through "10" on the left reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle left). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle left is 1/4.

In addition, since the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on number "13", unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is only positioned at number "18", unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping to be displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 35" or "small win 36" stopping to be displayed on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the center reel 31 is stopped for the first time, the number of medals is prioritized, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 35" or "small win 36" (both pay out 1 medal), which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" (pays out 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on the active line, can be displayed on the active line.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby preventing the "minor prize 02" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 35" and "small win 36" is only one type, "black BAR", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 35" and "small win 36" is only one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 35" or "small win 36" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, left, right (213)."

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" or "small win 48" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 will have a "cherry" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the left reel 31 will have a "red 7" (PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row, and at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 will have a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the center middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" being stopped and displayed in the middle left row of the left reel 31 is "1/4".
In addition, the probability of getting the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 to stop and display in the middle-middle row is "1/4", and the probability of getting the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 to stop and display in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", so the probability of getting either the "red 7" or the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 to stop and display in the middle-middle row is "1/2".
Therefore, the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" or "small win 48" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the number of medals is prioritized, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" or "small win 48" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the right, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "Replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing the "Small Win 02" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 47" and "small win 48" is only one type, "red 7", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 47" and "small win 48" is only one type, "cherry".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on a winning line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 47" or "small win 48" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)".

As shown in FIG. 14 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 02", "small prize 11", "small prize 12", "small prize 35", "small prize 36", "small prize 47" or "small prize 48".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 11" and "small win 12" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 35", "small prize 36", "small prize 47" and "small prize 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Thus, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4". Therefore, this is greater than the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on all "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement (1), and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement (2).

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all three reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

The "small prize B2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of FIG. 6, and when the "small prize B2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning role column of FIG. 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize B2 condition device" is activated, just as when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "left, right, center (132)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 13" or "small win 14" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols being given priority.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 37" or "small win 38" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 37" or "small win 38" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, left, right (213)."

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 57" or "small win 58" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 57" or "small win 58" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/8" based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small prize B2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 11" and "small prize 12" of the "Small prize B1 condition device" with "Small prize 13" and "Small prize 14", replaces the "Small prize 35" and "Small prize 36" of the "Small prize B1 condition device" with "Small prize 37" and "Small prize 38", and replaces the "Small prize 47" and "Small prize 48" of the "Small prize B1 condition device" with "Small prize 57" and "Small prize 58".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

The "small prize C1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6, and when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center, left, right (213)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center left right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row due to the number of coins being given priority, when the left second stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" to be displayed stopped on an active line with "PB=1".

In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03", which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 19(3) described later, when "small prize 03" is won, "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed stopped on the middle line (effective line).

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped first, a "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (effective line), and then, when the left reel 31 is stopped second, a "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "replay" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay", "bell" and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the pattern on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" is only one type of "bell", the pattern on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" is also only one type of "bell", and the pattern on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" is also only one type of "bell".
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on a valid line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" or "small win 16" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, a "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row, and then at the second right stop, a "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row to allow for the winning of either a "small win 15" or a "small win 16" based on number priority. After that, at the third left stop, a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "red 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "5" symbol, so unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "1" through "5" on the left reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "0" symbol, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "16" to "19" or "0" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle left row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability of getting a "red 7" or a "blue 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the middle left row is "1/2", and therefore the probability of getting a symbol combination corresponding to a "minor win 15" or a "minor win 16" to stop on an active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, then due to quantity priority, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 15" or "small win 16" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops in the middle but is incorrect when the second reel stops on the right, a "watermelon" which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 03" and which is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31 will be displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing the "minor win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 15" and "small win 16" is only one type, a "bell", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 15" and "small win 16" is only one type, a "watermelon".
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the middle first stop is made but the push order is incorrect when the right second stop is made, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, the "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and at the third right stop, the "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "red 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on the "9" symbol, so unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "5" through "9" on the center reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle row is 1/4.

In addition, since the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on the "4" symbol, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" through "4" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle row is 1/4.

In addition, since the "red 7" on the right reel 31 is only positioned at number "8", unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "4" through "8" on the right reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of having a "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop in the middle row is "1/2", and the probability of having a "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop in the right middle row is "1/4", so the probability of having a symbol combination corresponding to a "small win 63" or a "small win 64" stop on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "small win C1 condition device" is in operation, the number of medals is prioritized, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the left, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 03" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 63" and the "small win 64" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 63" and the "small win 64" is only one type, "red 7".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the left first stop is incorrect in the push order when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, middle, right (123)."

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 51" or "small win 52" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 will have a "cherry" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the left reel 31 will have a "black BAR" (PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row, and at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 will have a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the center middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only on the "10" symbol, so unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "6" through "10" on the left reel 31 are positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle left). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle left is 1/4.

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4," and the probability of the "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4."
From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", so the probability of the pattern combination corresponding to the "small win 51" or "small win 52" being stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "small win C1 condition device" is in operation, the number of medals is prioritized, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 51" or "small win 52" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the right, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 03" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the pay line, thereby preventing the "minor win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 51" and the "small win 52" is only one type, "black BAR", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 51" and the "small win 52" is only one type, "cherry".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on a winning line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 51" or "small win 52" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, left, center (312)."

As shown in FIG. 14 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 03", "small prize 15", "small prize 16", "small prize 51", "small prize 52", "small prize 63" or "small prize 64".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 15" and "small win 16" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 51", "small prize 52", "small prize 63" and "small prize 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Thus, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "minor win C1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4". Therefore, this is greater than the number of symbol combinations in which all "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement (1), and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "two" reels 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement (2).

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all three reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle left), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle middle), and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

The "small prize C2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6, and when the "small prize C2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 6 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize C2 condition device" is activated, just as when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center, left, right (213)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 17" or "small win 18" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the priority of the number of symbols.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 65" or "small win 66" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 65" or "small win 66" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 55" or "small win 56" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 55" or "small win 56" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small Prize C2 Condition Device" replaces the "Small Prize 15" and "Small Prize 16" of the "Small Prize C1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 17" and "Small Prize 18", replaces the "Small Prize 51" and "Small Prize 52" of the "Small Prize C1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 55" and "Small Prize 56", and replaces the "Small Prize 63" and "Small Prize 64" of the "Small Prize C1 Condition Device" with "Small Prize 65" and "Small Prize 66".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

The "small prize D1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 7, and when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center, right, left (231)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row due to the number of coins being given priority, when the right second stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, and when the left third stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" to be displayed stopped on an active line when "PB=1" occurs.

In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the center reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04", which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win D1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 20(1) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 04" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on a right-sloping line (inactive line).

In addition, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped first, the "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line), and then, when the right reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line), and then, when the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line).

As a result, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, a "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, a "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and a "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the center reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, and then the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 04" is one type, "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 04" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 04" is one type, "replay."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15 described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the center reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the center middle row, and then at the second left stop, the "bell" (PB = 1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the left middle row to enable either "small win 19" or "small win 20" to be won, based on the number of pieces being given priority. After that, at the third right stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the right middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on number "13", so unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only on the "18" symbol, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the “black BAR” or “white BAR” on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the right middle row is “1/2”, and therefore the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the “small win 19” or “small win 20” being stopped and displayed on the active line is “1/2”.

In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, then due to quantity priority, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

In addition, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops in the middle, but is incorrect when the second reel stops on the left, a "bell" will be displayed on the activated line, which is a different symbol from the symbol on the left reel 31 (watermelon) that constitutes "minor win 04" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor prize 04" from winning.

Furthermore, the pattern on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 19" and "small win 20" is only one type of "bell", and the pattern on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 19" and "small win 20" is also only one type of "bell".
In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the middle first stop is made but the push order is incorrect when the left second stop is made, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and at the third right stop, a "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the right-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/2", and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the right middle row is "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" being stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win D1 condition device", due to the priority given to the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the left, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 04" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor prize 04" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 67" and the "small win 68" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 67" and the "small win 68" is only one type, "black BAR".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the left first stop is incorrect in the push order when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left, right, middle (132)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left, middle, right (123)".

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 will have a "cherry" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the left reel 31 will have a "black BAR" (PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row, and at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 will have a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both PB≠1) stopped and displayed in the center middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 being displayed in the middle middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 being displayed in the middle middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" being stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win D1 condition device", due to the priority of the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the right, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 04" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "Replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "Small Win 04" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 59" and "small win 60" is only one type, "black BAR", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 59" and "small win 60" is only one type, "cherry".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on a winning line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, center, left (321)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "right, left, center (312)".

As shown in FIG. 15 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 04", "small prize 19", "small prize 20", "small prize 59", "small prize 60", "small prize 67" or "small prize 68".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 19" and "small win 20" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 59", "small prize 60", "small prize 67" and "small prize 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Thus, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4". Therefore, this is greater than the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on all "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement (1), and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement (2).

In addition, when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all three reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle left), when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle middle), and when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the pay line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on an active line, and when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on an active line.

The "small prize D2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 7, and when the "small prize D2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize D2 condition device" is activated, just as when the "small prize D1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center, right, left (231)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center left center (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" or "small win 22" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the priority of the number of symbols.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 69" or "small win 70" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 69" or "small win 70" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small prize D2 condition device" replaces the "Small prize 19" and "Small prize 20" of the "Small prize D1 condition device" with "Small prize 21" and "Small prize 22", replaces the "Small prize 59" and "Small prize 60" of the "Small prize D1 condition device" with "Small prize 61" and "Small prize 62", and replaces the "Small prize 67" and "Small prize 68" of the "Small prize D1 condition device" with "Small prize 69" and "Small prize 70".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

The "small win E1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column in FIG. 7, and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column in FIG. 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize E1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "right, left, center (312)", and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15 described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 has a "watermelon" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row, with number priority, at the second left stop, the left reel 31 has a "watermelon" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row, and at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 has a "bell" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the center middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" to be stopped and displayed on the activated line at "PB=1".

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05", which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win E1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line, based on the number of medals being given priority.
As shown in FIG. 20(2) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 05" is displayed stopped on an active line, "bell"-"bell"-"bell" is displayed stopped on the small hill line (inactive line).

In addition, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (effective line), and when the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, a "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, a "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and a "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, and then the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 05" is only one type of "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 05" is only one type of "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 05" is only one type of "watermelon."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" or "small win 24" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15 described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the right middle row, and then at the second middle stop, "replay" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row to enable either "small win 23" or "small win 24" to be won, based on the number of pieces being given priority. After that, at the third left stop, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the left middle row.

As described above, the probability of getting the "red 7" on the left reel 31 to stop and be displayed in the middle left row is "1/4," and the probability of getting the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 to stop and be displayed in the middle left row is also "1/4."
From the above, the probability of getting a "red 7" or a "blue 7" on the left reel 31 to stop in the middle left row is "1/2", and therefore the probability of getting a symbol combination corresponding to a "minor win 23" or a "minor win 24" to stop on an active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, then, due to quantity priority, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" or "small win 24" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops on the right, but is incorrect when the second reel stops in the middle, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 05" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" of the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" of the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor win 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 23" and "small win 24" is only one type, "watermelon," and the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 23" and "small win 24" is only one type, "replay."
In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, by limiting the types of patterns on the right reel 31 and center reel 31 that constitute the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the first right reel stops but the push order is incorrect when the second center reel stops, the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "REPLAY" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, a "RED 7" or "BLUE 7" (both PB≠1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and at the third right stop, a "BLACK BAR" (PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the right-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed in the middle row is "1/2", and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the right middle row is "1/4", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to the "small symbol 71" or "small symbol 72" being displayed on the active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win E1 condition device", due to the priority of the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the left, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 05" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing the "minor win 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 71" and "small win 72" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 71" and "small win 72" is only one type, "black BAR".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the left first stop is incorrect in the push order when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, middle, right (123)."

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and at the third right stop, the "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB≠1") on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability that the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability that the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is also "1/4". In addition, the probability that the "red 7" of the right reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4", and the probability that the "blue 7" of the right reel 31 will be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is "1/2". The probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is "1/4", and the probability that the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4", so the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small combination 43" or "small combination 46" can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, due to the priority of the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 05" and which is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor prize 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the patterns on the left reel 31 that constitute the "small prize 43" and the "small prize 46" are of two types, "black BAR" or "white BAR", and the patterns on the right reel 31 that constitute the "small prize 43" and the "small prize 46" are of two types, "red 7" or "blue 7", but the pattern on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small prize 43" and the "small prize 46" is of only one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the middle reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, left, right (213)."

As shown in FIG. 15 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize E1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 05", "small prize 23", "small prize 24", "small prize 43", "small prize 46", "small prize 71" or "small prize 72".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 23" and "small win 24" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 43", "small prize 46", "small prize 71" and "small prize 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Thus, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4". Therefore, this is greater than the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on all "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement (1), and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement (2).

In addition, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all three reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize E1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize E1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on an active line, and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on an active line.

The "small win E2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column in FIG. 7, and when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column in FIG. 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize E2 condition device" is activated, just as when the "small prize E1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "right, left, center (312)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" or "small win 26" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols being given priority.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 77" or "small win 78" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 77" or "small win 78" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 44" or "small win 45" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 44" or "small win 45" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, in the same way as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, left, right (213)."

The "Small prize E2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 23" and "small prize 24" of the "Small prize E1 condition device" with "Small prize 25" and "Small prize 26", replaces the "small prize 43" and "small prize 46" of the "Small prize E1 condition device" with "Small prize 44" and "Small prize 45", and replaces the "small prize 71" and "small prize 72" of the "Small prize E1 condition device" with "Small prize 77" and "Small prize 78".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

The "small prize F1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 7, and when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small prizes described in the winning prize column in FIG. 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, the correct button press sequence is "right, center, left (321)," and any other button press sequence is an incorrect button press sequence.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15 described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 has "watermelon" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row due to the number of coins being given priority, at the second middle stop, the middle reel 31 has "replay" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the middle middle row, and at the third left stop, the left reel 31 has "watermelon" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" to be stopped and displayed on the activated line at "PB=1".

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, and the number of medals is given priority, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06", which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win F1 condition device", is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As shown in FIG. 20(3) described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "minor prize 06" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the lower line (inactive line).

In addition, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the right middle row (active line), and then, when the middle reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and then, when the left reel 31 is stopped third, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the left middle row (active line).

As a result, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, a "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, a "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and a "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, and then the "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 06" is only one type, "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 06" is only one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 06" is only one type, "watermelon."
In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on a pay line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 15 described later, when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, at the first right stop, the right reel 31 displays a "watermelon" (PB = 1) in the right middle row, and at the second left stop, the left reel 31 displays a "bell" (PB = 1) in the left middle row to allow either the "small prize 27" or the "small prize 28" to be won, based on the number of pieces. After that, at the third middle stop, the center reel 31 displays a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") in the middle middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4," and the probability of the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4."
From the above, since the probability of getting the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 to stop in the middle row is "1/2", the probability of getting the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 27" or "minor win 28" to stop on the pay line is also "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, then due to number priority, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both paying out 1 coin), which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is correct when the first reel stops on the right, but is incorrect when the second reel stops on the left, a "bell" which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 06" and which is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, will be displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing the "minor prize 06" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 27" and the "small win 28" is only one type, "watermelon", and the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 27" and the "small win 28" is only one type, "bell".
In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 and the left reel 31 that form the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first right stop is the correct push order but the second left stop is incorrect, by limiting the type of patterns on each to one type, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, the left reel 31 will have a "replay" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the left middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second middle stop, the middle reel 31 will have a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) stopped and displayed in the middle row, and at the third right stop, the right reel 31 will have a "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) stopped and displayed in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being displayed in the middle-middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being displayed in the middle-middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the right-middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of having the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/2", and the probability of having the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stopped and displayed in the right middle row is "1/4", so the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" stopped and displayed on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win F1 condition device", due to the priority of the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first reel stops on the left, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 06" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing the "minor win 06" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 75" and "small win 76" is only one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 75" and "small win 76" is only one type, "red 7."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the left first stop is incorrect in the push order when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left, right, center (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left, center, right (123)."

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the center middle row based on the number of pieces being given priority, at the second left stop, the "red 7" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, and at the third right stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB≠1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4", and the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the right middle row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the left middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the right middle row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" being displayed on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, due to the priority of the number of medals, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.
In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 06" and which is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "replay" on the middle reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor prize 06" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 39" and "small win 40" is only one type, "red 7", and the symbol on the center reel 31 constituting the "small win 39" and "small win 40" is only one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "middle, left, right (213)."

As shown in FIG. 15 described later, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 06", "small prize 27", "small prize 28", "small prize 39", "small prize 40", "small prize 75" or "small prize 76".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on all "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 27" and "small win 28" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 39", "small prize 40", "small prize 75" and "small prize 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Thus, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4". Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on all "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement (1), and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement (2).

In addition, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all "3" reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols arranged in "PB=1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols arranged in "PB≠1" are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

In addition, when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right).
For this reason, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

The "small win F2 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles described in the winning role column of FIG. 7, and when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small wins described in the winning role column of FIG. 7 are overlappingly won.
When the "small prize F2 condition device" is activated, just as when the "small prize F1 condition device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "right, center, left (321)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 coins) on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always) based on the number of coins.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, center (312)," the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 29" or "small win 30" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the number of symbols.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 73" or "small win 74" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/right/middle (132)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 73" or "small win 74" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/8" based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left/middle/right (123)."

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" or "small win 42" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, right, left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" or "small win 42" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "middle, left, right (213)."

The "Small prize F2 condition device" replaces the "small prize 27" and "small prize 28" of the "Small prize F1 condition device" with "Small prize 29" and "Small prize 30", replaces the "Small prize 39" and "Small prize 40" of the "Small prize F1 condition device" with "Small prize 41" and "Small prize 42", and replaces the "Small prize 75" and "Small prize 76" of the "Small prize F1 condition device" with "Small prize 73" and "Small prize 74".
The stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small prize G condition device" includes the "small prize 79" and the "small prize 80" as winning roles, and when the "small prize G condition device" is activated, the "small prize 79" and the "small prize 80" are both won.
When the "small win G condition device" is activated, the reel 31 is controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" or "small win 80" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the left middle row (active line), when the reel stops in the middle row, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and when the reel stops on the right, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the right middle row (active line).
As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4," and the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle left row is also "1/4."

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the “black BAR” or “white BAR” of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the left middle row is “1/2”, and therefore the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the “small win 79” or the “small win 80” can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is “1/2”.
However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18 (aiming for the "black BAR"), the "black BAR" (number 10) or "white BAR" (number 15) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the left middle row (active line). In this case, since the "cherry" on the center reel 31 and the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 are both in the "PB=1" configuration, it is possible to always win "small prize 79" or "small prize 80".
When the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" or "small win 80" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" is displayed stopped on a line sloping to the right (inactive line).

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small prize H condition device" includes a "small prize 81" as a winning combination, and when the "small prize H condition device" is activated, the "small prize 81" is won.
When the "small win H condition device" is activated, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a symbol combination (PB≠1) corresponding to the "small win 81" is displayed on the activated line regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, when the reel is stopped on the left, a "Cherry" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the left middle row (active line), when the reel is stopped in the middle row, a "Cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and when the reel is stopped on the right, a "Cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the right middle row (active line).
2, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is arranged in three positions, namely, number "4", number "9" and number "14". Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" to "14" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left), but if the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "15" to "19" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left).

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability of the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row) is "3/4", and therefore the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 81" being stopped and displayed on the active line is "3/4".
However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated (aiming for the "black BAR") at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18, the "cherry" number "9" or "14" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the left middle row (active line). In this case, since the "cherries" on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both in the "PB=1" configuration, it is possible to always win the "minor prize 81".
When "small win 81" is won, "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" are displayed stopped on the middle line (effective line).

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small prize I condition device" includes a "small prize 82" as a winning combination, and when the "small prize I condition device" is activated, the "small prize 82" is won.
When the "small win I condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small win 82" on an active line with a probability of 1/1 (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when stopped on the left, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the left middle row (active line), when stopped in the middle, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and when stopped on the right, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the right middle row (active line).
When "small prize 82" is won, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" are displayed stopped on the middle line (effective line).

The "1-piece role ALL condition device" includes all 1-piece roles ("small role 07" to "small role 78") as winning roles, and when the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is activated, all 1-piece roles are overlappingly won.
When the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "small role 07" to "small role 78" on an active line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42.
When the "1 coin role ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "small role 07" to "small role 78" (all of which "pay out 1 coin") will be a winning combination, and there will be no non-winning combinations.

The "small prize ALL condition device" includes all small prizes ("small prize 01" to "small prize 82") as winning prizes, and when the "small prize ALL condition device" is activated, all small prizes are won in a overlapping manner.
When the "small win ALL condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to any one of "small win 01" to "small win 06" on an active line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42.
When the "small prize ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "small prize 01" to "small prize 06" (each of which "pays out 10 coins") will win, and there will be no non-winning combinations.

As shown in FIG. 8, there is only one type of "replay condition device", which is a small win and the replay condition device number "18".
As shown in FIG. 8, the "replay condition device" includes "replay" as a winning combination, and when the "replay condition device" is activated, a state in which "replay" is won is achieved.
When the "replay condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "replay" on an active line with a probability of "1/1" (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when stopped on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (active line), when stopped in the middle, "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and when stopped on the right, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row (active line).
When a symbol combination corresponding to "replay" appears stopped on an active line, a medal is automatically inserted and the player can play again.
When a "Replay" wins, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" will be displayed stopped on the middle line (active line).

Fig. 9 shows a reel condition device. As shown in Fig. 9, in this embodiment, the reel condition device is provided with two types of reel condition devices: a "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "1", and a "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to the reel condition device number "2".
As shown in FIG. 10, the "1BB-A condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted that are not in the internal state, and is not eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted that are not in the internal state.
In contrast, the "1BB-B condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted that are not inside the box, and is not eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted that are not inside the box.

In addition, when two non-internal medals are inserted and the winning number "19" is selected by the role selection means 61, the role condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "19", and the "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the role condition device number "1" is activated.
In contrast, when three non-internal medals are inserted and the winning number "20" is selected by the role selection means 61, the role condition device number "2" is generated from this winning number "20", and the "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to the role condition device number "2" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line.
When the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-A win" occurs, and although no medals are paid out in the current game, the game transitions to "1BB-A game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A inside".

If the role selection means 61 does not result in a winning result when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line. However, in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 does not result in a non-winning result while "inside 1BB-A", so once the game moves to "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line.

In addition, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
In this embodiment, a symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not set, and during "1BB-A game", the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not displayed stopped, and "RB game" is continuously executed.
In addition, during "RB play", only two types of "1-piece role ALL condition device" and "small role ALL condition device" become the lottery target of the role selection means 61, and either the "1-piece role ALL condition device" or the "small role ALL condition device" operates every game. Therefore, during "RB play", that is, during "1BB-A play", the probability of winning a small role is higher than during non-internal play and during "1BB-A internal play".

Furthermore, during "RB play", the prescribed number (the number of medals bet to start play) becomes "3", and the "1 medal role ALL condition device" is activated with a probability of "60535/65536", and "1" medal is paid out. Therefore, during "RB play", that is, during "1BB-A play", the player's medals are decreasing.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied. That is, the end condition of the "RB game" is set to when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied.

Furthermore, the "1BB-A game" continues until the total number of medals acquired (the number of medals paid out, the number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the total number of medals acquired exceeds "210." In other words, the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is set to be when the total number of medals acquired exceeds "210."
Then, when the "RB game" is ended, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again. In this way, the "RB game" is executed continuously during the "1BB-A game".
Also, when the "RB game" ends, if the ending condition for the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" ends and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-A game" is ended and a transition is made to a non-internal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line.
When the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is displayed stopped on an active line, a "1BB-B win" is achieved, and although no medals are paid out in this game, the game will transition to a "1BB-B game" from the next game.
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on the pay line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B inside".

If the role selection means 61 does not result in a winning result when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 does not result in a non-winning result "inside 1BB-B", so once the game moves to "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

Also, during "1BB-B game", "RB game" is executed continuously, similarly to "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, like the "1BB-A game," the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210."
When the "RB game" is ended, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" ends, if the ending condition for the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" ends and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-B game" is ended and a transition is made to a non-internal state.

FIG. 10 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state in this embodiment.
In Fig. 10, "2" indicates "when two medals are inserted", and "3" indicates "when three medals are inserted". In addition, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB-A" and "inside 1BB-B", and "in 1BB" indicates "1BB-A is being played" and "1BB-B is being played".

Dividing the numbers shown in FIG. 10 by "65536" gives the probability of winning for each winning number.
For example, in FIG. 10, the number of places for the winning number "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area is "2500", so the winning probability of the winning number "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area is "2500/65536".
Also, for example, when the winning number "1" is selected in the lottery by the role selection means 61, a small role and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1", and the "small role A1 condition device" corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "1" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 10, the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize I condition device" are subject to lottery when not inside and when inside (when inside 1BB-A, when inside 1BB-B), but are not subject to lottery when inside 1BB (when playing 1BB-A, when playing 1BB-B).
In addition, the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is subject to lottery in all game states.
Furthermore, unlike the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role I Condition Device," the "Small Role ALL Condition Device" is only eligible for selection during 1BB (during 1BB-A play, during 1BB-B play), and is not eligible for selection during non-internal and internal play (during 1BB-A internal play, during 1BB-B internal play).

Furthermore, like the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role I Condition Device," the "Replay Condition Device" is subject to a lottery when it is not in the internal state and when it is in the internal state (when it is in the 1BB-A state, when it is in the 1BB-B state), but is not subject to a lottery when it is in the 1BB state (when it is playing 1BB-A, when it is playing 1BB-B).
In addition, the "1BB-A condition device" is only subject to the lottery when two medals are inserted outside the internal state, and is not subject to the lottery in any other game state.
In contrast, the "1BB-B condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted outside the internal state, and is not eligible for the lottery in any other game state.

In other words, when two medals are inserted into the non-internal space, the "1BB-A condition device" is subject to the lottery, but the "1BB-B condition device" is not subject to the lottery.
In contrast, when three medals are inserted into the non-internal space, the "1BB-B condition device" is subject to the lottery, but the "1BB-A condition device" is not subject to the lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, in any game state, the winning number "1" to "20" is selected by the lottery selection means 61, and there is no case of a non-winning number.

Next, the transition of the game state in this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in this embodiment.
In Figure 12, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit to the number of times play is set for each game state, and that game state will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition described in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 judges whether or not a transition condition of the game state is satisfied every game when all the reels 31 are stopped, and when it judges that the transition condition of the game state is satisfied, controls so as to transition the game state.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to the non-internal state. At the time of shipment from the factory, it transitions to the non-internal state. Also, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the power off and then the power is turned on in this state, it transitions to the setting change state. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed and it transitions to the non-internal state.

The non-internal state is maintained until the "1BB-A condition device" or the "1BB-B condition device" is activated. As described above, when two medals are inserted while the non-internal state is in effect, the "1BB-A condition device" is the subject of the lottery, and when three medals are inserted while the non-internal state is in effect, the "1BB-B condition device" is the subject of the lottery.
When two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is activated (1BB-A win), and when the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is displayed stopped on the active line (1BB-A win), the game transitions to "1BB-A game" (1BB-A activated).
In contrast, if the "1BB-A condition device" is activated when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on an active line, the game will transition to "1BB-A inside the internal area."

In addition, in the case of "1BB-A inside", if the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61 when two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but if the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61 when three medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.
However, as described above, in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 will not result in a non-winning result while "inside 1BB-A", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on an active line thereafter, and the state will continue to be "inside 1BB-A".

In addition, when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is activated (1BB-B win), and when the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is displayed stopped on the active line (1BB-B win), the game transitions to "1BB-B game" (1BB-B activated).
In contrast, if the "1BB-B condition device" is activated when three medals are inserted outside the internal reel, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" does not stop and display on the active line, the reel will transition to "1BB-B internal reel."

In addition, in the case of "1BB-B inside", if three medals are inserted and the prize selection means 61 does not select a winning combination, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the active line, but if two medals are inserted and the prize selection means 61 does not select a winning combination, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.
However, as described above, in this embodiment, the role selection means 61 will not result in a non-winning result while "inside 1BB-B", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on an active line thereafter, and the state will continue to be "inside 1BB-B".

In addition, during "1BB-A game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied.
Furthermore, the "1BB-A game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210".

When the "RB game" is ended, if the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" ends, if the ending condition for the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" ends and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-A game" is ended and a transition is made to a non-internal state.

Also, during "1BB-B game", "RB game" is executed continuously, similarly to "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, like the "1BB-A game," the "1BB-B game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210."

When the "RB game" is ended, if the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" ends, if the ending condition for the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" ends and the game moves to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-B game" is ended and a transition is made to a non-internal state.

Next, using Figures 13 to 20, we will explain the characteristics of the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" in this embodiment are activated, and the characteristics of the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are activated.
Figure 13 (1) is a diagram showing the patterns on the left reel 31 that can be displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the left reel stops first when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel stops first when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, and when the left reel stops first when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated.
FIG. 13 (2) shows the symbols on the left reel 31 that can be displayed in the display window 18 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop occurs.
Figure 14 is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize C2 condition device" are activated, and Figure 15 is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small prize D1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are activated.

FIG. 16 shows the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated, in which only the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration.
FIG. 17 shows the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated, in which only the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration.
FIG. 18 shows the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated, in which only the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration.

Figure 19(1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when "small win 01" is won, Figure 19(2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when "small win 02" is won, and Figure 19(3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when "small win 03" is won.
Figure 20 (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when "small win 04" is won, Figure 20 (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when "small win 05" is won, and Figure 20 (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when "small win 06" is won.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "left, center, right (123)," the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 01" (10 coins paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being given priority.

In addition, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win "small prize 01".
As a result, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 13(1), the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the “BLACK BAR” (number 10), “REPLAY” (number 11), and “BELL” (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed in a stopped state within the display window 18 .

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)", the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win "small win 02".

As a result, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the “BLACK BAR” (number 10), “REPLAY” (number 11), and “BELL” (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed in a stopped state within the display window 18 .

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center left right (213)," the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being given priority.
In addition, when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, at the first middle stop, a "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) to win "small prize 03", and then, at the second left stop, a "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row (valid line) to win "small prize 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the second left stop occurs after the first middle stop, as shown in Figure 13 (2), "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the "REPLAY" (No. 11), "BELL" (No. 12), and "WATERMARK" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be displayed in a stopped state within the display window 18. Also, the "BLACK BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not displayed in a stopped state within the display window 18.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both of which pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols being given priority.
In addition, when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row to make it possible to win "small prize 63" or "small prize 64".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 11) of the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (12) of the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
That is, the “BLACK BAR” (number 10), “REPLAY” (number 11), and “BELL” (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed in a stopped state within the display window 18 .

In this way, at the first left stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and at the first left stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11), and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18, as shown in Figure 13 (1).
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the result of the lottery by the role selection means 61) from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

In addition, when the “small win C1 condition device” is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the center first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 13 (2), “REPLAY” (No. 11), “BELL” (No. 12), and “WATERMARK” (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18, but the “BLACK BAR” (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first reel stops on the left (when the push order is incorrect) and when the second reel stops on the left after the first reel stops in the middle (when the push order is correct).

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left button is pressed (when the push order is incorrect), a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the activated line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "minor win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "red 7".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left reel stops (when the push order is incorrect) when the "Small Winning C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on a winning line when the "Small Winning C1 Condition Device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability of the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" being displayed stopped on a valid line is "1/4", the probability of the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" being displayed stopped on a valid line is also "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" being displayed stopped on a valid line is also "1/4".
This makes it possible to reduce the probability of winning (acquisition rate) of a 1-coin role when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated to 1/8, and thus to reduce the payout rate per game, thereby improving design freedom.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the "left, middle, right" push order during operation of the "small win A1 condition device," that is, when the left reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the right reel 31 is stopped third, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device," is displayed stopped on the activated line.
Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 01" is one type, "replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 01" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning Role 01" is one type, "watermelon."

Furthermore, the "replay" on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small prize 01" is in the "PB=1" configuration, the "bell" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small prize 01" is also in the "PB=1" configuration, and the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small prize 01" is also in the "PB=1" configuration.
In this way, the symbols on each reel 31 that make up the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, and the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on a valid line when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated can be reduced by limiting the type of symbols on each reel 31 that make up the symbol combination that is displayed when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each.

The "small prize A2 condition device" is similar to the "small prize A1 condition device."
As shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the "left, middle, right" push order during operation of the "small prize A2 condition device," that is, when the left reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the right reel 31 is stopped third, a symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize A2 condition device," is displayed stopped on the activated line.
As described above, the symbols on each reel 31 constituting the "small win 01" are arranged in the "PB=1" configuration, and the number of symbols on each reel 31 constituting the "small win 01" is one type. This makes it possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated.

As mentioned above, the straight line that passes through the "top left" - "top middle" - "top right" is the "top line", the straight line that passes through the "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right" is the "middle line", and the straight line that passes through the "bottom left" - "bottom middle" - "bottom right" is the "bottom line". Furthermore, the straight line that passes through the "top left" - "middle middle" - "bottom right" is the "downward-right line", the straight line that passes through the "bottom left" - "middle middle" - "top right" is the "upward-right line", and the small mountain-shaped line that passes through the "bottom left" - "middle middle" - "bottom right" is the "small mountain line". In this embodiment, only the "middle line" is the "valid line", and the rest are "invalid lines".

Then, as shown in FIG. 19(1), when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 01"("Replay"-"Bell"-"Watermelon") is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small win 01" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "downward-right line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right row".
Also, as shown in FIG. 19 (2), when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02"("Replay"-"Cherry"-"Replay") is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 02" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "upper line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left"-"upper middle"-"upper right"

Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small win 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", and when "Small win 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (effective line) as shown in FIG. 19 (3).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(1), when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04"("watermelon"-"bell"-"replay") is displayed stopped on an active line (when "small win 04" is won), "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed stopped on an "upward-right line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left row"-"middle middle row"-"upper right row".

Also, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05"("Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Watermelon") is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 05" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "Small Hill Line" (invalid line) passing through the "Lower Left"-"Middle Middle"-"Lower Right"
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06"("Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Watermelon") is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 06" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"lower middle"-"lower right".

Also, as shown in FIG. 20(1), when a symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 04" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "minor win 04" is won), a "cherry" on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left row).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), when a symbol combination corresponding to “Small win 05” is displayed stopped on an active line (when “Small win 05” is won), “Cherry” on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left row).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), when a symbol combination corresponding to “Small Win 06” is displayed stopped on an active line (when “Small Win 06” is won), “Cherry” on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left row).
In this embodiment, when the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped within the display window 18, the symbol combination that can be displayed stopped on the pay line is not a winning symbol combination, regardless of the symbols displayed stopped on the pay lines of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on an active line, there is no symbol combination that will win a prize regardless of the symbols displayed stopped on the active lines of the center reel 31 and the right reel 31. In other words, when a predetermined symbol on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on an active line, there is no so-called single drum winning role that will win a prize regardless of the symbols displayed stopped on the active lines of the center reel 31 and the right reel 31.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the first left stop occurs during the operation of the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Win F2 Condition Device", but there is a case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the push order is correct during the operation of the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" to the "Small Win F2 Condition Device".

Here, in this embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in a game in which the winning number "13" or "14" is drawn by the winning lottery means 61. Also, in a game in which the winning number "13" is drawn, the "small prize G condition device" is activated, making it possible to win "small prize 79" or "small prize 80" ("cherry" lined up on the upward-right line (invalid line)), and in a game in which the winning number "14" is drawn, the "small prize H condition device" is activated, making it possible to win "small prize 81" ("cherry" lined up on the middle line (valid line)). For this reason, when "cherry" lined up on the upward-right line (invalid line) or the middle line (valid line), the player hopes to win the AT lottery.

It is also known that in conventional slot machines 10, a cherry-related role and a special role (bonus) can be won simultaneously (double win) in the role lottery, or an AT lottery is held when a cherry-related role is won, and when a cherry-related role is won, if a "cherry" on the left reel 31 stops and appears in the display window 18 (upper left, middle left, or lower left), the cherry-related role will win regardless of the stopped display patterns on the pay lines of the center reel 31 and right reel 31. In such a slot machine 10, when a "cherry" on the left reel 31 stops and appears in the display window 18 and a cherry-related role wins, the player hopes to win a special role or win the AT lottery.

However, in this embodiment, even if the push order when activating the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" to the "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" is correct, there are cases where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped within the display window 18, but in this case the left reel 31 is at the second or third stop, and at that time two or three "Bells" are lined up on the invalid line.
This allows the player to recognize that a winning combination related to bells has been achieved, and prevents the player from having excessive expectations of winning the AT lottery, even if the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped within the display window 18.

As mentioned above, in the example shown in FIG. 20(1), the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18 (upper left), but the symbol combination displayed on the pay line at this time is the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 04". The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 04" is "watermelon"-"bell"-"replay", which is not a winning symbol combination regardless of the symbols displayed on the pay lines of the center reel 31 and right reel 31. In other words, the symbol combination shown in FIG. 20(1) is not a winning symbol combination related to cherries, nor is it a so-called single drum winning symbol combination. The symbol combinations shown in FIG. 20(2) and (3) are the same as those shown in FIG. 20(1).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on the pay line when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated are symbol combinations that correspond to "small prize 01", "small prize 07", "small prize 08", "small prize 31", "small prize 32", "small prize 53" or "small prize 54".
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols in the "PB = 1" arrangement on all "3" reels 31. The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" can be displayed when the push order is correct.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 07" and "small prize 08" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on "2" reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1" and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 07" and "small prize 08" are capable of being displayed when the push order is correct at the first stop but incorrect at the second stop.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 31", "small prize 32", "small prize 53" and "small prize 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 31", "small prize 32", "small prize 53" and "small prize 54" can be displayed when the push order is incorrect at the first stop.

Thus, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4". Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on all "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement (1), and the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement (2).

In addition, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the pay line when all three reels 31 stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first and second stops, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the third stop.
Furthermore, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, the symbols in the "PB=1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the first stop, and the symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement are displayed stopped on the effective line at the second and third stops.

The symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on an effective line when each of the "small prize A2 condition device" to "small prize F2 condition device" is activated are the same as those of the "small prize A1 condition device."
The symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when each of the condition devices "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated include a symbol combination where the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, a symbol combination where the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and a symbol combination where the symbols on "three" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

In addition, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when each of the condition devices, the "small win A2 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device", is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "4".
Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when each of the condition devices, the "small win A2 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device", is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on "one" reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is "2".

Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when each of the condition devices "Small Winning A2 Condition Device" to "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on "3" reels 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement is "1".
The number of pattern combinations in which the pattern on one reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the patterns on two other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement is greater than the number of pattern combinations in which the patterns on two reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement and the patterns on one other reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the number of pattern combinations in which the patterns on three reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win A1 condition device", depending on the subsequent stopping operation, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device", can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a pattern combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32" which pays out "1" medal less than when the pattern combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stopped and displayed on an active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "small win A1 condition device", depending on the subsequent stopping operation, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54", which pays out "1" medal less than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stopped and displayed on an active line.

14, the symbol on the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" and "small win 32" is "watermelon". The "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01", and is a symbol arranged in the "PB=1" position on the middle reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed when the first middle reel stops and the push order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from stopping on an active line, thereby preventing the "small win 01" from being won.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" and the "small win 32" is only one type, "red 7", and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" and the "small win 32" is only one type, "watermelon".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

14, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is "cherry". This "cherry" on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01", and is a symbol arranged in the "PB=1" position on the right reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed when the first right stop occurs and the push order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from stopping on an active line, thereby preventing the "small win 01" from winning.

In addition, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is only one type, "white BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" and "small win 54" is only one type, "cherry."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the center reel 31 is stopped for the first time, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" which pays out "10" medals, which is the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device", can be stopped and displayed on an active line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64", which pays out "1" medal less than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" is stopped and displayed on an active line.

14, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is "replay". This "replay" on the left reel 31 is a symbol different from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03", and is a symbol arranged in "PB=1" on the left reel 31.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed when the first left reel stops and the push order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, and it is possible to prevent the "bell" on the left reel 31 from stopping on an active line, thereby preventing the "small win 03" from winning.

14, the symbols on the middle reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" are "red 7" or "blue 7." The "red 7" or "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged in a "PB ≠ 1" configuration on the middle reel 31.
14, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is "red 7". The "red 7" on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03", and is a symbol arranged in "PB ≠ 1" on the right reel 31.

The symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "red 7."
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on a winning line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the left reel 31 has a portion where a "BLACK BAR" (number 10), a "REPLAY" (number 11), and a "BELL" (number 12) are arranged in that order.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13(1), when the first left stop occurs during operation of the “small win C1 condition device”, the “black BAR” (number 10), “replay” (number 11) and “bell” (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.
Furthermore, among the “black BAR” (number 10), “replay” (number 11), and “bell” (number 12) on the left reel 31, “replay” which is stopped and displayed in the middle left row is the symbol on the left reel 31 which constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to “small prize 63” and “small prize 64”.

As shown in FIG. 13 (1), when the small win A1 condition device is activated and when the small win B1 condition device is activated and when the small win B1 condition device is activated and when the small win B1 condition device is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11), and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18, just as when the small win C1 condition device is activated and when the small win B ... B1 condition device is activated and when the small win B1 condition device is activated and when the small win B1 condition device is activated and when the small
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the result of the lottery by the role selection means 61) from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B2 condition device" have the correct push order of "left, center, right" or "left, right, center". In other words, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role B2 condition device" are correct in the push order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B2 condition device" are referred to as the "left first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 31", "Small Winning 32", "Small Winning 53" and "Small Winning 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning A2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 33", "Small Winning 34", "Small Winning 49" and "Small Winning 50" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning B1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 35", "Small Winning 36", "Small Winning 47" and "Small Winning 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning B2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 37", "Small Winning 38", "Small Winning 57" and "Small Winning 58" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the condition device is activated and are included in the "left first stop correct group," the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration is "16."

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" have the correct push order of "middle left and right" or "middle right and left". In other words, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" are correct in the push order at the time of the first middle stop.
Here, the "small prize C1 condition device" to the "small prize D2 condition device" are referred to as the "middle first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51", "small win 52", "small win 63" and "small win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 55", "small win 56", "small win 65" and "small win 66" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59", "small win 60", "small win 67" and "small win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small prize D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 61", "small prize 62", "small prize 69" and "small prize 70" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the condition device is activated and are included in the "middle first stop correct group," the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration is "16."

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, the "small role E1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" have the correct push order of "right left center" or "right center left". In other words, the "small role E1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are correct in the push order at the time of the right first stop.
Here, the "small win E1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are referred to as the "right first stop correct answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 43", "small win 46", "small win 71" and "small win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 44", "small win 45", "small win 77" and "small win 78" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 39", "Small Winning 40", "Small Winning 75" and "Small Winning 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 41", "small win 42", "small win 73" and "small win 74" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement and the symbols on the other "two" reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the condition device is activated and are included in the "Right First Stop Correct Group," the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration and the symbols on "two" other reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" configuration is "16."

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" have the correct push order of "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle" or "right middle left". In other words, the "small role C1 condition device" to the "small role F2 condition device" are incorrect in the push order at the time of the first left stop.
Here, the "small prize C1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are referred to as the "left first stop incorrect answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 65" and "small win 66" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 67" and "small win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 69" and "small win 70" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 71" and "small win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 77" and "small win 78" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 75" and "Small Winning 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 73" and "small win 74" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when the condition device is activated, which are included in the “left first stop incorrect solution group”, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the “PB=1” arrangement and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “16”.
18, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor win 63" to "minor win 78" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when a condition device included in the "left first stop incorrect solution group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbols (replays) on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role B2 condition device" and "small role E1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" have the correct push order of "left center right", "left left center", "right left center" or "right center left". In other words, the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role B2 condition device" and "small role E1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" are incorrect in the push order at the time of the first stop in the middle.
Here, the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize B2 condition device" and the "small prize E1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are referred to as the "incorrect answer group at the time of the first middle stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 31" and "Small Winning 32" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning A2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 33" and "Small Winning 34" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning B1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 35" and "Small Winning 36" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning B2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 37" and "Small Winning 38" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 43" and "small win 46" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 44" and "small win 45" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 39" and "small win 40" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 41" and "small win 42" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when the condition device is activated, which are included in the “middle first incorrect solution group”, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “16”.
16, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31" to "small win 46" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when a condition device included in the "middle first incorrect solution group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol (watermelon) on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Also, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" have the correct push order of "left center right", "left left center", "center left right" or "center right left". In other words, the "small role A1 condition device" to the "small role D2 condition device" are incorrect in the push order at the time of the first right stop.
Here, the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize D2 condition device" are referred to as the "right first stop incorrect answer group."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 53" and "Small Winning 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 49" and "Small Win 50" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 47" and "small win 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning B2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 57" and "Small Winning 58" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51" and "small win 52" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning C2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 55" and "Small Winning 56" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59" and "small win 60" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 61" and "small win 62" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on the right reel 31 are in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when the condition device is activated, which are included in the “Right First Stop Incorrect Group”, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 are in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “16”.
17, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor win 53" to "minor win 62" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on a pay line when a condition device included in the "right first stop incorrect solution group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol (cherry) on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

As explained in the "correct group when stopped first on the left", "correct group when stopped first in the middle", "correct group when stopped first on the right", "incorrect group when stopped first on the left", "incorrect group when stopped first in the middle" and "incorrect group when stopped first on the right", by setting the number of pattern combinations consisting of the pattern on "one" reel 31 with a "PB=1" arrangement and the patterns on "two" reels 31 with a "PB≠1" arrangement to "16", it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are activated.

In other words, when playing with the condition devices included in the "incorrect solution group at the first middle stop" (small win A1 condition device, small win A2 condition device, small win B1 condition device, small win B2 condition device, small win E1 condition device, small win E2 condition device, small win F1 condition device, small win F2 condition device), the push order is incorrect at the time of the first middle stop. And, for the symbol combination that can be displayed at the first middle stop in a game with the condition devices included in the "incorrect solution group at the first middle stop", the symbol on the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB = 1" and is of one type (watermelon), and the symbols on both the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in "PB ≠ 1".

Furthermore, in order to allow a symbol combination (one symbol) that can be displayed when the push order is correct in a game when a condition device included in the "incorrect solution group when the first middle stop is reached" is activated to win by priority in number, the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the first middle stop is reached (when the push order is incorrect) in a game when a condition device included in the "incorrect solution group when the first middle stop is reached" is activated is set to "2" for each condition device.
This makes it possible to minimize the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the first middle stop occurs during a game in which a condition device included in the "incorrect solution group when the first middle stop occurs" is activated.
The "incorrect answer group when first stopping on the left" and the "incorrect answer group when first stopping on the right" are the same as the "incorrect answer group when first stopping on the center".

Here, in conventional slot machines, there is known a specification called an accelerator AT, etc. A slot machine equipped with this accelerator AT is provided with multiple types of push-order bells, and each push-order bell is provided with high-point bells and low-point bells with different symbol combinations.
The "high-value bell" refers to a bell with a large payout amount that can be won if the push order is correct when the push order bell is won. The "low-value bell" refers to a bell with a small payout amount that can be won if the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won.
In addition, during non-internal and internal play, a lottery is held for roles that include all push-order bells, and in a game in which a push-order bell is won, if the push-order is correct, the corresponding high-order bell will win, and if the push-order is incorrect, the high-order bell will not win, and any of the corresponding low-order bells can win.

In contrast, during special play, the push order bell is not drawn, and instead, a lottery is held for ALL small prizes, which are won simultaneously with all high-value bells and all low-value bells (double wins), and in a game in which the small prize ALL is won, any of the high-value bells will win the prize.
The probability of winning the small role ALL during the special game is set to be equal to or higher than the probability of winning each push order bell during non-internal and internal play, and the lottery result other than the winning of the small role ALL is set as a non-win or as a winning of the 1-coin role ALL which is a double win of all 1-coin roles.
This makes the probability of winning each high-value bell and each low-value bell during special play equal to or higher than the probability of winning each high-value bell and each low-value bell when not inside or inside, while the player's medals decrease during special play.

In this embodiment, the winning probability of each push order bell (small prize A1 condition device to small prize F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play is set to "2500/65536", and the winning probability of each high-ranking bell (small prize 01 to small prize 06) is set to "5000/65536".
In addition, by setting the probability of winning the small prize ALL (small prize ALL condition device) during special play to "5001/65536", the probability of winning each high-rank bell (small prize 01 to small prize 06) during special play is set to "5001/65536".
However, since the probability of winning each small win during special play may be set to be equal to or higher than the probability of winning each small win during non-internal and internal play, the probability of winning ALL small wins during special play may be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

However, in slot machines equipped with the conventional accelerator AT described above, problems have arisen in that, as each push-order bell is provided with multiple types of push-order bells, and each push-order bell has a high bell and a low bell with a different pattern combination, the total number of pattern combinations that can be displayed when the push-order bell is won increases, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand the pattern combination that corresponds to the high bell.
Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, by appropriately setting each of the pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed during play when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated, the total number of pattern combinations that can be stopped and displayed during play when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated is minimized, and the player can easily understand the winning combinations when the pattern combinations corresponding to "Small Role 01" to "Small Role 06" are stopped and displayed on the pay line.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment is a slot machine in which, in a game in which multiple types of small prizes with different payout numbers are won, the type of small prize that is won varies depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, resulting in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (payout number), and the pattern arrangement is different from that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 in the second embodiment.
The symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the second embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment shown in Fig. 2, except that the "bells" at numbers "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 are replaced with "bell A", the "bells" at numbers "2" and "7" on the left reel 31 are replaced with "bell B", and all of the "bells" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A". Otherwise, the symbol arrangement is the same as that of the reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in Fig. 2.
In the first embodiment, the "Bell" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but in the second embodiment, the "Bell A" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the "Bell B" on the left reel 31 is also in the "PB≠1" arrangement. However, in the second embodiment, the "Bell A" and "Bell B" on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement with the combination of two symbols.

22 and 23 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in this embodiment.
22 and 23, the game state of this embodiment includes non-inside, 1BB inside, and 1BB game. In this embodiment, the special combination is only one type of "1BB".
In Figures 22 and 23, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB", and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB game".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 01", "small win 04" and "small win 05" are obtained by replacing the "bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 02" and "small prize 06" are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" is obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B", and by replacing the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" to "small win 10" are obtained by replacing the "bell" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A."
The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 11" to "small win 14" are obtained by replacing the "bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A."

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 15" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A", and by replacing the "bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 16" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "White BAR" and by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 17" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B" and by replacing the "bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 18" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7", and by replacing the "bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning Symbol 19" to "Small Winning Symbol 22" are obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B" and by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 23" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 24" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 25" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 26" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 27" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 28" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "blue 7."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 29" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR."
The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 30" is obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR."

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 32" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 33" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 34" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 35" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A" and by replacing the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "blue 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 36" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR" and by replacing the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "blue 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 37" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B" and by replacing the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 38" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7", and by replacing the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 39" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A."
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 40" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR" and by replacing the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR".

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 41" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B" and by replacing the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 42" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 43" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell A" and by replacing the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 44" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR" and by replacing the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 45" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "bell B" and by replacing the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 46" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "red 7", and by replacing the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 47" to "small prize 82" and "replay" are the same as those in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is the same as the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" in the first embodiment.

The "small prize condition device" and "replay condition device" are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the "1BB condition device" is the same as the "1BB-A condition device" in the first embodiment.

FIG. 24 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers to be placed for each game state in the second embodiment.
In FIG. 24, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB" and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB play."
As in the first embodiment, dividing the numbers shown in FIG. 24 by "65536" gives the winning probability of each winning number.

As shown in FIG. 24, the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win I condition device" are the subject of the lottery when not in the internal state and when in the internal state (within 1BB), but are not the subject of the lottery when in 1BB (during 1BB play).
In addition, the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is subject to lottery in all game states.
Furthermore, unlike the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize I condition device," the "small prize ALL condition device" is only subject to lottery during 1BB (during 1BB play), and is not subject to lottery during non-internal and internal play (during 1BB).

Furthermore, like the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize I condition device," the "replay condition device" is subject to a lottery when it is not in the internal state and when it is in the internal state (when it is in the 1BB state), but is not subject to a lottery when it is in the 1BB state (when playing 1BB).
In addition, the "1BB condition device" is only an object of the lottery when it is not inside the game, and is not an object of the lottery in any other game state.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in any game state, the winning number "1" to "20" will be selected by the role selection means 61, and there will be no non-winning numbers.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in this embodiment.
In Figure 26, "∞" (infinite) in the number of times column means that there is no upper limit to the number of times play is set for each game state, and that game state will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition described in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 judges whether or not a transition condition of the game state is satisfied every game when all the reels 31 are stopped, and when it judges that the transition condition of the game state is satisfied, controls so as to transition the game state.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to the non-internal state. When shipped from the factory, it transitions to the non-internal state. Also, when the power is off and the setting key switch 152 is turned on and then the power is turned on in this state, it transitions to the setting change state. At this time, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed and it transitions to the non-internal state.

The non-internal state is maintained until the "1BB condition device" is activated.
Then, when the "1BB condition device" is activated (1BB win) during non-internal play, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is displayed stopped on the active line (1BB win), the game transitions to "1BB game" (1BB activated).
In contrast, if the "1BB condition device" is activated during non-internal play, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on an active line, the state transitions to "1BB internal play."

In addition, when the "1BB inside" is not a winning combination in the role selection means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" can be displayed stopped on the active line.
However, in this embodiment, since the role selection means 61 will not result in a non-winning result while "inside 1BB", once the state transitions to "inside 1BB", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" will not be displayed stopped on a winning line thereafter, and the state will continue to be "inside 1BB".

In addition, during "1BB game", "RB game" is executed continuously.
Furthermore, the "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied.
Furthermore, the "1BB game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210".

When the "RB game" is ended, if the end condition of the "1BB game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Also, when the "RB game" ends, if the ending condition for the "1BB game" is satisfied, the "1BB game" ends and transitions to a non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition for the "1BB game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB game" is ended and a transition is made to a non-internal state.

Next, using Figure 27, we will explain the characteristics of the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the ``small role A1 condition device'' etc. in the second embodiment are activated, and the characteristics of the stopping control of the reel 31 when the ``small role A1 condition device'' etc. are activated.
Figure 27 (1) shows the patterns on the left reel that can be displayed in the display window when the small win A1 condition device is activated and the small win B1 condition device is activated and the small win C1 condition device is activated and the left ...
FIG. 27 (2) shows the symbols on the left reel that can be displayed in the display window when the small win C1 condition device is activated and the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop occurs.
In Fig. 27, the two-dot chain line passing through the left middle, middle middle, and right middle sections indicates the effective line. The same applies to Fig. 29 described later.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)" when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 01" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize A1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, the "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small prize 01".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell A" (number 12) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where the "red 7" (number 5) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 6) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell B" (number 7) of the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11), and "Bell A" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "Red 7" (number 5), "Replay" (number 6), and "Bell B" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)" when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 02" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small prize B1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win "small win 02".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell A" (number 12) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27(1), there are cases where the "red 7" (number 5) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 6) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell B" (number 7) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11), and "Bell A" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "Red 7" (number 5), "Replay" (number 6), and "Bell B" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "center, left, right (213)" when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 03" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize C1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first middle stop, "Bell A" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) to win "small win 03", and then, at the second left stop, "Bell A" or "Bell B" (two symbols combined for "PB=1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (valid line) to win "small win 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the second left stop after the first middle stop, as shown on the left side of Figure 27 (2), "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row, as shown on the right side of Figure 27 (2), "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row.

In other words, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18. Also, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18 either.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both of which pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
In addition, when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row to make it possible to win "small prize 63" or "small prize 64".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 27 (1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell A" (number 12) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27 (1), there are cases where the "red 7" (number 5) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (number 6) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell B" (number 7) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "Black BAR" (number 10), "Replay" (number 11), and "Bell A" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "Red 7" (number 5), "Replay" (number 6), and "Bell B" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In this way, at the first left stop when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" is activated, at the first left stop when the "Small Role B1 Condition Device" is activated, and at the first left stop when the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" is activated, as shown in Figure 27 (1), "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 6), and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role selection means 61) from the position of the pattern on the left reel 31 displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

27(2), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the center first stop, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18. In this case, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18 either.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first reel stops on the left (when the push order is incorrect) and when the second reel stops on the left after the first reel stops in the middle (when the push order is correct).

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left button is pressed (when the push order is incorrect), a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the activated line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 from being displayed stopped on an active line, thereby preventing the "small prize 03" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "replay", and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 63" and "small win 64" is only one type, "red 7".
In this way, by limiting the types of patterns on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that make up the pattern combinations that can be displayed when the first left reel stops (when the push order is incorrect) when the "Small Winning C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of pattern combinations that can be displayed on a winning line when the "Small Winning C1 Condition Device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability of the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" being displayed stopped on a valid line is "1/4", the probability of the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" being displayed stopped on a valid line is also "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 that constitutes the "small win 63" and "small win 64" being displayed stopped on a valid line is also "1/4".
This makes it possible to reduce the probability of winning (acquisition rate) of a 1-coin role when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated to 1/8, and thus to reduce the payout rate per game, thereby improving design freedom.

In addition, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is not displayed in the display window 18 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, or when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and then the second left stop after the first middle stop. This prevents players from getting excessively excited.

Although the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the “bells” at numbers “12” and “17” on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with “Bell A,” the “bells” at numbers “2” and “7” on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with “Bell B,” and all of the “bells” on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with “Bell A,” but the replacement of patterns is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the "replays" of numbers "11" and "16" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Replay A," and the "replays" of numbers "1" and "6" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Replay B."
In addition, the "9" and "14" cherries on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry A", and the "4" cherries on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry B".

Furthermore, all of the "Replays" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Replay A", and all of the "Cherry" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry A".
Other than that, the symbol arrangement is the same as that of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the "Replay" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement, but in the modified example shown in Fig. 28, the "Replay A" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the "Replay B" on the left reel 31 is also in the "PB≠1" arrangement. However, in the modified example shown in Fig. 28, the "Replay A" and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement with the sum of two symbols.

In addition, by replacing the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 as shown in FIG. 28, the symbols constituting the symbol combinations of the winning combinations in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 can be replaced as appropriate.
For example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" can be "Replay A/Replay B"-"Bell"-"Watermelon", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" can be "Replay A/Replay B"-"Cherry"-"Replay A".
Furthermore, even if the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the small win condition device, replay condition device, and 1BB condition device can be the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)" while the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 01" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize A1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, in order to win "small win 01", "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined form a "PB=1" arrangement) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small prize A1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay A" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 12) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where the "red 7" (number 5) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay B" (number 6) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 7) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "black BAR" (number 10), "Replay A" (number 11), and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (number 5), "Replay B" (number 6), and "Bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, right, center (132)" when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 02" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win B1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined form a "PB=1" arrangement) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win "small win 02".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small prize B1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay A" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 12) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where the "red 7" (number 5) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay B" (number 6) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 7) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "black BAR" (number 10), "Replay A" (number 11), and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (number 5), "Replay B" (number 6), and "Bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "center, left, right (213)" when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small prize 03" which pays out "10", the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small prize C1 condition device", is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1" based on the number of medals being given priority.
In addition, when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, at the first middle stop, a "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row (valid line) to win "small prize 03", and then, at the second left stop, a "bell" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row (valid line) to win "small prize 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the second left stop after the first middle stop, as shown on the left side of FIG. 29(2), "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row, as shown on the right side of FIG. 29(2), "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row.

In other words, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18. Also, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped in the display window 18 either.

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)," a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both of which pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number of symbols.
In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined form a "PB=1" arrangement) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, in order to make it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64".

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small prize C1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay A" (number 11) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 12) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where the "red 7" (number 5) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay B" (number 6) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 7) of the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row.
In other words, the "black BAR" (number 10), "Replay A" (number 11), and "Bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (number 5), "Replay B" (number 6), and "Bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In this way, at the first left stop when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" is activated, at the first left stop when the "Small Prize B1 Condition Device" is activated, and at the first left stop when the "Small Prize C1 Condition Device" is activated, as shown in Figure 29 (1), "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay A" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay B" (No. 6), and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.
This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the result of the lottery by the role selection means 61) from the position of the symbol on the left reel 31 displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the first left stop.

29(2), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the center first stop, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18. In this case, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18 either.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed in the display window 18 when the first reel stops on the left (when the push order is incorrect) and when the second reel stops on the left after the first reel stops in the middle (when the push order is correct).

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left button is pressed (when the push order is incorrect), "Replay A" or "Replay B", which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and which is a combination of the two symbols on the left reel 31 that results in a "PB=1" arrangement, is displayed stopped on the active line.
This makes it possible to prevent the "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from stopping and displaying on an active line, thereby making it possible to prevent the "Small Win 03" from winning.

In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win A" on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped in the display window 18, and the "small win B" on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped in the display window 18 either. Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win A" on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped in the display window 18, and the "small win B" on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped in the display window 18 either. This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting excessive expectations.

(2) In the first and second embodiments, the middle line is set as the pay line. However, the pay line is not limited to the middle line, and the number of pay lines is not limited to "1".
For example, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the upper lines can be set as valid lines, and the other lines can be set as invalid lines.
Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" can be "bell"-"replay"-"cherry". In this case, when "small win 01" is won, as shown in FIG. 30(1), "bell"-"replay"-"cherry" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are stopped and displayed on the right-downward line (invalid line), so that the stop results can be the same as when "small win 01" is won in the first embodiment.

Similarly, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" can be "bell"-"bell"-"bell". In this case, when "small win 02" is won, as shown in FIG. 30(2), "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed on the upper line (effective line), so the stop result can be the same as when "small win 02" is won in the first embodiment.
Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" can be "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon". In this case, when "small win 03" is won, as shown in FIG. 30(3), "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are stopped and displayed on the middle line (invalid line), so that the stop results can be the same as when "small win 03" is won in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" can be "cherry"-"replay"-"bell". In this case, when "small win 04" is won, as shown in FIG. 31 (1), "cherry"-"replay"-"bell" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are stopped and displayed on the right-sloping line (invalid line), so that the stop results can be the same as when "small win 04" is won in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" can be "cherry"-"replay"-"cherry". In this case, when "small win 05" is won, as shown in FIG. 31(2), "cherry"-"replay"-"cherry" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are stopped and displayed on the small mountain line (invalid line), so that the stop results can be the same as when "small win 05" is won in the first embodiment.

For example, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 06" can be "cherry"-"watermelon"-"cherry". In this case, when "minor win 06" is won, as shown in FIG. 31 (3), "cherry"-"watermelon"-"cherry" are displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "bell"-"bell"-"bell" are displayed on the lower line (invalid line), so the winning combination can be the same as when "minor win 06" is won in the first embodiment.

Also, for example, the lower line or the line sloping downward to the right can be set as the active line.
Furthermore, for example, five lines, namely, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upward-right line, and the downward-right line, may be set as active lines.

(3) In the first and second embodiments, three reels 31 are provided, namely, the left reel 31, the center reel 31, and the right reel 31. However, the number of reels 31 is not limited to three.
For example, four reels 31, namely a first reel 31, a second reel 31, a third reel 31, and a fourth reel 31, may be arranged side by side. In this case, four stop switches 42, from a first stop switch 42 to a fourth stop switch 42, may be provided corresponding to the four reels 31, respectively.

(4) In the first and second embodiments, the number of coins paid out for the small prize that is won when the button press sequence is correct when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Prize F2 Condition Device" are activated is set to "10," but this is not limited to this and may be set to, for example, "8" or "15."
(5) In the first and second embodiments, the number of coins to be paid out for a small prize that can be won when the button press sequence is incorrect when the "Small Prize A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Prize F2 Condition Device" are activated is set to "1", but this is not limited to this and may be, for example, "2" or "3".

(6) In the first and second embodiments, 12 types of condition devices, namely, a "small win A1 condition device" to a "small win F2 condition device", are provided as condition devices in which the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed results in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be, for example, six types, namely, a "small win A condition device" to a "small win F condition device".
(7) In the first and second embodiments, the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are activated is set to six options: "left center right", "left left center", "center left right", "center right left", "right left center", and "right center left". However, this is not limited to this, and the order may be set to three options, for example, "first stop on the left and second and third stops are optional", "first stop in the middle and second and third stops are optional", and "first stop on the right and second and third stops are optional".

(8) In the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the winning number "1" (small prize A1 condition device) and the winning number "2" (small prize A2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play is set to "2500/65536", respectively, thereby setting the winning probability of the "small prize 01" during non-internal and internal play to "5000/65536".
Similarly, by setting the winning probability of winning numbers "3" (small prize B1 condition device) to "12" (small prize F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play to "2500/65536", respectively, the winning probability of "small prize 02" to "small prize 06" during non-internal and internal play is set to "5000/65536".
In addition, by setting the winning probability of the winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", the winning probability of each of "small win 01" to "small win 06" during the special game is set to "5001/65536".

However, since the probability of winning each small win during special play can be set to be equal to or greater than the probability of winning each small win during non-internal and internal play, the probability of winning the winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during special play, i.e., the probability of winning "small win 01" to "small win 06" during special play, can be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(9) In the first and second embodiments, the correct push order when the push order bell is won (when the ``Small Prize A1 Condition Device'' to ``Small Prize F2 Condition Device'' are activated) is one of six options: ``Left Center Right,'' ``Left Left Center,'' ``Middle Left Right,'' ``Middle Right Left,'' ``Right Left Center,'' and ``Right Center Left.'' Each correct push order is designed to win a different high bell (a role that is won when the push order is correct when the push order bell is won; in the above embodiments, ``Small Prize 01'' to ``Small Prize 06'').
However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high-point bell may be three types of "small role 01" to "small role 03". And, when the push order is correct ("left-center-right" or "left-right-center") when the "small role A1 condition device", "small role A2 condition device", "small role B1 condition device" and "small role B2 condition device" are activated, "small role 01" may be awarded. Similarly, when the push order is correct ("middle-left-right" or "middle-right-left") when the "small role C1 condition device", "small role C2 condition device", "small role D1 condition device" and "small role D2 condition device" are activated, "small role 02" may be awarded. Also, when the push order is correct ("right-left-center" or "right-center-left") when the "small role E1 condition device", "small role E2 condition device", "small role F1 condition device" and "small role F2 condition device" are activated, "small role 03" may be awarded.

In this case, the probability of winning each small win during special play should be set to equal to or higher than the probability of winning each small win during non-internal and internal play. Therefore, when the probability of winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) through "12" (small win F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play are each set to "2500/65536", the probability of winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during special play can be set to, for example, "10000/65536".

(10) In the first and second embodiments, the correct push order when the push order bell is won (when the "small prize A1 condition device" to the "small prize F2 condition device" are activated) is one of six options: "left center right", "left left center", "center left right", "center right left", "right left center", and "right center left". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be one of three options: "first stop is left and second and third stops are optional" (left --), "first stop is center and second and third stops are optional" (center --), and "first stop is right and second and third stops are optional" (right --).

In this case, three types of bells can be provided for the correct pressing order: a "left correct bell condition device" in which "left --" is the correct pressing order; a "middle correct bell condition device" in which "middle --" is the correct pressing order; and a "right correct bell condition device" in which "right --" is the correct pressing order.
Then, when the button press order is correct when the "left correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 01" is awarded, when the button press order is correct when the "middle correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 02" is awarded, and when the button press order is correct when the "right correct bell condition device" is activated, "small prize 03" is awarded.
In this case, when the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "left correct bell condition device,""middle correct bell condition device," and "right correct bell condition device" in the non-interior and interior states is set to "5000/65536," the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "small prize ALL condition device" during special play can be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(11) In the first and second embodiments, a slot machine is given as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines).
Here, an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) can, for example, eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37). It can also eliminate the need for the medal insertion port 43 and medal selector. Then, all electronic medals (electronic gaming media) awarded as a result of winning a winning combination are stored in the stored number display LED 76. In this case, it is considered that the stored number display LED 76 is configured with, for example, five digits (allowing the storage of a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals).

Third Embodiment
In the third embodiment, a power switch 11 , a door switch 17 , a setting key insertion port 151 , a setting key switch 152 , and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided.
In addition, the door switch 17 , the setting key switch 152 , and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "powering on,""turning on the power," or "resume power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects the opening of the front door 12 , and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 .
The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.

The door switch 17 is set to be turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and to be turned on when the front door 12 is open, thereby making it possible to detect the opening of the front door 12.
In addition, the opening of the front door 12 may be detected by setting the door switch 17 to be on when the front door 12 is closed and to be off when the front door 12 is open.

The setting key switch 152 is a switch used to transition to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress"), or to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed (also referred to as "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation in progress").
By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as the "first mode"), and by rotating the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise from this state, the setting key switch 152 is turned off (also referred to as the "second mode").

The setting change (reset) switch 153 serves as a setting change switch 153 , a reset switch 153 , and an RWM clear switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value in the setting change state.
The reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to return to the state before the error occurred (to release the error state) after the error that occurred has been removed.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch that is operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 .

In the following description, it will be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 153," as the "setting change switch 153," as the "reset switch 153," and as the "RWM clear switch 153."
In addition, various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 may be referred to as being "operated" when they are on, and as being "not operated" when they are off.
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated, but this is not limiting, and the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 may be provided separately.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the "game area" has a "normal area" and a "favourable area".
The "normal section" is a game section in which signals related to the instruction function are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (e.g., the sub-control board 80), and which does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which advantageous operation modes of the stop switch 42 are not notified. Note that the normal section may also be referred to as a "non-advantageous section."
The "advantageous zone" is a game zone that has a function related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). In other words, the advantageous zone is a game zone that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, the correct pressing order).

Furthermore, the third embodiment is provided with an advantageous zone display LED 77 that can display to the player that the zone is advantageous. In the normal zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, and in the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on. In other words, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, it indicates that the zone is a normal zone, and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it indicates that the zone is advantageous. Thus, in the third embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the display mode (off or on) of the advantageous zone display LED 77 and the game zone (normal zone or advantageous zone).
31, a segment P of digit 4a of the acquisition number display LED 78 can be used as the advantageous zone display LED 77. Also, the advantageous zone display LED 77 can be provided separately from the acquisition number display LED 78.

In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be lit immediately after transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, but may be lit when a certain condition is met after transition to the advantageous zone (for example, when notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 begins). In this case, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that it is an advantageous zone, but when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, it may be either a normal zone or an advantageous zone.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the main CPU 55, the ROM 54, and the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
The main control board 50 is provided with a main CPU 55, a RWM 53, and a ROM 54.
32, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and this chip contains a main CPU 55. The main CPU 55 further has a built-in memory, which includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage area of the ROM 54 includes a used area and an outside used area, and each of the used area and the outside used area includes a control area and a data area.
Here, the "usage area" is a memory area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
The "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also called the "program area."
Furthermore, a "data area" is a storage area in which information other than programs is stored, and in which data used when a program is executed is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside of use area" is a memory area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, such as a memory area in which a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 described below, a program used during testing, and a program for preventing cheating are stored.
Similarly to the usage area, the "outside the usage area" has a control area and a data area. The control area of the usage area is sometimes called the "first control area" or the "first program area," and the control area outside the usage area is sometimes called the "second control area" or the "second program area."
Furthermore, a program stored in a control area (first control area, first program area) of the area of use may be referred to as the "first program," and a program stored in a control area outside the area of use (second control area, second program area) may be referred to as the "second program."

During execution of a program (first program) stored in the control area of the use area of ROM 54, reference (access) to data stored in the data area of the use area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in a data area outside the use area of ROM 54 is prohibited.
Similarly, during execution of a program (second program) stored in a control area outside the used area of ROM 54, reference to data stored in a data area outside the used area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in the data area of the used area of ROM 54 is prohibited.

The storage area of the RWM 53, like the ROM 54, has a used area and an outside used area, and each of the used area and the outside used area has a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 32, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are outside the used area.

During execution of a program (first program) stored in the control area of the usage area of ROM 54, reference (access) and rewriting (overwriting) of data stored in the usage area of RWM 53 are permitted, but reference to data stored outside the usage area of RWM 53 is permitted but rewriting is prohibited.
Similarly, while a program (second program) stored in a control area outside the use area of ROM 54 is being executed, data stored outside the use area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced and rewritten, but data in the use area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced but prohibited from being rewritten, in order to prevent processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the used area of RWM 53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to a program going out of control or the like while a program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, an unused area is provided between the used area of RWM 53 and outside the used area.
Furthermore, if an interrupt process occurs during the execution of a program outside the area of use (the second program), there is a possibility that the data in the area of use of RWM 53 will be rewritten (overwritten) by the interrupt process. Therefore, interrupt process is prohibited during the execution of a program outside the area of use (the second program).

As shown in FIG. 32, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.

Furthermore, the entire storage area of the built-in memory includes an internal register area, an unused area, and the like, other than the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 .
The internal register area includes, for example, A register to L register, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
The addresses of the used area are set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the data shown in FIG. 33 is used for explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored in the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to this.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N" which is the set value data plus "1" as the set value.

Address "F001(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored in address "F000(H)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N", which is the setting value data (_NB_RANK) plus "1", is stored in address "F001(H)" as the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", and address "F000(H)" stores one of the values "0(D)" to "5(D)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK), and address "F001(H)" stores one of the values "1(D)" to "6(D)" as setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).The value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is then displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as the setting value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
In this embodiment, the credit number data is stored as a value obtained by converting the credit number into a decimal number. For example, when the credit number to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in the address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower four bits D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digits of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits of the credit number ("2" in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the credit number is "50(D)", so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data for the credit number display LED 76 .

Address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similar to the above-mentioned credit number data, the lowest 4 bits D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digit, and the highest 4 bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digit.
In this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the payout number data corresponding to the small win is stored as the winning number data in order to display the payout number corresponding to the small win on the winning number display LED 78. Specifically, when a small win occurs and medals are paid out, the winning number data is added together with the medal payout, and the display on the winning number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the winning number data, "01" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040(H)" described later, for example, when an 8-coin winning combination is achieved, "8(H)" is stored, and the payout number data is decremented by "1" according to the payout number when medals are paid out (including addition to credits), such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
In contrast, the winning number data stored in address "F011(H)" is incremented by "1" each time one medal is paid out, for example, when an 8-coin combination is won, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8". Therefore, the display of the winning number display LED 78 also counts up, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8".

Also, in this embodiment, while the setting is being changed, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "88". Therefore, while the setting is being changed, setting change in progress display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting up all segments and displaying "88", it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit).
In addition, since the upper limit of the number of medals that can be paid out is 15 medals, when the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88," it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, when the conditions for indicating the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) are met, the specified number is indicated (displayed, notified) on the winning number display LED 78 before the game begins (before betting becomes possible or before the start switch 41 is operated).
In this embodiment, in order to indicate the specified number "2", "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when indicating the specified number, the specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquisition number data.

Furthermore, when a push order bell or the like is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the winning number data.
For example, when the push order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when a specific error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a specific error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data.
For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and reel operations are performed.
For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1." Also, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1."

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). When a small win is won in the game and the payout number is determined, the payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to that payout number. When a small win is won, the payout number data corresponding to the won small win is stored and the medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the credit amount, or paying out one actual medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is decremented by "1". In other words, it serves as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

Address "F041 (H)" is the storage area for the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Like the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data that indicates a value corresponding to the payout number when a small combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted each time a medal is paid out, but rather the initially stored value is maintained. This value is then maintained until the medal payout number update process is performed for the next game. For example, if a small combination that pays out 8 medals is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and if no combination is won in the next game, "0" is overwritten as the payout number data buffer.

Address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay is won, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 36(A) described later, in the third embodiment, a display board 75 is provided with six status display LEDs 79, including a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a start of game display LED 79d, a deposit display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f.
The status display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not three of the six LEDs mentioned above, the game start display LED 79d, the coin insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f, are to be turned on.

As shown in Fig. 33, the D0 bit of the status LED lighting data is assigned to a game start LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to a coin insertion LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to a replay LED 79f. Each bit of the status LED lighting data corresponds to each bit of the LED display counter 1 in Fig. 40(A) described later.
Then, a "1" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and a "0" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, in a case where the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the input display LED 79e and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001(B)" is stored as the status display LED lighting data.

Address “F051(H)” is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which of the digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated with each interrupt.
Here, "digit" refers to a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is configured with one 7-segment display. Among the digits in this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (accumulated number) display LED 76, digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.
Furthermore, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned such that bit D0 is a digit 1 signal, bit D1 is a digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 is a digit 5 signal. In one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is turned on.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 1 has a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 1 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 to the right by one digit. In addition, in the interrupt following interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right, but at the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values of "5" → "4" → ... → "1" → "5" → "4" → ... for each interrupt process. In other words, five interrupts make up one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" Interruption: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interruption: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interruption: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interruption)
"N+6" interruption: 00001000 (B)
:
It becomes.

In the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, the output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to light (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt process, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", the digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED D78) can be turned on (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are turned off).

Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value according to whether the device is in normal mode, in setting change mode, or in setting confirmation mode.
In the third embodiment, during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit, so the value is "00001111(B)". During setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000(B)".

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for a favorable zone type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The favorable zone type flag is a flag that indicates whether the current game zone is a normal zone or a favorable zone.
The favorable zone type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when in a normal zone, and when transitioning from a normal zone to a favorable zone, the D0 bit becomes "1".
The timing at which the advantageous zone type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous zone display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous zone display LED flag is a flag that indicates whether the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit or not. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1".
In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous zone (for example, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous zone).

On the other hand, even after moving into the favorable zone, the favorable zone display LED 77 does not have to be turned on.
Specifically, first, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, but may be turned on later (during the advantageous zone).
Secondly, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be turned on when transitioning to the advantageous zone, and if the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 are met, the advantageous zone may end without ever turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct button press sequence is notified) in a game state in which the zone is favorable and the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the favorable zone display LED 77 is lit up.
Furthermore, once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous zone.
In addition, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous zone, a process is executed to turn off the advantageous zone display LED 77. Specifically, when the advantageous zone end condition is met, an initialization process of the advantageous zone display LED flag storage area (clearing the advantageous zone display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game that activates the indication function, the timing of lighting is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, until the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other lighting timings are possible, for example:
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated. 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 is available,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is spinning,
4) When all reels 31 have stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended) and before the settlement switch 43 becomes operable before the start of the next game.

However, in order to light up the advantageous zone display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning role for that game must have been determined, so this does not apply before the start switch 41 is operated (before the role is drawn).
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the instruction function is activated, this is done after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is selected, so the earliest possible timing for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 is after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area for the favorable zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The favorable zone clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of plays during the favorable zone. The favorable zone clear counter is "0" during the normal zone, and when moving to the favorable zone, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set. The favorable zone clear counter is also set to decrement "1" per play during the favorable zone as well as during the normal zone. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, when the favorable zone clear counter (before decrement) is "0" during the normal zone, even if "1" is decremented, the counter used will have a value of "0" after decrement. Therefore, during the normal zone, "0" is maintained, although "1" is decremented for each play. In other words, when "0" is stored in the favorable zone clear counter, it is a normal zone (non-favorable zone).

Furthermore, when the player moves into the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter is set to an initial value of "1500 (D)", so that the advantageous zone clear counter will become "1499 (D)" in the next game.
The favorable zone clear counter is configured with 2 bytes since it stores a maximum initial value of "1500 (D)". In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the favorable zone clear counter, it is a favorable zone.

Address "F065 (H)" is a storage area for a difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in the number of coins during the advantageous period, and is also called an "MY counter."
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores a "value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a negative number, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, the "cumulative value of the difference number ≠ the difference counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in the number of coins during the advantageous period exceeds "2400 (D)". For this reason, the difference counter is configured with a storage area of 2 bytes.

The difference number counter is required to count the cumulative value of the difference number of coins at least during the advantageous period, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is in an advantageous zone, a process is required to determine whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game. For this reason, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone for each game, simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even if the difference in number becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number becomes carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is carry-down data, a correction is made to set the difference counter value to "0."

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
First game: When the bet amount is "3" and the payout amount is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: bet number "3", payout number "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: bet number "3", payout number "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
It will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference number counter for the previous game was "0 (H)" and the difference number counter for the current game is "0 (H)", this is the result of a recalculation of the difference number counter value reflecting the difference number of that game, so this also corresponds to an "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value in which a carry-over has occurred, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value is set to "0"). Note that the method of determining whether or not a carry-over has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the payout number is large compared to the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the payout number is less than the bet number, for example, during a game in a normal section, the difference counter value increases by the payout number when a payout is made based on the winning of a small combination, but after that, if the payout number falls below the bet number, it will eventually become "0".

Address "F067(H)" is the storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not an AT is in progress, and is set to "0" when not in an AT, and to "1" when in an AT. The AT flag is set to "1" when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46, which will be described later. The AT flag is also turned off when the final game of the AT ends, and is executed, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 of FIG. 50), which will be described later. Note that the AT flag is included in the data that is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area of the AT play count counter (_CT_ART). The AT play count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of plays during the AT (including ART). Unlike the favorable zone clear counter, when the AT play count counter becomes "0", it stops counting (subtracting) thereafter.
The AT game count counter is updated (decremented) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated (step S281 in FIG. 46) during the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", so the AT game counter is configured as a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is a maximum of "255 (D)" or less, the AT game counter may be configured as a 1-byte counter.
When the AT is started (or when the state transitions to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT play count counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Also, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT plays may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is met during the AT, the number of AT plays may be increased, and when a lottery for adding the number of AT plays is won, the number of AT plays may be increased. In this case, the increase is added to the AT play count counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, since a game number management type AT is exemplified, an AT play count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of a difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of an AT play count counter. Then, when the AT starts, an initial value of the difference number of coins that can be acquired is set. Also, when an additional coin is won, the additional difference number is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of coins for that game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

The 48-byte memory area from addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is the stack area for the used area.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display" and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 from the left).
Furthermore, of the four LEDs that make up the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are also called "identification segments" and display the type of information, and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are also called "ratio segments" and display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: upper digit of identification segment, Digit 7: lower digit of identification segment, Digit 8: upper digit of ratio segment, Digit 9: lower digit of ratio segment.

In the third embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Ratio of accessories including instructions (cumulative total) (7 pages)
2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Ratio of gimmicks (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Ratio of consecutive features (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role Ratio (Cumulative) (7A.)
6) Ratio of features and other conditions (cumulative) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the reel ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the reel ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative" refers to the sum of the values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, the count continues until the number of games reaches at least "175,000."
When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" plays, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by blinking, and when the cumulative total is equal to or greater than "175,000" plays, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by lighting.
Even after the cumulative total exceeds 175,000 games played, it continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a specified address of the RWM 53.
In addition, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played over 15 sets, each set consisting of "400" games.

The "ratio of devices with instructions" is the sum of the number of payouts when the device is activated and the number of payouts in games in which the instruction function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts.
In addition, in slot machines that are not equipped with special features, the "special feature ratio" is the number of payouts in a game in which the special feature is activated divided by the total number of payouts.
In addition, the total number of payouts when the reel is activated and the total number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated are counted by an instruction-included reel counter.

Regarding the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated," when the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed push order in a game in which the instruction function is activated, for example, when a 15-coin winning combination is achieved, the number of payouts "15" is added to the instruction-included combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, in a game in which the small prize condition devices A1 to A6 condition devices are activated during 1BB play and the instruction function is activated (displaying the correct push order (the push order that will win a 15-coin prize)), when the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed push order (the correct push order) and a 15-coin prize (any of small prizes 01 to 06) is won, the number of payouts "15" is added to the instruction-included prize counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, resulting in, for example, a three-coin winning combination, the number of coins paid out, "3", is added to the instruction-included combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, during a 1BB game, when the small prize condition devices A1 to A6 condition devices are activated and the instruction function is activated (the correct button press sequence is displayed), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a button press sequence different from the displayed button press sequence (incorrect button press sequence) and a 3-coin prize (any of small prizes 13 to 24) is won, the number of payouts "3" is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

In addition, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed and a winning combination is missed (when no winning combination is achieved), the instruction-included combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will have the same values as in the previous game.
For example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect push order, no winning combination will be achieved (no winning combination will be achieved). In addition, in a game in which the minor combination condition device A1 to minor combination condition device A6 are activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (the correct push order is displayed), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order (incorrect push order) and a winning combination is missed (when no winning combination is achieved), the values of the instruction combination counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will be the same as those of the previous game.

In this embodiment, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing sequence from that displayed and a winning combination is missed, a process is executed to add the number of payout coins "0" to the instruction function counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter, so that the values of both counters become the same as in the previous game.
It is possible to configure the program so that, when a winning combination is missed, the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out is skipped. In this case, however, it is necessary to configure the program so that a process of determining whether or not the winning combination has been missed is inserted before the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out, and when it is determined that the winning combination has been missed, the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out is skipped. This increases the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing burden on the main CPU 55.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed, a process is executed to add the payout number "0" to both counters. This makes it possible to set the values of both counters to the same values as in the previous game without the need for a process to determine whether or not a winning combination has been missed, thereby reducing the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing load on the main CPU 55.

"Continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a first-class special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts.
For example, if the total number of payouts in 6000 games is 2000 coins, and of that, the number of payouts when the first type special feature (RB) is activated is 500 coins, then the "consecutive feature ratio (6000 games)" will be 25(%).

"Feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a feature is activated to the total number of payouts.
Here, the "reel" includes the above-mentioned first type special reel (RB), as well as the second type special reel (CB), MB (also called 2BB. Second type reel continuous operation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus).

The "ratio of the state of the reels, etc." is the sum of the number of times played when the reels are activated and the number of times played when the reels continuous activation device is activated, divided by the total number of times played.
In addition, the sum of the number of games played when the reel is in operation and the number of games played when the reel continuous operation device is in operation is counted by a reel etc. state counter.
In addition, in gaming machines that do not have the functions corresponding to the above six items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".
For example, if the reel is not equipped with an "RB (first type special reel)," there is no continuous reel ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--."

According to the rules, the ratio of instructed roles should be set to less than 70%, the role ratio should also be set to less than 70%, the continuous role ratio should be set to less than 60%, and the role etc. state ratio should be set to less than 50%.
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the value falls within the range stipulated by the regulations.

In addition, in order to enable various pieces of ratio information to be grasped by devices external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 200, the various pieces of ratio information may be configured to be output as external signals.
For example, the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may be configured to output the indicated role ratio data, continuous role ratio (cumulative) data, role ratio (cumulative) data, role etc. state ratio data, etc., as an external signal. In this case, if a predetermined number of plays (for example, "17500 times" for continuous role ratio (cumulative) data and role ratio (cumulative) data, and "175000 times" for indicated role ratio data and role etc. state ratio data) is not met, predetermined information different from the current ratio information (for example, "FF (H)" etc.) may be output as an external signal, and if a predetermined number of plays is met, various ratio information may be output as an external signal.
Furthermore, advantageous zone ratio data that is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may be configured to be output as an external signal. In this case, a storage area for an advantageous zone play count counter that counts the number of plays in the advantageous zone and advantageous zone ratio data that indicates the ratio of the number of plays in the advantageous zone to the total number of plays may be provided outside the usage area of the RWM 53.

34 and 35 are diagrams showing the addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
Addresses outside the used area are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the data shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 is used for explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at address "F210(H)" increments the number of games played, with 400 games being the dividing line. This 400 game counter cycles from "0" to "399(D)" and increments by "1" with each game. If "1" is added when the value of the 400 game counter is "399(D)", the value of the 400 game counter will become "0".

Note that, conversely to the above, the 400 game counter may be set to an initial value of "399 (D)" and decremented by "1" for each game. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been played. Then, when the value of the 400 game counter is "0" and "1" is decremented, the 400 game counter is set to the initial value "399 (D)".

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to specify which ring buffer the number of medals paid out in a given game should be added to.
Specifically, at address "F212(H)", one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored as the ring buffer number.

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are the storage areas of total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are made up of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer is made up of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 is made up of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", with address "F213(H)" being the lower digit and address "F214(H)" being the upper digit. In Figures 34 and 35, for storage areas with a byte count of 2 or more, the lowest address number is displayed.

The total number of payouts over 400 games is stored in one ring buffer. For example, the payouts for the first to 400th games are stored in addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," and the payouts for the next games, 401st to 800th games, are stored in addresses "F215(H)" and "F216(H)."
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" described above. Also, which ring buffer value the number of medals paid out in that game should be added to (the value should be updated) is determined by referring to the ring buffer number at the address "F212(H)".

Then, when the total payout numbers for the first through 400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total payout numbers for the 5601st through 6000th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, when the 6000th game ends, the data stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the payout numbers for the 6001st through 6400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 is made up of 2 bytes. If the maximum payout number in one game is 15, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out over 400 games is 6,000 coins, so this can be stored in a memory capacity of 2 bytes.
This also applies to the continuous payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the payout ring buffers 0 to 14 described later.

In addition, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are storage areas for continuous reel payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are memory areas for reel payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total number of games counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the number of games (cumulative), and is composed of 3 bytes. The total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes because it is necessary to count "175000(D)" games as the cumulative number of games.
The total number of plays counter continues counting even if the number of plays exceeds "175,000 (D)" plays, and stops counting when it reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instruction-included reel counter at addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the reel is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game in 6000 games, the total comes to 90,000 medals, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (the same applies to the continuous payout (6000 times) counter and the payout (6000 times) counter described later).

The consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated during 6000 games.
The payout (6000 times) counters at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" are counters that count the number of payouts when the reel is operated during 6000 games.

When a payout occurs when the consecutive reels are not in operation and when the reels are not in operation, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (incremented), and the consecutive reels payout (6000 times) counter and the reels payout (6000 times) counter are not updated.
In addition, when a payout occurs when the continuous reel is not in operation and the reel is in operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the reel payout (6000 times) counter are updated, but the continuous reel payout (6000 times) counter is not updated.
Furthermore, when a payout occurs during the operation of a continuous reel, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the reel payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous reel payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First, when medals are paid out from the first game to the 6000th game, they are stored (added) to the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter depending on whether the continuous feature is activated/not activated and whether the feature is activated/not activated, respectively.
At the end of the 6000th game, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the payout numbers during the 400 games from the game to the game before "400 x 15 - 1" (5999 games) to the game before "400 x 15 - 400" (5600 games) are subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value, the consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter value, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter value, respectively.

For example, when the 6000th game is played, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is cleared. Furthermore, the payout numbers from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are added to total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the value of the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts during continuous feature operation from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter.

Furthermore, similarly, when the 6000th play is reached, the value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the reel payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts when the reel is activated from the 6001st play to the 6400th play is added to the reel payout ring buffer 0 and the reel payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games:
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game time to "400" game time Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game time to "800" game time Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game time to "1200" game time Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game time to "1600" game time Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game time to "2000" game time Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game time to "2400" game time Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game time to "2800" game time Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game time to "3200" game time Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game time to "3600" game time Total payout ring buffer 9: "3601" game time to "4000" game time Total payout ring buffer 10: "4001" game time to "4400" game time Total payout ring buffer 11: "4401" game time to "4800" game time Total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game time to "5200" game time Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game time to "5600" game time Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game time to "6000" game time Total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game time to "6000" game time

Assuming that the 6000th game has been played, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the payout amounts for each game.
In addition, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 match.
Here, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ1 and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1,
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1 - Z1
Perform the operation.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Perform the operation.
In other words, the process executes a process of subtracting the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 game plays from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago, from the value "Σ1" stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, the CPU 1 executes a process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 that stores the payout numbers during the 400 games from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago.
After this calculation, the 6001st game is started. If there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that no accessory was activated from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and is also added to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6,400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games:
Total payout ring buffer 0: "6001" game number to "6400" game number Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game number to "800" game number:
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game number to "6000" game number Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game number to "6000" game number, and "6001" game number to "6400" game number

Then, as in the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ2 and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2 - Z2
Let us assume that.
and,
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
Let us assume that.
After this calculation, the 6401st game is started. If there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that no accessory was activated from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1 and also added to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above process is repeated.

Also, the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been explained, but the same processing as above is performed when a special feature is in operation or when a continuous special feature is in operation.
Specifically, when the reel is in operation, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the reel payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the reel payout (6000 times) counter. When the reel is in operation, as described above, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when continuous reels are in operation, the total payout ring buffers 0-14 are replaced with continuous reels payout ring buffers 0-14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous reels payout (6000 times) counter. When continuous reels are in operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0-14, any of the reels payout ring buffers 0-14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the reels payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

The total payout (accumulation) counter at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175,000(D)" games.
Similarly, the consecutive feature payout (cumulative) counter at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts when consecutive features are activated, and similarly to the above, it counts the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated during at least "175,000 (D)" plays.

Similarly, the reel payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when the reel is activated, and similarly to the above, count the number of payouts when the reel is activated during at least "175,000 (D)" games.
It should be noted that the three types of payout (6,000 times) counters mentioned above subtract the number of payouts from 5,999 games to 5,600 games every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters do not subtract values.

The three types of payout (cumulative) counters are each made up of 3 bytes. For example, if we assume that 15 coins are paid out per game for 175,000 games, then the value becomes "175,000 x 15 = 2,625,000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored in a memory capacity of 3 bytes.

The reel status counter at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of plays when the reel is activated and the total number of plays when the reel continuous activation device is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes.
The instruction-inclusive feature ratio data at address "F288 (H)" is a memory area which stores the instruction-inclusive feature ratio, which is the ratio of the sum of the number of payouts when the feature is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated to the total number of payouts.

The consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F289 (H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 game plays.
The bonus feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the bonus feature is activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 game plays.

The consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28B(H)" is a memory area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
The bonus feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28C(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when a bonus feature is activated to the total number of payouts over the total number of games played.

The reel state ratio data at address "F28D (H)" is a memory area that stores the reel state ratio, which is the ratio of the sum of the number of games played when the reel is activated and the number of games played when the reel continuous operating device is activated to the total number of games played.
The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a storage area that temporarily stores the calculation results during ratio calculation processing.

The count upper limit flag at address "F28F(H)" is a flag which is turned on when the memory capacity of the total number of games played counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)") reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full, i.e., "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of coins paid out. The "D2" to "D7" bits are unused in the third embodiment.
For example, when the total number of games counter reaches the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)."

The payout number upper limit buffer at address "F290 (H)" is a memory area which stores a value so that the value after addition becomes 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter and exceeds 3 bytes full.
For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the payout number in the game is "8 (H)", adding "8 (H)" to the counter value will cause an overflow. Therefore, in order to prevent the total payout (cumulative) counter value from overflowing, a value that will make it 3 bytes full is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)" + "1(H)" = "FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" is a flag for identifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the discrimination segment and ratio segment.
Regarding the instructed feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, when the total number of plays (the value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "175,000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.
For the continuous feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times), when the total number of plays (the value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is controlled to flash.

The instructed feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio should ideally be ratios over 175,000 games (to reduce variation), but if the ratios are calculated based on the number of games played over less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will flash to indicate this.
Similarly, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios over 6000 times, but when they are ratios calculated based on the number of plays less than 6000 times, the identification segment is displayed flashing to indicate this.

In addition, for the instructed feature ratio, feature ratio (cumulative), and feature ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.
Furthermore, for the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) and the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.
Furthermore, for the reel state ratio, when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.

The above settings are made because in this embodiment of the slot machine, the instructed feature ratio and feature ratio are designed to be less than 70%, the continuous feature ratio is designed to be less than 60%, and the feature etc. state ratio is designed to be less than 50%, and when the actual measured values are not within the range of the design values, the ratio segment is displayed flashing to notify the user.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instruction-included role ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) blinking flag, ..., the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag.
For example, when the calculated ratio of instructed features is less than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "0", and when the ratio is "70" or greater, the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "1".
Similarly, when the calculated continuous feature ratio (6,000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated reels etc. status ratio is less than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is "50" or more, the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1".
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "1", and when it is "6000" or more, the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "0".
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "1", and when the total number of games counter value is "175,000" or more, the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is set to "0".

The ratio display number at address "F292(H)" is a storage area for storing a number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio displayed in the interrupt process is the indicated role ratio, the ratio display number of the address "F292 (H)" stores "1". Similarly, when it is the continuous role ratio (6000 times), it stores "2", when it is the role ratio (6000 times), it stores "3", when it is the continuous role ratio (cumulative), it stores "4", when it is the role ratio (cumulative), it stores "5", and when it is the role etc. state ratio, it stores "6".

The blinking switch flag at address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether the identification segment or ratio segment is to be turned on or off when blinking during the interrupt process.
In this embodiment, when the indicator flashes, it is set to alternate between turning on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds. The flash switch flag is set to "0" (a value indicating that the indicator is on) for approximately 0.3 seconds while the indicator is on, and to "1" (a value indicating that the indicator is off) for approximately 0.3 seconds while the indicator is off.

The display switching time at address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts the time required to display one ratio, approximately 5 seconds, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.
In this embodiment, the following is repeatedly displayed: display of the reel ratio with instructions (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel consecutive ratio (6000 times) (for about 5 seconds) → ... → display of the reel ratio (cumulative) (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel etc. status ratio (for about 5 seconds) → display of the reel ratio with instructions (for about 5 seconds) → ...
For this reason, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether or not about 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the switching time for the display ratio has been reached.

As mentioned above, the blinking switching time at address "F296(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when the identification segment or ratio segment is blinking, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which of digits 6 to 9 should be lit, and is continually updated for each interrupt. The bits of the LED display counter 2 are assigned as follows: bit D0 is the digit 6 signal, bit D1 is the digit 7 signal, bit D2 is the digit 8 signal, and bit D3 is the digit 4 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 2 has a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 2 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit. In addition, in the interrupt following interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right, but at the time of this interrupt, the LED display counter 2 is initialized to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the values of "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" → ... for each interrupt process. In other words, one cycle consists of four interrupts.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 2 is
"N" Interruption: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+5" interruption: 00000100 (B)
:
It becomes.

In the third embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", the digit 9 signal is output. The output of the digit 9 signal enables digit 9 (the lower digit of the ratio segment) to be lit. At the time of the next interrupt process, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", the digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (the upper digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the digit 7 signal is output, and digit 7 (the lower digit of the identification segment) can be lit, and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)", the digit 6 signal is output, and digit 6 (the upper digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area in which the RWM checksum data calculated in the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) at the time of power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is stored.
Here, the "RWM checksum data" is also referred to as "complement data,""error detection data," or "error detection information," and is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.
That is, when the "RWM checksum data (complement data)" of "F2A0(H)" is added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area, the result is "0". In other words, the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is "0".

The power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored at the time of the power-off processing.
When the power-off processing is executed normally, the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is stored as "55 (H)," and when the power-off processing is not executed normally, a value other than "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of RWM53 and the power failure processing completion flag are normal or not, and is stored during the program start processing.
When the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the sum of the data in the used area of RWM 35 and outside the used area (excluding "F2A0(H)") to the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3(H)" is a memory area (buffer) in which the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed.
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
Moreover, a "stack pointer" is used to hold an address indicating the destination of data to be saved (stored) in the stack area.

When a program outside the used area (second program) is executed, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, and when the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and the program in the used area (first program) is returned to, the stack pointer of the used area is restored from stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.

The 24-byte memory area from addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the used area.

Next, the initialization of data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be described.
The data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized simply by cutting off/restarting the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off).
Even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area of the RWM 53 and outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.

Furthermore, suppose that an operation for transitioning to the setting change state is performed (power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on), and a power interruption recovery abnormality is determined. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 described later becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change in the event of a power interruption recovery abnormality is set. Also, since a power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred, step S2712 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 described later, initialization process is executed for the entire range including the set value data (_NB_RANK) in the usage area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") and the entire range outside the usage area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)").
When recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent as when an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed and a power interruption recovery abnormality is determined.

Also, assume that an operation for transitioning to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, the result is "Yes" in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41, and the result is "No" in step S2712, and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power failure recovery is normal is set.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

Therefore, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), the power is turned off, and then an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state. When it is determined that the power supply is restored normally, the control information display LED 74 starts displaying the role ratio data including instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Also, assume that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 becomes "No" and step S2710 becomes "Yes", so the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

In other words, the address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), the setting key switch 152 is then turned off and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on. If it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off, the control information display LED 74 will start displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.

Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the initialization process of RWM 53 is executed to the same extent as when the operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if the setting key is not held and even if the setting change state is not entered, the RWM 53 can be initialized to the same extent as when the power recovery from power outage is judged to be normal by performing an operation to enter the setting change state.

In addition, at the end of the favorable zone, an initialization process is executed for a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33) where data related to the favorable zone is stored.
In addition, even if the advantageous period ends, the address "F292 (H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. For this reason, even if the advantageous period ends when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and an initialization process is performed for a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061 (H)" to "F068 (H)" in FIG. 33) of the use area of the RWM 53 in which the data related to the advantageous period is stored, the display item displayed on the control information display LED 74 will be the role ratio (cumulative) data followed by the role etc. state ratio data (ratio display number "6").

Also, assume that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In other words, assume that normal power on/off is performed. In this case, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed, so that the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 at the time of power off is maintained.
For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the reel ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (reel ratio monitor), the power is then turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and if it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the state at the time of power off will be restored, so that the management information display LED 74 will first display the reel ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the reel etc. status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the reel ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, suppose that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the OFF state, and it is determined that a power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, step S2708 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (the system enters an irrecoverable error state), and therefore the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, the interrupt process is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 43), and the output of the output ports 0 to 7 is turned off (step S1495 in FIG. 43).
For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, if it is determined that a power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred, interrupt processing is prohibited and the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off, so that the management information display LED 74 remains off.

For example, in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8." In this case, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state. If it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, "8888" is displayed on the management information display LED 74.

Also, for example, even if the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, the interrupt process may not be prohibited, and the output of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, even if it is determined that there is a power interruption recovery abnormality, the control information display LED 74 will first display the role ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the role etc. status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item of the role ratio (cumulative) data.

FIG. 36A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board 75 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 36B is a diagram showing a management information display LED 74 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 36A, in the third embodiment, a display board 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76 , an acquired number display LED 78 , and a status display LED 79 .
The credit number display LED 76 is composed of Digit 1 (higher digit) and Digit 2 (lower digit), and the acquired number display LED 78 is composed of Digit 3 (higher digit) and Digit 4 (lower digit). Digits 1 to 4 use 7-segment displays that do not have dot segments.
Digits 1 to 4 may be configured using a seven-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

The status display LEDs 79 include a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, a deposit display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f, which are made up of six LEDs.
Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 36, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is constructed using a segment P of digit 4, as shown in Figure 37.
Furthermore, although not shown in Fig. 36, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in Fig. 1, and is composed of digit 5. Also, digit 5 uses a 7-segment display that does not have dot segments.
Digit 5 may be constructed using a seven-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 36B, the management information display LED 74 is composed of digit 6 (higher digit of identification segment), digit 7 (lower digit of identification segment), digit 8 (higher digit of ratio segment), and digit 9 (lower digit of ratio segment).
Digits 6 to 9 use a seven-segment display equipped with a dot segment (segment P).
Furthermore, the segment P of digit 7 (the lower digit of the discrimination segment) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator LED is used to clearly indicate the separator between the information type (discrimination segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining details of digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the seven-segment display of digits 1 to 5 itself is composed of segments A to G, and does not include a dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start indication LED 79d, the segment P of digit 2 constitutes the insertion indication LED 79e, the segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay indication LED 79f, and the segment P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous zone indication LED 77.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment.
The third embodiment is characterized in that two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) are provided for outputting digit signals, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) are provided for outputting segment signals.
In the third embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided.
Moreover, the segments of digits 1 to 5 are called segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segments of digits 6 to 9 are called segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In addition, in the third embodiment, output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals), and output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals).
When digits 1 to 5 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment 1 signal is output from output port 4 .
When digits 6 to 9 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 6 and a segment 2 signal is output from output port 7 .

Next, an external signal will be described. An "external signal" is a signal that is outputted to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external terminal board 100.
As shown in Fig. 38, in the third embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, a "setting change signal" is assigned to bit D0 (external signal 1) of output port 5, and a "setting confirmation signal" is assigned to bit D1 (external signal 2). The signals shown in Fig. 38 are also assigned to bits D2 to D5.

The "setting change signal" is an external signal that indicates that a setting change is in progress and that a setting change has been made. The setting change signal is output continuously during the setting change and until the end of one game after the setting change (when all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 46)). This is to ensure that the outside world is informed that a setting change has been made. When the D0 bit of output port 5 is "1", this indicates that the setting change signal is on (the setting is being changed or one game after the setting has been changed has not yet ended). When the D0 bit is "0", this indicates that the setting change signal is off (the setting is not being changed and one game after the setting has not yet ended).

The "settings checking signal" is an external signal that indicates that settings are being checked. The settings checking signal is output while settings are being checked. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the settings checking signal is on (settings are being checked), and when the D1 bit is "0", it indicates that the settings checking signal is off (settings are not being checked).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when door switch 17 is on (when opening of front door 12 is detected), fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is on (door switch 17 is on, front door 12 is open), and when the D2 bit is "0", it indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is off (door switch 17 is off, front door 12 is closed).

Like fraud detection signal 1, "fraud detection signal 2" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that fraud detection signal 2 is on (a recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", it indicates that fraud detection signal 2 is off (not a recoverable error state).

"Fraud detection signal 3", like fraud detection signals 1 and 2, is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when an irrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (an irrecoverable error state exists), and when the D4 bit is "0", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is off (not an irrecoverable error state).

The "security signal" is an external signal that indicates that the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are on. When the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are being output, the security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is on (the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are being output), and when the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting changing signal, setting checking signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are being output).

As described above, the setting change signal continues to be output until the end of one game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output. Specifically, for example, assume that the setting change state is ended and a situation has arisen in which medals (gaming media, gaming value) can be bet. At this time, when the number of bets is "0", if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output.
Furthermore, when any of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit of output port 5 are turned on ("1"). If the setting confirmation state is then ended before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 remain on ("1"), while the D1 bit is turned off ("0"). Then, when the first game after the setting change is ended, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, the lighting control of digits 1 to 9 will be described.
The illumination of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, and setting value display LED 73) is controlled by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Fig. 50, which will be described later. The LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is a process performed by the program in the usage area (first program).

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (control information display LED 74) is controlled by a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) shown in Fig. 52, which will be described later. The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the usage area.
In the third embodiment, the output ports used are different for digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, there are digits 1 to 9, the segments of digits 1 to 5 are segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segments of digits 6 to 9 are segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).
Segments 1A to 1G of Digit 1 constitute the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of Digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d.
Further, the segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment 1P of digit 2 constitutes the insertion display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 form the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 forms the replay display LED 79f.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous zone display LED 77.
Moreover, the segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 constitute a setting value display LED 73.
Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of the digit 6 form the upper digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of the digit 7 form the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and the segment 2P of the digit 7 forms the digit division display LED.
The segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 form the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, the segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 form the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

40A is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 3. Also, FIG. 40B is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 6. Furthermore, FIG. 40C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) is provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 35) is provided outside the usage area of RWM 53.

LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal at each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
Furthermore, LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal at each interruption, and is a counter with 4 interruptions per cycle.
In this way, in the third embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting up digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting up digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently.
In addition, since the cycles of the two LED display counters are different, the timing at which digits 1 to 5 are lit differs from the timing at which digits 6 to 9 are lit.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating the digits that are permitted to be lit, and is stored at address "F052 (H)" in the usage area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 33).
40C, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which bit D0 corresponds to the digit 1 signal, bit D1 corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 corresponds to the digit 5 signal. Each bit of the LED display request flag corresponds to a bit of output port 3 shown in FIG.
Also, as shown in Fig. 40(C), during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 can be lit (digit 5 is off), and during setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are off). Note that "normal operation" refers to waiting for a game and during a game.

In the interrupt process, the value of the LED display counter 1 in the usage area is ANDed with the value of the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that will be lit in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the value of LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal)", then ANDing the two will result in "00001000 (B)" and only the digit 4 signal will be "1".
In addition, while the settings are being changed or confirmed, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, making it possible to light up the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5).

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be described.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered from without turning the power on and off. Examples of recoverable errors include:
Errors that may occur include, "HP" error: medal jam (stagnation) error in hopper 35, "HE" error: empty medal error in hopper 35, "H0" error: abnormality in payout sensor 37 of hopper 35, "CE" error: medal stack error in medal selector, "CP" error: illegal medal passage error in medal selector, "CH" error: abnormality in passage sensor 46 located in medal selector, "C0" error: abnormality in insertion sensor 44 located in medal selector, "C1" error: abnormal medal insertion error, "FE" error: subtank full, "dE" error: front door 12 open, etc.
Incidentally, recoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

In step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 described later, a read process of the input port 51 is executed, and input signals of various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (insertion sensor 44, etc.) are read. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) are generated and stored at a specified address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S463 of the interrupt process (I_INTR), an input error check process is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is stored at a specified address in the RWM 53.

In addition, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the error detection flag is checked before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected and after all the reels 31 have stopped. If any bit of the error detection flag is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is entered.
In addition, if a recoverable error occurs between the operation of the start switch 41 when a specified number of medals have been bet and the time when all the reels 31 have stopped, game progress may be continued until all the reels 31 have stopped, and after all the reels 31 have stopped, game progress may be stopped and a recoverable error state may be entered before the medal payout process is executed.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information about the occurred recoverable error is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This display of error information (error display) is performed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG.

When a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed by an administrator (a hall attendant) and the reset switch 153 is operated, which clears the recoverable error state and resumes game progress.
In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error can be removed and the reset switch 153 can be operated without turning the power on/off or operating the setting key switch 152, thereby canceling the recoverable error state and restoring the game to a state in which it is possible to continue playing.

In contrast, an "irrecoverable error" is a serious error that cannot be recovered from unless the power is turned off and an operation for moving to a setting change state is performed (turning the power on with the setting key switch 152 turned on).
"E1" error: When recovery from power failure is not normal (when there is a power failure recovery abnormality) (when "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 41 described later)
"E5" error: When the stopped symbol is not normal when the reel 31 stops (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: When the setting value is not within the normal range (when a setting value error occurs) (when "No" is returned in step S458 of FIG. 47)
"E7" error: When a random number error occurs ("Yes" in step S460 of FIG. 47)
etc.
Incidentally, the unrecoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

When any irrecoverable error occurs, the error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed in digit 3 and "1" is displayed in digit 4. The same display is also displayed when other irrecoverable errors occur.
In addition, it is the processing of step S2715 (processing by the program in the used area (first program)) during the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 that determines that the recovery from the power outage is not normal (power outage recovery abnormality) and judges it to be an "E1" error.
Furthermore, it is the processing in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46) (processing by the program in the used area (first program)) that determines that the stopped pattern when the reel 31 stops is abnormal (a display error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E5" error.

In contrast, it is the processing of step S458 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 (processing by a program outside the area of use (second program)) that determines that the set value is not within the normal range (that is, that a set value error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E6" error.
Similarly, it is the processing of step S460 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 (processing by a program outside the area of use (second program)) that determines that the random number value is abnormal (a random number error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E7" error.
If it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program in the used area (first program), then the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in a program outside the used area (second program), an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, which will be described later, is executed.

When an irrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (power supply is turned off, power switch 11 is turned off), and then, with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the power supply is resumed (power supply is turned on, power switch 11 is turned on). As a result, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the power cut process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48 described later is not executed, so step S2712 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 described later, initialization process is performed for the entire range including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)". Thereafter, the process proceeds to a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG. 44. If the setting value is reset here, the unrecoverable error state is released and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46).
In this way, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the power can be turned off once, and then turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, thereby canceling the irrecoverable error state and restoring the state in which game progress can be resumed.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Fig. 50, but when an irrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Fig. 47 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is not executed either. When an irrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43 or the irrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area of RWM 53 and outside the used area are maintained without being initialized, but when recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the entire range of data in the used area of RWM 53 and outside the used area is initialized.
When recovering from a recoverable error state, data such as the error detection flag stored in a specified address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
When the power is turned on (the power switch 11 is turned on and the power supply is resumed), the program starts from the program start process in FIG.
In FIG. 41, when the program is started in step S2701, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the usage area of the RWM 53 in the next step S2702.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2703, where the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process for the RWM 53.
Specifically, in step S2703, the data in addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data in addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together.
That is, the data in the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together.
If the result is "0", it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is normal, and if the result is not "0", it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is not normal (abnormal).

Also, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of address "F2A1(H)" of RWM 53 is "55(H)" or not. If it is "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is normal, and if it is not "55(H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is abnormal (abnormal).
In this embodiment, when the power-off process is performed, a power-off process completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set to address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 49). Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off process completion flag set during the power-off process is a normal value ("55(H)").

Also, in step S2703, if the calculation result of the checksum of RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area of RWM 35 and outside the used area is "0") and the power off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is the normal value ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored as the power off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" of RWM 53.
On the other hand, in step S2703, if at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2704.

When the process proceeds to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that were saved in step S2702. The process then proceeds to the next step, S2705.

Here, the program for the program start process is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the usage area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the program start process is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation process of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the usage area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 41, in the program start processing which is processing by a program in the used area (first program), when proceeding to step S2703, a checksum calculation processing of RWM53 which is processing by a program outside the used area (second program) is executed, and when this checksum calculation processing is completed, the process returns to the program start processing which is processing by the program in the used area (first program).
In addition, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored.

In step S2705, the main control board 50 obtains the power interruption recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores this in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2706.

When the process proceeds to step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is on and the door switch signal is on. If it is determined that the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the setting key switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2708.

In step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred. Specifically, if the value of the A register (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)", it is determined that there is no power failure recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. In contrast, if the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. The specific contents of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets the reset determination data. Specifically, the main control board 50 stores "7" in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2710.
When the process proceeds to step S2710, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. When the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) of step S2721. The specific contents of the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

When proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for when the power recovery is abnormal. In this embodiment, when the power recovery is abnormal (the power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00(H)"), the entire range of the used area and outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, is set as the initialization range. The initialization range is specified by the start address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, proceed to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as step S2708. If it is determined that there is no power failure recovery abnormality, the data "7" for determining that the setting has been changed is stored in the D register and the process proceeds to the next step S2713. If there is a power failure recovery abnormality, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

In step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power recovery. In this embodiment, when the power recovery is normal (power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55(H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are not initialized (cleared) and are maintained. For this reason, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range. As described above, the initialization range is specified by the start address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 judges whether the setting can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting is set to be unchangeable during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including during the rotation of the reel 31, and during this period, the setting unchangeable flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, by judging whether the setting unchangeable flag is on, it is judged whether the setting can be changed. Then, when it is judged that the setting cannot be changed (the setting cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715, and when it is judged that the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It is also possible to allow the settings to be changed at all times without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

In step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2708. If it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), and if it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S2721, which is a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON). The specific contents of the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. The process according to this flowchart then ends.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during power-off processing is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S2723, the main control board 50 executes a read process of the input port 51. As a result, each data in the input port 51 is updated to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completion flag, and then proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46), where the processing of this flowchart ends.
In this embodiment, after the process of step S2724 is executed, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 is started before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in a used area of the ROM 54, and the program for unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the used area of the ROM 54. In other words, the program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Furthermore, in the unrecoverable error processing, interrupt processing is prohibited.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that does not normally occur, and in order to prevent the execution of processes based on abnormal data (such as updating the data of RWM 53 based on an input signal from input port 51, sending a control command to the sub-control board 80, and control based on a signal output from an output port based on data from RWM 53), interrupt processing is prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the first program, and when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, first, execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited by the interrupt prohibition processing in step S1490.
In contrast, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and since execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is being executed, no interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).

43, in step S1491, the main control board 50 sets error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is to store data for lighting digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") ("00001000(B)") in the H register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1492, where the main control board 50 sets error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is to store data for lighting digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is set to "1") ("00000100(B)") in the D register.

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores in the E register segment data ("01111001B") for displaying an "E" in the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
Before the process for the unrecoverable error is started, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data for displaying "1"("00000110B") is stored in the L register.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values at this point are as follows:
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
E register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)")
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)")
It becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8) are set.
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the output of the output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for the output ports 0 to 7, the output is turned off ("00000000(B)") one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1." For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)," the address of output port 1, "00F2(H)," is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, the main control board 50 determines whether or not turning off the output of all output ports has been completed, that is, whether or not the output has been turned off up to output port 7. If it determines that it has not been completed, the process returns to step S1494, and if it determines that it has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this manner, the process of steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until the output of all output ports has been turned off, and if it determines that the output of all output ports has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S1497.

In this way, by turning off all output ports, all active signals that were being output before this process was executed are turned off. This turns off all LEDs, including digits 1 to 9 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73, and management information display LED 74), preventing LED burn-in.

In addition, if an irrecoverable error occurs while an excitation signal for motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for motor 32 will continue to be output until the irrecoverable error is cleared. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for motor 32 is turned off, thereby preventing motor 32 from burning out.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while a blocker signal is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the blocker 45 will remain on (in a state in which the medal is guided to the hopper 35) even though the medal detection process is not executed, causing the medal to be swallowed; however, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 is turned off and the inserted medal is returned, thereby preventing the medal from being swallowed.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the upper digits. From output port 3, it outputs the data stored in the D register, and from output port 4, it outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1498, where the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about 0.1 ms, for example. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, 255) is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted, for example, by an internal system clock. When the B register value becomes 0, it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, and the process proceeds to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4. This process is for preventing image retention.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1500, where the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LEDs from flickering. This process ensures that the LEDs are turned off after the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off ("0").

Next, the process proceeds to step S1501, where the main control board 50 switches between the upper and lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are swapped.
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)")
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)")
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
E register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)")
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
L register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)")
It becomes.

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the lower digits. As in step S1497, the D register value is output from output port 3, and the E register value is output from output port 4. As a result, "00001000(B)" (data in which only the digit 4 signal is "1"), which lights up digit 4, is output from output port 3, and segment data "00000110(B)" to display "1" is output from output port 4.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1503, where the main control board 50 executes a standby process for preventing flickering. This process is similar to that of step S1498.
Next, proceeding to step S1504, the main control board 50 turns off the output of output ports 3 and 4 ("0"), similar to step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes a standby process for preventing flickering. This process is similar to that in step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

By the above process, when an "E1" error occurs, for example, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at a predetermined time interval.
Incidentally, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the interrupt processing (I_INTR). However, as described above, in the event of an irrecoverable error, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited), and instead, as shown in FIG. 43, the display of the irrecoverable error is performed by calculation processing using registers and a hardware configuration.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first executes initialization of the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, and in the next step S2733 sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53, and proceeds to the next step S2734 to determine whether initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it determines that initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and if it determines that initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. Thus, the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 are repeated until initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53.

As described above, the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the start address and the number of bytes of the initialization range) is set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG.
In steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed for the initialization range of the used area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
The processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program in the area of use (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range of the area of use out of the initialization range of RWM 53.

Then, if it is determined in step S2734 that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2735, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the usage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S2736, the main control board 50 executes initialization of the initialization range outside the usage area of the RWM 53 that was set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, the used area of the initialization range of RWM 53 is initialized, but in step S2736, the area outside the used area of the initialization range of RWM 53 is initialized.
The process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the area of use. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the area of use of the RWM 53.
Then, when the initialization of the initialization range outside the used area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (the A register and the F register (flag register)) that were evacuated in step S2735. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it determines whether step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "Yes". In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, if step S2710 in FIG. 41 is "Yes", the "7" in the D register is maintained, and if step S2710 in FIG. 41 is "No", the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). Then, in step S2738 in FIG. 44, it determines whether the D register is "7", and if the D register is "7", it determines that it is time to reset ("Yes" in step S2710 in FIG. 41), and proceeds to step S2739. On the other hand, if the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not reset ("No" in step S2710 of FIG. 41), and step S2739 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2740.

When the process proceeds to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at the time of reset. Specifically, "70(H)" is stored in the acquisition count data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) to display "70" through the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2739, thereby informing the manager (hall staff) that it is time to reset.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets a setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether it is a reset or a setting change. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2740, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine whether it is a reset or a setting change.

In this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 is started after the process of step S2740 is executed and before proceeding to the process of step S2741. In other words, the process of initializing the initialization range of RWM 53 (the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 44) is completed before the interrupt process (I_INTR) starts. This configuration prevents the interrupt process (I_INTR) from being executed while RWM 53 is being initialized. This makes it possible to prevent the contents of RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) by the interrupt process (I_INTR) while RWM 53 is being initialized.

In the next step S2741, the main control board 50 judges whether or not it is time to reset. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2738. If it is determined that it is not time to reset, the process proceeds to step S2742, and if it is determined that it is time to reset, the process skips step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743.
When the process proceeds to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this process will be described later. Then, when the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) ends, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the wait time has elapsed. This wait time is for waiting for the transmission of the setting command. If it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S2744, where the main control board 50 sets the initialization wait time, and in the next step S2745, executes a 2-byte wait process (wait process). The processes in steps S2744 and S2745 are for waiting for the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to finish.

Then, when the 2-byte time wait process is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2746, where the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2746, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value.

In the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2747.
Then, when the clearing of the acquisition number data in step S2747 is completed, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is started, first in step S2751, the main control board 50 obtains the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores this in register A. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2752.

In step S2752, the main control board 50 generates setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2753.
As described above, in this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5", and when the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. Therefore, "N", which is the setting value data "N-1" plus "1", is used as the setting value display data.

In step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2754.
In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes an interrupt wait process. This process waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. This is because by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once, the main control board 50 waits for the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to become OFF ("0").

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes on ("1"). If the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once after that, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes off ("0").
However, if the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 loops multiple times after the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on ("1") and before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed, the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data will be executed repeatedly.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is prevented from being looped multiple times and the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data is prevented from being repeatedly executed.
Then, in step S2754, the process waits until one interrupt time has elapsed, and then proceeds to the next step S2755.

In addition, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 will become "1".
In addition, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "0".

Similarly, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "0".
In addition, if the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the falling data of the signal of reset switch 153 becomes "1".
The other switches such as the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the setting key switch 152, and the like are similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 judges whether it is the time to start the setting confirmation. This process is a process for judging whether it is the time to confirm the setting or the time to change the setting. In this embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of the game is "0" and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is judged whether the A register value is "1". Then, when the A register value is "1", it is judged that it is the time to confirm the setting, and the process proceeds to step S2760, and when the A register value is not "1" (when the D register value is "0" or "7"), it is judged that it is not the time to confirm the setting (it is the time to change the setting), and the process proceeds to step S2756. Then, after judging whether the A register value is "1" or not, the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes the set value data.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) begins), the A register through the L register are set to their initial values ("0").

When the process proceeds to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal stored in a specific address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored in a specific address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, it proceeds to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has not been operated, it returns to step S2752.

When the process proceeds to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, it adds "1" to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the set value data. Then, if step S2757 returns "Yes", that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, it adds "1" to the set value data. Note that if the A register value becomes "6" as a result of the addition, it rewrites the A register value to "0". Then, it returns to step S2752.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the setting value data. Then, when step S2756 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the setting value data. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the setting value data to be saved in the RWM 53.

When the process proceeds to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the falling edge data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored in a specific address of the RWM 53. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling edge data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 becomes "1", i.e., until the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the falling edge data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 becomes "1", i.e., when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Also, when the settings are changed, once the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, the process proceeds to step S2743 in FIG.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be described.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register and the state transitions to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current setting value is also displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the state returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on or not before detecting the operation of the start switch 41. Then, when it determines that the setting key switch 152 is on while the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 45. Steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 45 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of a game is "0", when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, a "1" is stored in the D register. Then, when the process proceeds to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start checking the settings. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". Then, when the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start checking the settings ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2760.

Thereafter, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During that time, the current setting value continues to be displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, if it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, where the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process of this flowchart ends.
Also, when the processing according to this flowchart is terminated during setting confirmation, the process proceeds to the next step in the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) which is the process of determining whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on (whether or not to transition to the setting confirmation state).

In this way, in the third embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created by the same module. Then, based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
In addition, the determination as to whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in another register rather than the D register, and the determination as to whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in RWM53.

46 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. During the progress of a game, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (e.g., register values, instruction processing of the main processing before the interrupt processing, etc.) when a power failure occurs, and setting the stack pointer is a process of setting register values to initial values in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, a game start setting process is carried out, which includes generating, updating, storing, etc. of an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read in. This is a process for reading the number of medals currently bet, and the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is read.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are any bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and if it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to wait for medal insertion, and then proceeds to step S276. The medal insertion waiting process in step S275 determines whether or not the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, processes such as transitioning to a setting confirmation mode are performed.
In step S276, a management process for the inserted medals is carried out. This process includes determining whether the medals have been handled and whether the settlement switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, a software random number update process is performed. This process updates (for example, adds "1" at a time) the random number for processing (calculation process) to a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role selection means 61. The software random number is a 16-bit random number with a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before the update may be executed.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and if it determines that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 has been operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number for the game, the determination in step S278 is "No."

In step S279, the process for when the start switch is accepted is executed, which includes setting a setting change unchangeable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reels 31, and setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to the hall computer or the like.
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared, causing the acquisition number display LED 78 to display "00" (or to be turned off).

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes an update process for the number of AT games. This process is a process for subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during a non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to add to the AT game count during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional AT games is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the additional amount is added to the AT game count counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 46).
After the start switch is accepted (step S279), the AT game count counter is updated in step S281. However, this is not limited to the above, and the AT game count counter may be updated after the role selection process in step S282 or after all reels 31 have stopped (after step S290).
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, if it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is updated after all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process due to a winning combination has been completed (after step S300).

In step S282, the role selection means 61 executes a role selection when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when an operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of role selection is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning roles using the role selection table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes a favorable zone transition lottery process. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed when the favorable zone transition lottery is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, where the push order instruction number is set. This process is a process for generating the push order instruction number and displaying the push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game during the AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the next step S285, a reel spin start preparation process is executed, which includes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum play time, and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)." If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum play time is "0," the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum play time (timer value). Then, the minimum play time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When the process proceeds to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether the minimum play time is "0," and if it is determined that the minimum play time is "0," the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 controls the driving of the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted to be accepted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the acceptance of stopping of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when an operation signal has been received, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, during AT, the instruction function may be activated, causing the acquisition number display LED 78 to display push order instruction information (e.g., "=1"). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
It is also possible to turn off the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, "00010011(B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the LED 78 may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a display error has occurred in the pattern. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293.
Here, the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, so that the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than that determined by the stop position determination table. However, if a symbol that should not be displayed (a kick symbol) is displayed on an active line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined to be abnormal, and an unrecoverable error process is executed.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where an update process for the payout number is executed. This process is a process for storing the payout number for the game as the payout number data and the payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, the interrupt process is prohibited. By the processes of steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the process proceeds to step S298, where the ratio set process is executed. This "ratio set process" is a process that updates various counter values and performs ratio calculations, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and interrupts are permitted (resumed) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio set process is executed, the AF register is saved and interrupt processes are prohibited before it is executed.

Interrupt processing is prohibited while the ratio set processing is being executed because the ratio set processing is a process that uses a program stored outside the usage area, and if an interrupt processing occurs while the main processing is executing a program outside the usage area, the program inside the usage area and the program outside the usage area will be mixed, complicating the processing.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, where a game end check process is performed. This process is a process for clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, a control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 the fact that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 ends, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Fig. 47, after step S452, the process proceeds to step S2770, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, where the main control board 50 executes a power outage process (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, the process skips step S2771 and proceeds to step S454.

In this way, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). For this reason, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupt prohibition, or when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed because a program outside the usage area (second program) is being executed, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is also not executed. The specific contents of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. Then, when the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is terminated, the process proceeds to step S454.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Fig. 47, the process proceeds from step S455 to step S2821, where the main control board 50 executes the LED display control (I_LED_OUT). In this manner, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). The specific content of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
Then, when the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is ended, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the usage area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, where the main control board 50 executes ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, and the setting value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5), etc., and is executed by the program in the usage area (first program).
In contrast, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the usage area. The specific contents of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. Then, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process proceeds to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 judges whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, it reads the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Next, it executes a comparison operation between the A register value and "5" (subtracts "5" from the A register value) and judges whether the carry flag is "1". If the carry flag is not "1", it judges that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and if the carry flag is "1", it judges that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is judged to be within the normal range, it proceeds to step S459, and if it is judged to be not within the normal range, it proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811.

47, if step S458 is "No" or step S460 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2811, where the main control board 50 executes unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
47, if the answer is "No" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2766, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (the A register and the F register (flag register)) that were saved in step S2765. Then, the process proceeds to step S457.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, the processes of steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by a program outside the area of use (second program).
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53 in step S2765, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2766.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves the various registers in the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area.

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, and for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are spinning) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving is stopped.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the used area of the RWM 53. The stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. Then, proceeding to next step S2776, the main control board 50 executes the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. Then, when the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is completed, proceeding to the next step S2777, the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, proceeding to the next step S2778.

The RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program outside the used area (second program).
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM53 in step S2775, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2777.

When the process proceeds to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2779, where the main control board 50 goes into a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in a work area outside the used area of RWM 53 in step S2781, and in the next step S2782 sets the stack pointer outside the used area ("F400 (H)"), and proceeds to the next step S2783 where multiple registers are saved to a stack area outside the used area of RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in Figure 35).
As described above, the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is a process performed by a program outside the area of use (second program). Therefore, while the program outside the area of use (second program) is being executed, the stack pointer used by the program in the area of use (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the area of use (first program).
Also, in step S2782, the stack pointer outside the used area (address "F400(H)") is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to a stack area outside the area in use.

In step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. When the power-off processing has been executed, "55(H)" is stored as the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
When the power is restored, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in Fig. 42. Therefore, after the processing of this step S2724 is executed, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off processing is not executed, the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, and the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, proceeding to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the top address ("F000(H)") of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for address designation (for example, the B register), proceeds to the next step S2787, sets the number of bytes (number of checksum calculations) of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for the number of calculations (for example, the C register), and proceeds to the next step S2788, sets the initial data ("00000000(B)") in a register for checksum calculation (for example, the D register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the used area of RWM 53 is set to the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2789 and S2790 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2790 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to address "F1FF(H)" of RWM 53. This causes the checksum of the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") to be calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the value of the register for addressing (B register) is subtracted from the value of the register for checksum calculation (D register). In the next step S2790, the value of the register for the number of operations (C register) is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the used area of RWM53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the value of the register for addressing (B register) is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2789.

When the checksum calculation process for the area used by RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2791, where the main control board 50 sets the top address ("F210(H)") outside the area used by RWM 53 in the address specification register (B register), and in the next step S2792, sets the number of bytes outside the area used by RWM 53 (the number of checksum calculations) in the calculation count register (C register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2793, the main control board 50 executes a checksum calculation process outside the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the outside of the used area of RWM 53 is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2793 and S2794 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2794 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to address "F3FF(H)" of RWM 53. This causes the checksum to be calculated for the outside of the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)").

More specifically, in this embodiment, when proceeding to step S2793, the checksum calculation result of the area used by RWM53 is stored in the register for checksum calculation (D register). Then, in step S2793, data indicated by the value of the register for address specification (B register) is subtracted from the value of the register for checksum calculation (D register). In the next step S2794, the value of the register for the number of operations (C register) is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined that the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process outside the area used by RWM53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2795. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "0", the value of the register for address specification (B register) is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2793.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the RWM checksum data (also called complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processes of steps S2785 to S2794.
As described above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.

Then, when the checksum calculation process outside the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at address "F2A0 (H)" of the RWM 53.
In the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the registers saved in step S2783, and in the next step S2797, restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 38) are turned off. Output port 3 is the output port corresponding to digit 1 signals through digit 5 signals, and output port 4 is the output port corresponding to segment 1A through segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000(B)" from output ports 3 and 4, output of digits 1 through 5 is temporarily suspended. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to be lit simultaneously (overlapping) even for a moment when switching the LED display (preventing image retention).

In the next step S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (Figures 33 and 40 (A)) of the used area is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" one digit to the right. This updated value is stored in address "F051 (H)" (Figure 33) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined that the value is "00000000 (B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "00000000 (B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000(B)" and stored in the address "F051(H)" (FIG. 33) of the RWM 53. Then, the flow proceeds to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 33) stored in the RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

Then proceed to step S2827 to confirm and set the segment display of the digit to be displayed this time. This process performs an AND operation on the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of LED display counter 1) to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
It becomes.
The result of the calculation is then stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2828, where it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is obtained. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. In step S2829, the error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, LED segment table 1 storing data for displaying alphabetical characters on the 7-segment display and LED segment table 2 storing data for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display are provided, and these are stored in the use area of ROM 54. Note that a description of the specific configurations of LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the top address of LED segment table 2 is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the flow proceeds to step S2831, where the set value display data (address "F001(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2832 to determine whether or not there is a request to display the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). If the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the set value ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the set value ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit amount data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, a high-order offset is obtained. This process executes an operation to divide the A register value (the credit number data obtained in step S2833) by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register.

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

When proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and proceeds to step S2842. On the other hand, if the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the top address of LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display, but when an error is displayed, an English character corresponding to the type of error is displayed on the 7-segment display. Therefore, in step S2839, the top address of LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read, and this value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the top address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the top address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, an offset for the upper digits is obtained. When proceeding to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition number data acquired in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data acquired in step S2829. Then, if no error has occurred, an operation is performed to divide the acquisition number data stored in the A register by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. On the other hand, if an error has occurred, an operation is performed to divide the error display data stored in the B register by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count display LED 78. Specifically, it is determined whether the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". If the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. In contrast, if the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for the lower digits is obtained. This process stores the data stored in the C register in the A register. When processing advances to step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of the division) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2843, where the segment output data is obtained. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the first address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830, or the first address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) is added to the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data), and the data corresponding to the address after the addition is obtained from LED segment table 1 or 2 in ROM 54, and stored in the D register.

The flow then proceeds to step S2844, where it is determined whether or not a display request for segment P has been made.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (timing when digit 4 is lit) and the D0 bit of the advantageous zone display LED flag (obtained from address "F062(H)" of RWM53 in FIG. 33) is "1." Then, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1," it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845.
On the other hand, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the favorable zone display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and processing proceeds to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", the following process is performed.
An AND operation is performed on the LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from address "F044(H)" of RWM 53 in FIG. 33), and it is determined whether the result of the AND operation is "0". If the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2846.

When the process proceeds to step S2845, the segment P output data is set. Specifically, an OR operation is performed on the segment output data (D register value) obtained in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)", and the result of the OR operation is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit of the segment output data (the bit corresponding to segment P) becomes "1".

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2846, where a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment signal is output from output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from output port 4. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As described above, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process by the second program, and since execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited during execution of the second program, no interrupt prohibition process is provided after the start of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).Other than this, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is the same as the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.
In FIG. 51, the same processes as those in FIG. 43 are given the same step numbers.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG.
The ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during the interrupt process (I_INTR). Since the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed during the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), and even in the recoverable error state, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, and various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process starts, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in Figure 35) in step S2461.
As described above, preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program outside the area of use (second program), so while the program outside the area of use (second program) is running, the stack pointer used in the program in the area of use (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the area of use (first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer outside the used area. This process stores "F400(H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves the various registers in a stack area outside the area in use.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2464, where the main control board 50 executes a blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is the process shown in Fig. 53, which will be described later, and is a process for updating the blink request flag (address "F291 (H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the rate display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in Fig. 55, which will be described later, and updates the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)"), the display switch time (address "F294"), and the blinking switch time (address "F296(H)").
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT). This process is shown in Fig. 56, which will be described later, and is a process for actually displaying (lighting or turning off) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2467, where the main control board 50 restores the registers. This process restores the various registers that were evacuated in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, i.e., the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the stack pointer to indicate the address of the area in use. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the period between the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 46) and the game end check processing (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), and in the recoverable error state, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
For this reason, even in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, during the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), and in the recoverable error state, it is possible for the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) to sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (whether the front door 12 is open or closed). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed).
Therefore, whether the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) or off (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

In contrast, when an irrecoverable error occurs and an irrecoverable error state is entered (a state in which the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed, so that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) no longer display the various ratios relating to the information type and game results.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the event of an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 described above, or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 described below, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off ("00000000 (B)").

As a result, in the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) will remain at "00000000 (B)", so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed.
Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain off, which is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When the blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process is started, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and an initial value in step S2481. This process stores "6(H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not to blink the six ratio segments.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-matching item determination value table. This process is to store the top address of the blinking/non-matching item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table prescribes a predetermined value for each of the six item ratios. For example, when the instruction-included role ratio is "70", the display is made to blink when the instruction-included role ratio is "70" or more.
54, the top address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500(H)." Therefore, "2500(H)" is stored in the DE register.

In addition, "non-applicable item" refers to a machine that does not have the function (performance) corresponding to the item. For example, a gaming machine that does not have "RB (first-class special feature)" does not display the consecutive feature ratio, so when the consecutive feature ratio is displayed, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In the third embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed, but when there is a non-applicable item, “DE(H)” is stored in the address of ROM 54 corresponding to the non-applicable item in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table.

For example, in a gaming machine that does not have an "RB (first type special feature),""DE(H)" is stored in addresses "2502(H)" and "2504(H)" instead of "60(H)" in FIG. 54.
In this way, even if the gaming machine does not have "RB (first-class special feature)", the control process is set up to enable lighting control of the management information by simply modifying a portion of the data in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table. Therefore, the control program can be easily used in other products.
It should be noted that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address ("F28D (H)" in FIG. 35) where the role object state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2484, where the main control board 50 acquires the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The data at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) The value of the A register is decremented by "1."

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the item value is a non-corresponding item value. This process subtracts "DD (H)" from the A register value, and if the calculation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is judged to be a non-corresponding item value.
In other words, when the item is non-applicable, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table, so subtracting "1" from "DE(H)" and then subtracting "DD(H)" results in "0", and the zero flag becomes "1".

In addition, when a specified value other than "DE(H)" is stored as a value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "specified value - 1 - (specified value - 1)" is calculated, and if the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined to be a non-applicable item value.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the instructed reel ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), and reel ratio (6000 times), a value exceeding "60 (H)" in the case of the continuous reel ratio (cumulative) and continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and a value exceeding "50 (H)" in the case of the reel etc. state ratio.
If it is determined that the value is not a non-corresponding item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486, and if it is determined that the value is a non-corresponding item value, step S2486 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires the ratio data. This process stores the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or the non-corresponding item value. This process stores the A register value in the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meaning.

When there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored before the above-mentioned saving process.
For example, if the reel does not have an "RB (first type special reel)", the consecutive reel ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and the consecutive reel ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B (H)") are stored as "00 (H)".

Details will be described later, but when the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. In this case, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous feature ratio (6000 times) data, when the continuous feature ratio (6000 times) is displayed, "00" will be displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register acquired in step S2485 ("DD (H)" in this embodiment) is stored as the ratio data, so that "--" will be displayed.
In addition, the program processing is set up so that this can be used in common by gaming machines that have non-relevant items and gaming machines that do not have non-relevant items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking determination. This process subtracts the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. If a carry is carried out as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1".
As will be described in more detail later, when the carry flag is set to "1", this means that the corresponding item will be lit in a non-blinking manner when displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", this means that the corresponding item will be lit in a blinking manner when displayed.

Next, the flow advances to step S2489, where the main control board 50 generates a blink request flag. This process performs an arithmetic process of rotating and shifting the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is "CY" and the value of the C register is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0", then
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
The calculation is performed as follows.

For example, if the C register value is the initial value "00000000(B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag is "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000(B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
The calculation is performed as follows.
Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)."
This C register value ultimately becomes the blink request flag.
In other words, the processing of step S2488 is a processing of storing information in a register (memory area) that determines whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item in question by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table.

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process subtracts "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blinking judgment is "F28D(H)" (reel state ratio data) as described above. If "1" is subtracted from the HL register value, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (reel state ratio (cumulative) data) which is the target of the second blinking judgment.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is to increment the DE register value by "1." For example, if the DE register value was initially set to "2500(H)," this process will result in the DE register value becoming "2501(H)."
As shown in FIG. 54, the blinking/non-applicable item judgment values are stored in addresses "2500(H)" to "2505(H)" in the following order: reel etc. state ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), continuous reel ratio (cumulative), reel ratio (6000 times), continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and reel ratio with instructions.
This simplifies the process by setting the initial value of the address (DE register value) of the blinking/non-matching item judgment value table to "2500 (H)" and adding "1" when judging the next blinking/non-matching item through a loop process (steps S2484 to S2492). This allows the target address to be specified, thereby simplifying the process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2492, where the main control board 50 determines whether the repetition has ended. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The value of the B register is decremented by "1."
(2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions becomes "6." If it is determined that the repetition has ended, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, the process returns to step S2484.
In this manner, blinking determination is performed for six items.

When the process proceeds to step S2493 after completing the blinking determination of the six items, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The value of the lowest two bytes of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value of the most significant byte of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in register A.
As mentioned above, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes, with "F26D(H)" being the memory area that stores the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
Also, "F26E(H)" is the storage area for storing the second digit, and that value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is the memory area that stores the third digit, and that value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the most significant byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process judges whether or not the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is judged to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2495, and if it is judged not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 judges whether or not 6000 games have been played. This process subtracts "6000 (D)" from the HL register value (the lowest 2 bytes of the total number of games played counter). If a carry flag is set to "1" as a result of this calculation, it is determined that 6000 games have not been played, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
On the other hand, if it is determined that 6,000 games have elapsed, the flow proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blink request flag. This process sets the D6 bit of the C register to "1." Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. 35 (however, at this point, the bit is inverted). Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, the process of setting the D6 bit to "1" is executed.

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" (is "3" or greater). Here, a process is performed to subtract "3" from the A register value. If there is no borrowing in this subtraction, the carry flag becomes ≠ "1". If the carry flag is ≠ "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" (is "3" or greater).

The reason for this is that in order to determine whether or not 175,000 games have been played, the most significant byte is first compared with "3." Since "175,000 (D)" is expressed in hexadecimal as "2AB98 (H)," it is clear that the A register value exceeding "2" (A register value of "3" or greater) necessarily means that the total number of games played counter value exceeds "175,000 (D)."
In step S2497, if the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" and the process proceeds to step S2500. If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter does not exceed "2" and the process proceeds to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2". This process subtracts "2" from the A register value, and if it is determined that the value is not "0", it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2". If it is determined that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and if it is determined that the value of the most significant byte of the total play count counter is "2", the process proceeds to step S2499.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 judges whether or not 175,000 games have passed. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if a carry occurs as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1." If the carry flag is "1," it is determined that 175,000 games have not passed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have been played, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not been played, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blink request flag. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1." The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit of the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in Figure 35 (175000 game blink flag). Then, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag and executes the following processes.
(1) Store “01111111(B)” in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the result is stored in the A register.

Before the process of step S2501 is executed, as described above, the blinking item (bit) among the data stored in the C register stores "0." For example, when 175,000 games have been played, the D7 bit becomes "1" as described above. In other words, when 175,000 games have not been played, the bit becomes "0."
Therefore, a blink request flag is generated by inverting the bit of the C register value so that the item (bit) to be blinked becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 stores the blink request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address of the blink request flag ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35).
As a result, items that are to be blinked are set to "1" and items that are not to be blinked are set to "0." In this manner, information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0," and blink request flags for eight items, including whether to blink or not, are stored in address "F291(H)" in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process is started, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address storing the display switching time ("F294(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is decremented by "1", and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cyclically cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when the display switching time is expressed in decimal.

Therefore, if this process is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) will be stored as the display switching time.
Moreover, when the process is performed at "0", and "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Incidentally, since an interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms, the value goes from "0" to "2144(D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1."
This causes the ratio display content to be switched approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the display switching time has elapsed. This judgement is made by judging whether or not the carry flag has become "1" in the processing of step S2511. If the carry flag is "1", it is judged that the display switching time has elapsed.
If it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513, and if it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D)(86(H))" in the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (i.e., "F296(H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is saved. The blinking switching time of 2.235×134=299.49 (ms) is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2514, where the main control board 50 turns off the blinking switch flag. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" in the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switch flag is "0", the light is on, and when it is "1", the light is off.
That is, when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2515, where the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The HL register value is decremented by "1."
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 corresponding to the ratio display number ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process for the ratio display number, which cycles between "0" and "5." Therefore, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is "5,""0" is stored as the ratio display number. Also, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5," the carry flag becomes "1."

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag = "1", it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0". In other words, when the ratio display number is "5", if the processing of step S2515 is executed, the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and in this case, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0".

If it is determined in step S2516 that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is not "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process adds "1" to the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35). As a result of this process, if a "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number cycles through "1" to "6". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switching time ("F296(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cyclically cycles between "0" and "134 (D)" when expressed as a decimal number as the blinking switching time.
Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134(D)" (86(H)) will be stored as the blinking switching time.
Moreover, when the process is performed at "0", and "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2519, where the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag is "1", and if the carry flag is not equal to "1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2520, and if it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switch flag. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the addition is stored at that address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process for the blinking switch flag, which cycles between "0" and "1." Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switch flag is "1,""0" is stored as the blinking switch flag.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) starts, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 35) in step S1471. This process acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and stores it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display a ratio. Here, it determines whether or not there is a request to display any of the digits 6 to 9. Specifically, it performs an AND operation on the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)." If the result of this AND operation is "0," it is determined that there is no request to display a ratio, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is not "0," it is determined that there is a request to display a ratio, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the third embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111 (B)" will never be "0", so the result in step S1472 will never be "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 35) is obtained. This process executes a process of obtaining the ratio display number and storing it in the A register, and further storing the A register value in the E register.
Here, the blinking bit inspection count described later is determined based on the ratio display number. For example, the following is given:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the ratio of indicated features.
Example 2)
Ratio display number is "2": Obtain the number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous feature ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the reel ratio (total cumulative).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the reel status ratio.
Furthermore, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blink bit check count table is set. This process stores the address obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address of the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the HL register.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 57, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the instructed feature ratio is "8(H)") is stored for each ratio.
And the top address is "2510(H)." Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "blink bit inspection count" is a value indicating how many bits from bit D0 in the blink request flag at address "F292(H)" are required to reach the bit to be inspected.
For example, in Fig. 57, "8 (H)" is stored in the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, which is a value for determining whether the value of the eighth bit D7 counting from bit D0 in the blinking request flag is "1". Bit D7 is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 175,000, and when bit D7 is "1", the identification segments of the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio are subject to blinking.

In addition, in FIG. 57, "7 (H)" is stored for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and feature ratio (6000 times), which is a value for determining whether the value of the seventh bit D6, counting from bit D0 in the blinking request flag, is "1". Bit D6 is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 6000, and when bit D6 is "1", the identification segments for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and feature ratio (6000 times) are subject to blinking.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (the ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H)+3(H)=2512(H) (=HL register value)
7 (H) (=B register value)
It becomes.

In other words, "250F (H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292 (H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit inspection table and obtain the data stored in that address.
In the above example, "7 (H)" is obtained, which is information for determining whether or not to blink the identification segment at the reel ratio (6000 times) stored in address "2512 (H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1476, where the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process stores the top address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The top address is "2520(H)", and the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, which is "251F(H), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires an identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as an offset value from the identification segment offset table.
Specifically, the following process is executed.
(1) The data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520(H)" obtained by adding "1(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and "7A(H)", which is the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)" obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and "6B(H)", which is the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit) (a request to display digit 6). Here, it determines whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (a request to display digit 7). Here, it determines whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the ratio segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register, so the same value is stored in the E register, the A register, and the B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1480. Note that the process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no request to display the ratio (1000th digit) and the ratio (100th digit), i.e., when there is no request to display the identification segment (when the ratio segment is to be displayed). Therefore, in step S1480, the ratio data is obtained.
In this step S1480, the main control board 50 acquires a value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the command-inclusive role ratio data is acquired.

Specific ratio data is obtained as follows.
(1) In the HL register, the value ("F287(H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address of the RWM 53 ("F288(H)" in FIG. 35) in which the instructed feature ratio data is stored is stored.
(2) The value of the HL register is added to the value of the A register, and the result is stored in the HL register.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In other words, using "F287 (H)" as the base address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored can be calculated (specified), and the data stored in that RWM address can be obtained (stored) in a register (memory area).

By this process, the A register stores an offset value for displaying the ratio of any of the following: instructed feature ratio data, continuous feature ratio data (6000 times), feature ratio data (6000 times), continuous feature ratio data (cumulative), feature ratio data (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio. This offset value (A register value) is used when obtaining the ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1481, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (single digit) (a request to display digit 9). This process is to determine whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1." If there is a request to display the ratio (single digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When it is determined in step S1481 that there is no request to display the ratio (1 digit), this means that there is a request to display the ratio (10 digits).

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000's digit) or the ratio (10's digit), the flow proceeds to step S1482; if there is a request to display the ratio (100's digit) or the ratio (1's digit), the flow proceeds to step S1483.
In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the offset for the upper digits. The reason for proceeding to step S1482 is to light up the upper digits of the identification segment or ratio segment. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or the ratio data (step S1480). Then, the following process is executed.

(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before swapping is "0011/1001(B)" (where "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), swapping the lower 4 bits with the upper 4 bits results in "1001/0011(B)."
(2) The value of the A register is ANDed with "00001111 (B)" and the result is stored in the A register. This process masks the upper 4 bits (setting them to "0") so that the lower 4 bits of the A register can be used as an offset value.
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower offset value. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for acquiring the upper segment data is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process stores the first address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The first address is "2530 (H)", and "2530 (H)" is stored in the HL register. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1484, where the main control board 50 acquires the segment output data. This process adds the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (top address of the ratio display segment data table), and stores the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; top address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
If
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) (display data for "5")
It becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not segment P is being displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, the segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed, so when there is a request to display the ratio (100th digit), it is determined that there is a request to display segment P. On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), ratio (10 digit), and ratio (1000 digit), it is determined that there is no request to display segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, and if it is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following process is executed.
(1) Store “00000010(B)” in the A register.
(2) The A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471) are ANDed. If the result of this AND is not "0", it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made.
If it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made, the process proceeds to step S1486; if it is determined that a display request has not been made, the process proceeds to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to segment P. Since segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, it performs an OR operation on the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)" and stores the result of the operation in the E register.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires the blink request flag. This process is to store the data of the blink request flag (address "F291 (H)" in FIG. 35) in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2535, where the main control board 50 performs a blink bit check. This process shifts the A register to the right by "1" and stores the overflow result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag = "1".

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether the inspection has ended. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the value of the B register.
(2) If it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection is completed.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537, and if it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
Through the above process, the value of the blink request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the overflow result from this shift is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the blink request flag value is "10000000(B)" (the 175000 blink flag in bit D7 is on) and the B register value is "8(H)",
1st time: "10000000(B)" → "01000000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7 (H)
2nd time: "01000000(B)" → "00100000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7 - 1 = 6 (H)
3rd time: "00100000(B)" → "00010000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5 (H)
4th time: "00010000(B)" → "00001000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
5th time: "00001000(B)" → "00000100(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
6th time: "00000100(B)" → "00000010(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3 - 1 = 2 (H)
7th time: "00000010(B)" → "00000001(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2 - 1 = 1 (H)
8th time: "00000001(B)" → "00000000(B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (H)
It becomes.

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blink request flag is on. This process determines whether the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended, and if it is "1", it determines that the blink request flag is on. If it is determined that the blink request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538, and if it is determined that the blink request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switch flag is ON or not. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The data of the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag="1"), it is determined that the blinking switch flag is not on.
If it is determined that the blinking switch flag is on, the flow proceeds to step S2539, and if it is determined that the blinking switch flag is not on, the flow proceeds to step S1487.
In addition, from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blink request flag is off (step S2537: No), the process does not proceed to step S2538, and the light will not be turned off even if the blink switch flag is on.
b) Even if the blink request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the blink switch flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the blink request flag is on (Yes in step S2537) and the blink switch flag is on (Yes in step S2538), the process proceeds to step S2539, where the light is turned off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process stores the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended. Therefore, this process is a process for setting "0" to the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on ("1") and the blink switch flag is on ("1", i.e., off), the display to be lit is turned off in this interrupt process, so the process of step S2539 is executed to set the segment data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, in order to output a digit signal and a segment signal, the main control board 50 outputs a segment signal from output port 7 and outputs a digit signal from output port 6. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged.
Here, the D register stores a digit signal, and the E register stores a segment signal.
The data stored in the D register is swapped with the data stored in the H register.
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are swapped.
This means:
The H register stores the digit signal.
The L register stores a segment signal.
(2) The L register value is output to output port 7 and the H register value is output to output port 6 .
This ends the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, an operation when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the third embodiment is operated will be described.
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs (for example, a medal retention error in the medal selector ("CE" error), etc.), the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is operated to release the recoverable error state.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is released, the data in the used area of RWM53 and outside the used area are maintained without being initialized, and the data relating to the favorable zone is also maintained without being initialized, so the favorable zone display LED77 also remains lit.
When recovering from a recoverable error state, data relating to errors such as error detection flags stored in a specified address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

In contrast, when a recoverable error state occurs while the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated).
In this case, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "No" and step S2710 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2713, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set.

Also, since medals can be bet in this situation, the setting change impossible flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001 (H)" to "F1FF (H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" outside the used area. As a result, data related to the advantageous zone is initialized, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000 (H)" is not initialized and is maintained, so the setting value is not changed. Furthermore, since it is reset, step S2741 in FIG. 44 becomes "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, so there is no transition to the setting change state. After that, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), and the game returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

In this way, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the recoverable error state can be released by operating the reset switch 153, making it possible to continue playing in the advantageous zone.
On the other hand, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power can be turned off once and then turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on, thereby canceling the recoverable error state and allowing play to be resumed from the normal zone rather than the advantageous zone.
This allows the manager (hall staff) to choose whether to continue playing in the advantageous zone or to resume playing in the normal zone.

Also, for example, if a player stops playing in the advantageous zone (in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone), if the next player is allowed to play in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone, the player will be too advantageous.
On the other hand, changing the settings while the hall is open is not advisable, as it may encourage players to take more risk.
Furthermore, if the gaming machines are turned off and stopped from operating while the hall is open, the operating rate of the gaming machines will decrease, which is undesirable from the perspective of the hall's management.
Therefore, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is on and medals can be bet, the power is turned off once, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. This allows the game to be resumed from the normal zone without changing the settings.

Also, suppose that the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated).
In this case, it becomes possible to transition to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

Specifically, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated), step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, since the power recovery is not abnormal, step S2712 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step S2742 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). Then, since it is not the time to start the setting confirmation, step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45 becomes "No", and the process of steps S2752 to S2758 is repeated until step S2756 becomes "Yes". In other words, the setting change state is entered. After that, when the start switch 41 is operated, step S2756 becomes "Yes", and when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, step S2760 becomes "Yes", and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processes of steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 44, the process proceeds to step S248 of the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), and the state in which medals can be bet is returned to.

As described above, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the setting is set to be unchangeable during the period from the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in Figure 46) to the game end check processing (step S301 in Figure 46), including while the reels 31 are spinning, and during this period the setting unchangeable flag is turned on.
Then, when the setting change disable flag is on, the power is turned off, and then, even if the power is turned on under the circumstances where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the result in step S2714 in FIG. 41 is "No", so there is no transition to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731, and therefore no transition to the setting change state.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so when the power is turned off in this situation, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on, step S2714 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process moves to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731, making it possible to move to the setting change state.

Also, as described above, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state when the power is restored normally after a power outage, the process proceeds to step S2713 in FIG. 41, and the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of RWM53. Furthermore, the initialization range of the used area of RWM53 includes the number of credits data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and the number of bets data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

Therefore, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is any one of "1" to "3", and the credit number is any one of "1" to "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

In addition, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is any one of "1" to "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is any value between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets will become "0" and the number of credits will also become "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets will become "0" and the number of credits will also become "0".

Also, suppose that the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated). In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization process of a specified memory area of the RWM 53, and after the initialization process is executed, it becomes possible to bet medals without transitioning to a setting change state.

Specifically, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "No", step S2710 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after being turned off is set. Also, since it is a situation where medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.
Also, since it is reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 44 is "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, the setting change state is not entered. After that, through the processes in steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Fig. 46) and the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the setting change disable flag is on, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2714 in FIG. 41 becomes "No", so the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore the initialization process of RWM 53 is not executed.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, and when the power is turned off under these circumstances, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, when the power is turned on, step S2714 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process moves to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and the initialization process of RWM 53 is executed.

In addition, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, in step S2713 of FIG. 41, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state when the power is restored normally after a power outage.

In other words, on the condition that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in possession of the device, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed to the same extent as when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed without transitioning to the setting change state, but within the same scope as when transitioning to the setting change state.

Therefore, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

In addition, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the bet number is one of "1" to "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the bet number becomes "0" and the credit number also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is any value between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

In addition, suppose that the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In other words, suppose that the power is turned on in a situation where both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to transition to a setting change state, and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one where medals can be bet.

41, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), in step S2707 it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on or not, and then in step S2710 it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on or not. That is, first it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on or not, and then it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on or not.
Therefore, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the result in step S2707 is "Yes" and the process does not proceed to step S2710. In other words, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the setting key switch 152 is given priority. Then, when the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 44, the result in step S2741 is "No" and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that it is possible to transition to the setting change state.

Also, assume that when the state is changed to a setting change state, the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is initially displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" is "M".
Thereafter, suppose that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001(H)" becomes "N".

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value display LED 73 is displaying the setting value "N". In this case, since the start switch 41 has not been operated, the changed setting value data has not been saved (stored) in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and the value of "F000(H)" remains "M-1". Furthermore, since the start switch 41 has not been operated and the setting key switch 152 has not been turned off, the setting change state is not terminated (the power is turned off while remaining in the setting change state).

After that, suppose the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are both off. In this case, the power is simply turned on/off, and the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, so the state returns to the same as when the power failure occurred, and the setting change state is restored. Also, since "M-1" is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001(H)" of RWM 53, when the setting change state is restored, the setting value display LED 73 displays the setting value "N".

In contrast, suppose that when the setting change state is entered, the setting value display LED 73 first displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). Then, suppose that the setting change switch 153 is operated, causing the setting value display LED 73 to display the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). Furthermore, suppose that while the setting value display LED 73 displays the setting value "N," the power is turned off without operating the start switch 41. Up to this point, the situation is the same as above. Now suppose that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.

In this case, since step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 is "No" and step S2710 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2731, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Fig. 44, initialization process is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. Therefore, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1".
Also, since it is reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 is "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, the setting change state is not entered. After that, through the processes in steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), and it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 remains "M-1", so the setting value becomes "M".

Also, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either, so that when the power is turned off, the power-off process completed flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved.

Also, since the power is on with the setting key switch 152 off, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 results in "No", and the program proceeds to step S2708. Furthermore, since the power-off process completion flag has not been set and the RWM checksum data has not been saved, step S2708 results in "Yes", and the program proceeds to step S2801 for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
That is, if the power is turned off in an irrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the irrecoverable error state will occur again.

Although the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) is not executed, and the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is not executed.
Also, while the processing by the second program is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either, so if the power is turned off while the processing by the second program is being executed, when the power is turned on thereafter, the power-off processing completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved, so that the result in step S2708 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. In other words, an unrecoverable error state is entered.

In addition, if the power is turned off while the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by a program outside the area of use (second program), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "No", step S2708 becomes "Yes", and the program proceeds to step S2801, so that the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) by the program in the area of use (first program) is executed.

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the program in the used area (first program) is executing an irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "No", step S2708 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, so that the program in the used area (first program) executes an irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP).

Also, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off.
In this case, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S2711, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change at the time of the power interruption recovery abnormality is set. Also, since the power interruption recovery abnormality has occurred, the result in step S2712 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, initialization process is performed for the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM 53, and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)". As a result, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 becomes "0", and the setting value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 becomes "No", the process proceeds to step S2742 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL), and the state changes to the setting change state.
In this setting change state, it is assumed that the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153. In this case, since an interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, a power-down process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
Thereafter, the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since the power recovery is not abnormal, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 is "No". Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2710 is "Yes". Then, the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set.

Also, since the setting change disable flag is off, step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Furthermore, since it is reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 becomes "Yes", and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, the setting change state is not entered. After that, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), and it becomes possible to bet medals. At this time, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is "0" as described above, so the setting value becomes "1".

In this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47. Furthermore, RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed in step S2776 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 49, steps S2785 to S2794 are executed to calculate RWM checksum data (complement data), and the calculated RWM checksum data is stored in address "F2A0(H)" of RWM 53 in step S2795.

As described above, this RWM checksum data is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.

In this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state (an error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped) is entered, the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed as described above. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) in the recoverable error state, the power cutoff process (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
In contrast, if an irrecoverable error occurs and an irrecoverable error state occurs (a state in which the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and game progress stops), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. For this reason, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) during an irrecoverable error state, the power down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, if the power is turned off during an irrecoverable error state, by not executing the power off processing (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on thereafter, in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 41, it is possible to determine in step S2708 that a power off recovery abnormality has occurred, and to proceed to the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, simply turning the power on and off will not result in the unrecoverable error state occurring again.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, the power supply must be turned off and an operation to transition to a setting change state (turning the power supply on with the setting key switch 152 turned on) must be performed before the machine can be returned to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which game play can be progressed).

In addition, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 determines in step S2708 that there is a power outage recovery abnormality and proceeds to unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. Therefore, it does not proceed to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), and it is not possible to return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which game play can proceed).

Furthermore, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state is reached (the error detection flag is turned on and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed. However, if an irrecoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state is reached (the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited.
Furthermore, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) that controls the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73), and ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) that controls the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Because of this, in a recoverable error state, the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in a recoverable error state, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) can display error information on the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4), and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).

In contrast, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) are not executed either.
Therefore, during an unrecoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of FIG.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ("00000000 (B)").
As a result, during the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) will remain at "00000000 (B)", so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed.
Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain off, which is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of management information display LED 74 all remain off.
However, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 in an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, the management information display LED 74 may display "8" in each of digits 6 to 9. That is, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8888."
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a modification of the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG.
In FIG. 58, steps that differ from FIG. 51 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 51 are given the same step numbers.
Below, differences from FIG. 51 will be mainly explained.

In the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 58, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506, where the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 6 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000001(B)” (data in which only the digit 6 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).

Next, proceeding to step S1507, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about 0.1 ms, for example. For example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the wait time has elapsed and proceeds to the next step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off ("00000000(B)") the output of the output ports 6 and 7. This process is for preventing image retention.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1509, where the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LEDs from flickering. This is a process to reliably turn off the LEDs after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 7 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000010(B)” (data in which only the digit 7 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1511 to S1513 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 8 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00000100(B)” (data in which only the digit 8 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1515 to S1517 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, in step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 9 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs “00001000(B)” (data in which only the digit 9 signal is “1”), and output port 7 outputs “01111111(B)” (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are “1”).
Steps S1519 to S1521 are similar to steps S1507 to S1509. After the process of step S1521 is executed, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, during an unrecoverable error state, digits 6 through 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8."
The display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all becoming "8" is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

The display on the management information display LED 74 may be "---" instead of "8888." In other words, only the segments G of the digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Also, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "...." In other words, only the segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Furthermore, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "8.8.8.8." In other words, as shown in Figure 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be lit.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of management information display LED 74 all remain off.
However, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 51, the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 may be maintained rather than being turned off ("00000000(B)"). In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will be as follows:

As mentioned above, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 display "7P.65", digit 9 "5", digit 8 "6", digit 7 "P.", and digit 6 "7" are sequentially lit. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state occurs when digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off and digit 9 is lit and displayed as "5". In this case, the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops when signals (digit signals and segment signals) that turn off digits 6 to 8 and turn on digit 9 to display "5" are being output from output ports 6 and 7.

Specifically, when output port 6 outputs "00001000(B)" (digit 9 signal is "1" and the others are "0") and output port 7 outputs "01101101(B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0"), the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops and thereafter the signals (data) output from output ports 6 and 7 are no longer rewritten.
As a result, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, the output of signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so digits 6 to 8 remain unlit and digit 9 remains lit and displays "5."

Similarly, assume that an unrecoverable error state has occurred when digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 are off.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that cause digit 6 to light up and digits 7 to 9 to be turned off will continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 will light up and digits 7 to 9 will remain turned off.

For example, suppose that unrecoverable error processing 2 is executed by the second program while digit 6 of management information display LED 74 is lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are off. Then, suppose that in unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program, the output of output ports 6 and 7 is maintained without being turned off. In this case, as described above, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that light digit 6 and turn off digits 7 to 9 continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 remains lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 remain off.

When the power is turned off in this state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off. If the power is then turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the OFF state, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the first program executes the unrecoverable error process. In this case, the process does not proceed to the initialization process of step S2731, so the data in RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized. Therefore, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297(H)") is also maintained without being initialized.

Now, suppose that in the irrecoverable error processing by the first program, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not prohibited but is allowed to be executed. In this case, the lighting of the management information display LED 74 is controlled by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR), so that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 first display the ratio information immediately before the irrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed, i.e., "7P.65" (instruction-included role ratio, ratio display number "1").

Also, assume that immediately before the unrecoverable error processing 2 is executed by the second program, "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 for, for example, "2000 ms." In this case, when the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "2000 ms" = "2791.84 ms." After that, the display items from ratio display number "2" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed during the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the display is started (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed.
In contrast, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) is also not executed, and digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.

As described above, for the instructed role ratio, continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative), and role etc. state ratio, when the total number of plays is less than "175,000", the identification segment is displayed flashing. For the continuous role ratio (6,000 times) and role ratio (6,000 times), when the total number of plays is less than "6,000", the identification segment is displayed flashing. For the instructed role ratio, role ratio (cumulative), and role ratio (6,000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. For the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and continuous role ratio (6,000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. For the role etc. state ratio, when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is displayed flashing. When displayed flashing, the light is turned on and off repeatedly every 0.3 seconds.

For this reason, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all be turned off. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state has occurred when digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all turned off, that is, when the outputs from output ports 6 and 7 are "00000000(B)" (off).
In this case, the output from output ports 6 and 7 will remain “00000000 (B)” (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is resumed, so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off.

The display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is specific to an irrecoverable error state, and this notifies the manager (hall attendant) that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, on the condition that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, and the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) and the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on.

However, without being limited to this, the initialization range of RWM 53 may be different when the power is turned on (when transitioning to a setting change state) with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
For example, when the power is turned on under a situation in which the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 may be executed within the same range as at the end of the favorable period.
Specifically, an initialization process is executed for a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 where data relating to advantageous zones is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33), and other ranges (for example, the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" in Figure 33 and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)" in Figure 33, etc.) can be maintained without initialization.
In any case, it is preferable to set the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state.

(4) In the above embodiment, in step S458 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Fig. 47, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811. However, this is not limited to the above.
For example, it may be determined whether the set value is within the normal range immediately after it is determined in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) that the start switch 41 has been turned on (operated).

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned off while in the setting change state, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the state transitions to a state in which medals can be bet, without transitioning to the setting change state.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is turned off while in the setting change state, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the power is turned on in a state in which an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is set, and when a transition is made to a setting change state, the setting change state flag is set in a specified memory area of the RWM 53, and when the termination condition for the setting change state is met, the setting change state flag is cleared.
When the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it is determined in step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Fig. 41 whether the setting change state flag is on. If it is determined that the setting change state flag is on, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, where an unrecoverable error state is entered.
This makes it possible to prevent a set value from being set even though an operation for confirming the set value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, any one of values "0(D)" to "5(D)" is stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. In other words, the setting value data is managed as "0(D)" to "5(D)."
However, without being limited thereto, any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. In other words, the setting value data may be managed as "1(D) to "6(D)."

When transitioning to a setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and when an operation to confirm the setting value is performed (for example, turning on start switch 41), any one of values "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53.
In this case, if the power is turned off while the setting has been changed, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it may be determined in step S458 of FIG. 47 that the setting value is not within the normal range (a setting value error has occurred), and the process may proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, causing an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 , digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 3, segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals) are output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals) are output from output port 7.
When digits 1 to 5 were to be lit, a digit signal was output from output port 3, and a segment 1 signal was output from output port 4. When digits 6 to 9 were to be lit, a digit signal was output from output port 6, and a segment 2 signal was output from output port 7. In other words, different output ports were used for digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output port may be shared between digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a modified example of the output port in the third embodiment.
59, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Also, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) can be output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) can be output from output port 4.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 4 (output port for signals of digits 6 to 9) can be turned off ("00000000 (B)"), thereby keeping all of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals is provided in the usage area of RWM53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for outputting digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals is provided outside the usage area of RWM53. In other words, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently. However, this is not limited to the above.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a modified example of the LED display counter in the third embodiment.
60, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle may be provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals may be output, as well as digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals. In other words, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be combined into one.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 56, the value of LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is obtained and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not a ratio display request has been made. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the value of the LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)." If the AND operation result is "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has been made, and the process proceeds to step S1475. If the AND operation result is not "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has not been made, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Here, if the value of LED display counter 1 is "00001000(B)", "00000100(B)", "00000010(B)", or "00000001(B)", the result of the AND operation will be "0", so it is determined that a ratio display request has been made and the flow proceeds to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000(B)", the AND operation result is not "0", so it is determined that there is no ratio display request and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In this case, the output of output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so the display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode at the time of the previous interrupt process. For example, if digit 6 was lit to display "7" at the time of the previous interrupt process, digit 6 will also be lit to display "7" at the time of the current interrupt process.

If it is determined in step S1472 that there is no request for ratio display, the output of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) may be turned off ("00000000(B)"), and digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all be turned off.

(9) For example, provided that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the initialization range of RWM 53 may be made different when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
Specifically, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, for example, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared).

In contrast, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, the entire range of the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)", and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, the addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)" is initialized (cleared). In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". This allows the setting value to be changed to "1" simply by transitioning to the setting change state.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, or when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, it is possible to transition to the setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, the addresses “F001(H)” to “F1FF(H)” of the used area of RWM 53 and the addresses “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the used area were set as the initialization range of RWM 53 for normal recovery after power failure.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned range, and can be set appropriately according to the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied according to the contents of the action status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030 (H)" can be excluded from the initialization range of RWM53.
In contrast, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the initialization range of RWM53 can include the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of address "F030 (H)".

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Fig. 43. However, this is not limiting, and for example, interrupt processing does not have to be prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing does not need to be prohibited.

Furthermore, even during execution of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 may be executable, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and the preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 may be executable.
This makes it possible to control the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) even while an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed.

(12) In the above embodiment, when an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed, and when it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the control information display LED 74 starts displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

However, without being limited to this, for example, when an operation is performed to transition to a setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then start displaying the indicated game device ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.
This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, making it possible to check whether any segment is faulty or whether any of the segment signal lines are broken.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to transition to a setting change state and a power outage recovery abnormality is determined, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information other than ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then start displaying the instruction-included reel ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned on, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 also turned on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can first display specific information that is different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.".

Then, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) display the on/off state of the various switches when the power is turned on, and information according to whether the power recovery is judged to be normal or abnormal. This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit when the power is turned on, making it possible to check whether any segments are faulty or whether any of the segment signal lines are broken.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch 153 on, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 on, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) display specific information different from the ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", but when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, the management information display LED 74 does not have to display the specific information.

(14) In the above embodiment, an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power recovery is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297(H)" etc.) is initialized.
However, this is not limited to the above, and when an operation is performed to transition to a setting change state and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297(H)" etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose that the power is turned off when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the control information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the role ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, assume that immediately before the power is turned off, the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed for, for example, "1000 ms" on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the role ratio (cumulative) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "1000 ms" = "3791.84 ms". After that, the display items from the ratio display number "6" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, the power recovery is determined to be normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will begin (resume) from the continuation of the ratio information from just before the power was turned off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297(H)" etc.) is initialized.
However, without being limited to this, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power recovery from power outage is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)" etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose that the power is turned off when the consecutive role ratio (6000 plays) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power recovery from power interruption is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the consecutive role ratio (6000 plays) data.

Also, assume that immediately before the power is turned off, the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed for, for example, "3000 ms" on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "3000 ms" = "1791.84 ms". After that, the display items from the ratio display number "3" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the power recovery is determined to be normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will start (resume) from the continuation of the ratio information from just before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, the setting is set to be unchangeable (during play) from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including while the reel 31 is spinning, and during this period the setting unchangeable flag is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a period during which the settings cannot be changed may not be provided, and therefore the settings may be allowed to be changed at all times without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, a determination was made as to whether or not a power outage had occurred in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47. If it was determined that a power outage had occurred, the process proceeded to the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771. If it was determined that a power outage had not occurred, the process skipped the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 and proceeded to step S454.
However, this is not limiting, and for example, when a power outage is detected, the power off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) may not be executed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 47, and an interrupt processing other than the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 may be executed, and the power off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed during this other interrupt processing.
In this case, when a power outage is detected during execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, another interrupt processing is not started during execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), but is started after the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is completed, and power down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this other interrupt processing.

(18) In the above embodiment, a slot machine 10 is given as an example of a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to Parrot, which uses gaming balls as a gaming medium, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines.

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment relates to interrupt processing and an interrupt prohibited period. Note that "interrupt (processing)" is also called "timer interrupt (processing)", but will be simply called "interrupt (processing)" in the following description.
In addition, in the interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, an interrupt inhibition period may be set. As explained in the third embodiment, the interrupt processing includes a maskable interrupt (INT) that can be inhibited and a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) that cannot be inhibited, but the "interrupt" in the fourth embodiment refers to a "maskable interrupt" that can set an interrupt inhibition period. When referring to a "non-maskable interrupt", the word "interrupt" is not abbreviated to "non-maskable interrupt".
The “interrupt disabled period” is also called an “interrupt disabled section” or an “interrupt disabled state.” Similarly, the “interrupt enabled period” is also called an “interrupt enabled section” or an “interrupt enabled state.”
In addition, in the present specification and claims, "when" is used as a general term including any of "before ('before' includes 'immediately before'),""at the same time as ('after' includes 'immediately after')," and "after ('after' includes 'immediately after')." Specifically, for example, "when starting interrupt processing" includes "before (immediately before) starting interrupt processing,""at the same time as starting interrupt processing," and "after (immediately after) starting interrupt processing."

The information processing executed by the gaming machine 10 includes a main processing (FIG. 46) that is executed once for each game, and an interrupt processing (FIG. 66 described later) that is executed by suspending the main processing during execution of the main processing and temporarily escaping the main processing. The interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined cycle. Note that in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the main processing is started after the initialization processing is completed (see FIG. 65), but the processing before the start of a game, such as the program start processing (FIG. 63), power recovery processing (FIG. 64), and initialization processing (FIG. 65), may also be included in the concept of the main processing.

61 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit 500 for executing interrupt processing, etc. The timer circuit 500 is built in the main chip (MPU (main CPU 55)) of a one-chip microprocessor.
The timer circuit 500 includes a PTC 8-bit counter (hereinafter simply referred to as the “8-bit counter”) 501, a PTC prescaler register (also referred to as the “PTC prescaler setting register”, hereinafter simply referred to as the “prescaler register”) 502, a PTC counter setting register (also referred to as the “PTC count value setting register”, hereinafter simply referred to as the “counter setting register”) 503, and a PTC interrupt flag (hereinafter simply referred to as the “interrupt flag”) 504.

The 8-bit counter 501 is a counter consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing. When the power is turned on (the power supply (switch) is turned on), "0" is set to the 8-bit counter 501. The timing at which the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" is, for example, before the program is started or at the same time as the program is started in FIG. 63 described later.

The prescaler register 502 is a built-in register that can set a setting value to select the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set what frequency division of the system clock (SCK) (at what rate) is to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501. For example, when the system clock is "16" MHZ, if "143" is set in the prescaler register 502,
16 (MHZ) / 143 = approximately "111.8881" KHZ
becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter 501 .
The system clock (SCK) is a clock supplied to the main chip (MPU), and is configured to be able to execute various programs (commands) based on the system clock.

The counter setting register 503 is a built-in register capable of setting the count value of the 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is a built-in register capable of setting the number of clocks input from the prescaler register 502 at which an interrupt process is executed. For example, as described above, the clock source of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to about "111.8881" KHZ, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out when the clock of about "111.8881" KHZ is input "125" times.
in this case,
125/111.8881 (KHz) = approx. 1.117 ms
Interrupt processing can be executed at this cycle.
After the value is set in the counter setting register 503, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 starts to be updated (for example, by subtracting "1" or adding "1") based on the clock from the prescaler register 502.
The value of the prescaler register 502 may be stored before the program (instruction) that stores the value of the counter setting register 503 .

After power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0". Then, when, for example, "125" is written to the counter setting register 503, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "0" to "125", and updating of the 8-bit counter 501 starts when the value reaches "125". As described above, "1" is subtracted approximately every "111.8881" KHZ. Then, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated while it is "1", it becomes "125".
Therefore,
"0" (when power is turned on) → "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ...
And repeat.
In other words, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" when the power is turned on, and otherwise does not become "0" but circulates between values "125" and "1".

Furthermore, the time when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (the time immediately before the update or the time when the update occurs) corresponds to the time when the 8-bit counter 501 times out.
The period during which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "125" to "1" is approximately "1.117" ms as described above, which is the interrupt processing period (interrupt period; "Tc" in FIG. 71 described later).

Also, for example, when the value of 8-bit counter 501 is "n" (n = any value between "1" and "125"), the next time the power is turned on after being turned off, 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" as described above.
In this way, 8-bit counter 501 cycles between "125" and "1" while power is on, and never goes to "0" again. It only goes to "0" when it is powered off and then powered on again.
On the other hand, even if the power is turned off when the value of 8-bit counter 501 is any value between "125" and "1," the initial value of 8-bit counter 501 will be "0" when the power is next turned on. In this way, the time from when the power is turned on until the 8-bit counter 501 first times out can be made constant, and the time until the first time out can be made longer compared to when the count value of 8-bit counter 501 is stored when the power is turned off.

On the other hand, a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area for a timer.
A timer for measuring the minimum time of one game, 4.1 seconds;
A timer for determining an error;
These timer values are backed up when the power is turned off, are maintained even while the power is turned off, and return to the value before the power is turned on again.
In this way, the timer value provided in the RWM 53 is configured to be able to maintain the value before the power was turned off, whereas the value of the 8-bit counter 501 always becomes "0" when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, even if the main processing or interrupt processing goes out of control or the processing takes an unexpected amount of time, the 8-bit counter 501 will not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1."
Furthermore, even during interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1".
Furthermore, even during an interrupt disabled period, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can circulate between "125" and "1".

During the main process, at least one interrupt inhibition period is provided, for example, between step S296 and step S300 in Fig. 46. Note that the interrupt inhibition here is for the purpose of inhibiting interrupt processing during the ratio setting process in step S298.
Interrupt processing is prohibited while the ratio set processing is being executed because the ratio set processing is a process that uses a program stored outside the usage area, and if an interrupt processing occurs while a program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing, the program processing within the usage area and the program processing outside the usage area will be mixed (running simultaneously in parallel), complicating the processing.

Although not shown, examples of other interrupt prohibitions include:
a) When transmitting a control command from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, if the control command is written into the control command buffer or the write pointer of the control command is updated, interrupt processing is prohibited before and after these processes,
b) When the blocker signal is turned on (medal acceptance permitted state) and the blocker state is turned on (insertion display LED is lit), interrupt processing is prohibited before and after the above.
c) When the blocker signal is turned off (medal acceptance refusal state) and the blocker state is turned off (insertion display LED is turned off), interrupt processing is prohibited before and after the above.
d) When executing a process for setting the number of times the medal bet signal is output, if interrupt processes are prohibited before and after the process,
e) When executing a process for setting the number of times a medal payout signal is output, interrupt processes are prohibited before and after the process.

The above a) is for preventing malfunctions (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) caused by an interrupt process being executed during the write process of a control command.
The above b) and c) are intended to prevent an inconsistency from occurring when an interrupt occurs between the process of turning the blocker signal on or off and the process of turning the blocker state on or off, resulting in one being on and the other being off, for example, outputting on to the blocker but not outputting on to the on indicator LED (turning it off).
Furthermore, the above d) and e) are intended to prevent an interrupt process from being executed during the setting process of the medal bet signal or medal payout signal, thereby preventing the medal bet signal or medal payout signal from being updated.

The interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The interrupt flag 504 is set (turned on) when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (when the 8-bit counter 501 times out). The timing for canceling (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is arbitrary. For example, the timing for canceling (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is as follows:
a) when executing interrupt processing, or b) when setting predetermined information (hereinafter simply referred to as "information") indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request notification signal (hereinafter simply referred to as an "interrupt request signal") in an interrupt wait monitor register 301 (described later).

The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one of the MPU's built-in registers that can store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set. The interrupt flag 504 is set when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. When the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
In the following, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in a specified bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301" will simply be referred to as "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301."
Then, an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 via the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt process becomes executable. The information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal is cleared when the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request (when the interrupt process is executed).

Here, the "situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is defined as follows:
a) a situation in which an interrupt request exists b) a situation in which a specific flag related to an interrupt request is on ("1") c) a situation in which a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is on ("1") etc.
Similarly, the situation where "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is defined as follows:
a) a situation where there is no interrupt request b) a situation where a specific flag related to an interrupt request is off ("0") c) a situation where a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is off ("0") etc.

When the 8-bit counter 501 times out again while the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, an interrupt request signal based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out again is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is not resaved based on the interrupt request signal (in this case, the interrupt request signal is ignored).

In a state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, interrupt processing is not started during an interrupt inhibition period, but the state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is maintained. Even in this state, the circulation of the 8-bit counter 501 continues without interruption. Then, when about "1.117" ms has passed and the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, if the interrupt inhibition period continues, the state where the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains. Here, regardless of whether the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, processing for setting the interrupt flag 504 may be executed. Alternatively, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, it may be determined whether or not information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may not be executed, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may be executed.
In the following description, it is assumed that when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, processing is executed to set the interrupt flag 504 regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Furthermore, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 when the interrupt disabled period ends, interrupt processing is started and the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. As a result, when interrupt processing is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
Therefore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during the period in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the number of interrupt processes executed based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 after the end of the interrupt inhibition period is limited to "1".
The 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle through the values "m" to "1" even during interrupt processing.

61, the one-chip microprocessor includes an interrupt disable flag 302. The interrupt disable flag 302 in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the IFF1 register.
The IFF1 register is a register for determining whether a maskable interrupt is enabled or disabled, and the IFF2 register is a register for restoring the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, and for restoring the IFF2 register by a RETEX instruction after executing a CALLEX instruction.

When a (maskable) interrupt process is executed, both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "0" to switch from an interrupt enabled state to an interrupt disabled state. When the IFF1 register is "0", this indicates that the interrupts are disabled. Then, when the interrupt process ends, an instruction to enable interrupts (EI instruction) is executed just before the end of the interrupt process to switch from the interrupt disabled state to an interrupt enabled state, and both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "1". When the IFF1 register is "1", this indicates that the interrupts are enabled.

The interrupt disabled period is first set in the main process, for example between step S296 and step S300 in FIG.
Secondly, the interrupt inhibition period is set during the execution of an interrupt process. For example, as shown in Fig. 66, which will be described later, when an interrupt process is executed, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "0". As described above, this is because overlapping interrupts are inhibited in the interrupt process.

In a situation where information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, if the IFF1 register is "1", when an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request signal. In other words, interrupt processing is executed.
On the other hand, when the IFF1 register is "0" and the interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the main CPU 55 does not accept the interrupt request signal when the interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55. In other words, the interrupt process is not executed. In this case, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store the information indicating the interrupt request signal has been generated, and continues to output the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55. Then, when the IFF1 register changes from "0" to "1" (when the interrupt permission period begins), the interrupt process is executed based on the interrupt request signal.
When an interrupt process is executed based on the interrupt request signal, the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. In other words, the output of the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 is stopped.

Next, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register will be explained using a simple program.
62 shows an example of a program for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. In the figure, (A) and (B) show main processing programs, and (C) shows an interrupt processing program.
In Fig. 62A, the "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling interrupts, and the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling interrupts.
Additionally, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary programs (instructions).
When the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value both become "0", and interrupts are disabled.

Thereafter, "AAAA" and "BBBB" of the program are executed, and then when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value both become "1", and an interrupt is permitted.
An example of the program "CCCC" after the "EI" instruction is the "RET" instruction. In this case, an interrupt can be executed after the "RET" instruction is executed (i.e., after "CCCC" is executed). Note that the condition is that at least immediately after the "RET" instruction, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
As described above, even if the interrupt permission instruction "EI" is executed, by not executing the interrupt process until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example, e.g., "RET") is executed, the instruction following the interrupt permission instruction "EI" can be executed reliably.

In FIG. 62(B), the "CALLEX" instruction is an instruction that disables interrupts and executes a call to a specified address, regardless of whether the state is interrupt enabled or disabled at that time.
The "RETEX" instruction is an instruction to set the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction and to return ("RET") (to return to the state before "CALLEX"); in other words, an instruction to execute a return to the next instruction after "CALLEX" (the program at the return address).

Here, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the value of the IFF1 register becomes "0" and the value of the IFF2 register remains unchanged.
Furthermore, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the value of the IFF2 register does not change.
Since the "RETEX" instruction includes the "RET" instruction, it becomes possible to execute an interrupt process immediately after the "RETEX" instruction.
For example, if the IFF1 register value is "1" and the IFF2 register value is "1" immediately before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, then the "CALLEX" instruction causes the IFF1 register value to become "0" and the IFF2 register value to become "1." Also, the "RETEX" instruction causes the IFF1 register value to become "1" and the IFF2 register value to become "1." In this way, by having the IFF2 register, it is possible to restore the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to the values before the "CALLEX" instruction was executed.

In Fig. 62(C), when executing interrupt processing (maskable interrupt (INT)), both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0". This results in an interrupt (multiple interrupts) disabled state. Therefore, the "DI" instruction is not required when starting interrupt processing.
When the interrupt process is to be ended, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the end of the interrupt process, i.e., immediately before the "RETI" instruction. This "EI" instruction sets both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to "1".

When the "RETI" instruction is executed thereafter, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, similar to the "RETEX" instruction, and the value of the IFF2 register does not change.
From the above, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are as follows:
When interrupt processing starts: IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0
↓
“EI” instruction: IFF1=1, IFF2=1
↓
"RETI" command: Changes as follows: IFF1 = IFF2, IFF2 = maintain.
The system is configured so that interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" instruction, thereby preventing overlapping interrupt processing, such as an interrupt processing being executed immediately after the "EI" instruction, and then another interrupt processing being executed after the "RETI" instruction.

The data retention/clearing due to power on/off in the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), and the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is as follows.
An example of the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is a "timer storage area for measuring '4.1' seconds, which is the shortest time for one game". However, the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned "timer storage area for measuring '4.1' seconds, which is the shortest time for one game", and may be a predetermined timer storage area capable of measuring various predetermined times, such as a "storage area for a standby timer for displaying a game standby state". The predetermined timer storage area may be a 1-byte storage area or a multiple-byte storage area.

a) When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are all cleared (become "0"). In contrast, the specified timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared.
For example, assume that the power is turned off under the condition that the value stored in a predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "Y." In this case, if the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the value stored in the timer storage area is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is restored to "0."

b) When the power is turned on to transition to a setting change state due to the setting change conditions being met. In this case, not only the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), but also a specified timer memory area of the RWM 53 are cleared (become "0").
Therefore, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt waiting monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are cleared (become "0") when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is met (whether or not the setting change state is entered).
On the other hand, the specified timer memory area is not cleared (does not become "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state is not entered because the setting change conditions are not met, but is cleared (becomes "0") when the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered because the setting change conditions are met.

As explained in the third embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. When the power is turned on in this state, in FIG. 63 described later, it is determined that the door switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2706) and the setting key switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2707), and other predetermined conditions are satisfied, so that the process proceeds to initialization processing in step S2863 (FIG. 65 described later). Then, in FIG. 65, the process proceeds to setting change confirmation processing (see FIG. 45; also referred to as setting change confirmation mode, setting change confirmation state, setting change confirmation (processing), etc.) in step S2742.
Satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the setting change confirmation process corresponds to the above-mentioned "power-on when transitioning to the setting change state due to the setting change conditions being satisfied."

The above is an example in which the gaming machine is a slot machine 10. In contrast, in the case where the gaming machine is a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), "satisfying the setting change conditions" corresponds to the door switch (frame open switch) signal being on, the setting change key switch signal being on, and the reset switch being on. In a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), when it is determined that all three of these conditions are met, the setting change conditions are met and the machine transitions to a setting change state.
In addition, in a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when the door switch (frame opening switch) signal is on, the setting change key switch signal is on, and the reset switch is off, the setting confirmation condition is met (although the setting change condition is not met), and the machine transitions to the setting confirmation state.

As described above, when the power is turned off, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is not held (when the power is restored, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0"). This makes it possible to keep constant the time until the first interrupt process starts after the power is turned on. Also, since the update period of the 8-bit counter 501 ("8.9375" microseconds) is shorter than the update period of the timer value of the RWM 53 (interrupt process period, "1.117" ms), the effect of clearing the 8-bit counter 501 on the gaming machine as a whole is minor.
For this reason,
a) A configuration in which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off is held, and when the power is turned on, the count of the 8-bit counter 501 is restarted from the value when the power was turned off (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is backed up);
b) The value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored (this embodiment).
In comparison with the above, even with the configuration of b) above, recovery is possible with an error within "1" interrupt. Furthermore, with the configuration of b) above, there is no need for a means for backing up the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off.

Next, the on/off timing of the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF register) will be described with reference to a flowchart.
Fig. 63 is a flow chart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 41 in the third embodiment. In Fig. 63, the same steps as in Fig. 41 are given the same step numbers, and the explanation is omitted. In Fig. 63, step numbers different from Fig. 41 are underlined.
When the program start is executed in step S2701, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0", and the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are "0". Since the IFF1 register is "0", interrupts are disabled until the IFF1 register becomes "1".

In step S2861, the counter setting register 503 is set to an initial value "m".
In the fourth embodiment, as examples of setting the initial value "m" in the counter setting register 503, an example of setting the initial value "m" before the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process and an example of setting the initial value "m" after the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process are shown. Note that the "RWM abnormality determination process" here is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the RWM 53 before the power is turned off, and corresponds to the processes of steps S2708, S2712, and S2715. Step S2861 in FIG. 63 is an example of setting the initial value in the counter setting register 503 before the RWM abnormality determination.
As described above, the initial value "m" is, for example, "125." When the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating the count value, and continues to update the count value until the power is turned off.
In this manner, when the power is turned on and the program is started, interrupts are initially disabled, and if an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating based on that value.

Fig. 64 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) (step S2862 in Fig. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 42 in the third embodiment. In Fig. 64, the same steps as in Fig. 42 are given the same step numbers, and the explanation is omitted. In Fig. 64, step numbers different from Fig. 42 are underlined.
The power recovery process in FIG. 64 shows an example in which the counter setting register 503 is set after an RWM abnormality is determined.
In this example, after step S2724, the process proceeds to step S2871, where the counter setting register 503 is set to an initial value "m".

When an initial value is set in counter setting register 503 in step S2861 in Fig. 63 (when counter setting register 503 is set before RWM abnormality determination), step S2871 in Fig. 64 is not performed. On the other hand, when step S2861 in Fig. 63 is not performed (when counter setting register 503 is set after RWM abnormality determination), if the process does not proceed to initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2863 in Fig. 63, an initial value "m" is set in counter setting register 503 in step S2871 in Fig. 64.
After step S2871, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process (FIG. 66, described later) that was performed immediately before the power was turned off. The power-off process is executed in the interrupt process (step S2771 in FIG. 66), and when the power is turned off, the return address of the interrupt process at that time is stored. After the power restoration process in FIG. 64, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process, and the continuation of the interrupt process is executed. In step S2892 of the interrupt process (FIG. 66), the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1", and the interrupt is permitted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 can be timed out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301) than when the updating of the 8-bit counter 501 is started after an RWM abnormality is determined. This makes it possible to execute the interrupt processing without delay when an interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) is executed after an RWM abnormality is determined.
On the other hand, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating after the RWM abnormality is determined, even if the IFF1 register becomes "1" due to noise or the like before the RWM abnormality is determined, or a malfunction occurs in which the IFF1 register becomes "1" when the power is turned on (a malfunction resulting in an unintended interrupt enabled state), the 8-bit counter 501 does not time out before the RWM abnormality is determined (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301), so interrupt processing is not executed before the RWM abnormality is determined. In other words, it is possible to prevent the RWM data from being changed from before the power was turned off due to interrupt processing before the RWM abnormality is determined. This makes it possible to accurately determine the RWM abnormality.

Fig. 65 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) (step S2863 in Fig. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 44 in the third embodiment. In Fig. 65, the same processes as in Fig. 44 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations are omitted. In Fig. 65, step numbers that differ from Fig. 44 are underlined.
In FIG. 63, if the determination in step S2712 is "Yes", or if the determination in step S2714 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the initialization process in FIG.
In this initialization process, after the AF register is restored in step S2737, the counter setting register is set in step S2881. This process is an example of executing the counter setting register set after the RWM abnormality is determined, and is an example of executing the counter setting register set when the process moves to the initialization process (without moving to the power restoration process).

In step S2740, a setting command set process is executed. This process is a process for storing a control command in the control command buffer in order to send a control command to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change confirmation process (step S2742). As described above, interrupt processes are inhibited before writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the write pointer of the control command, and are permitted after these processes are completed.
Therefore, in step S2740,
(1) DI (IFF1=0, IFF2=0)
(2) The actual setting command set (processing for writing control commands to the control command buffer, updating the write pointer of the control commands, etc.)
(3) EI (IFF1=1, IFF2=1)
Each process (instruction) is executed.
As described above, when the program proceeds from the start of the program (FIG. 63) to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the interrupts are permitted by the "EI" command in the set command set in step S2740. In this way, the state is changed from the interrupts prohibited state to the interrupts permitted state by using the process of executing the interrupts disable command (DI) and interrupts enable command (EI) before and after the process.

The setting command set in step S2746 is a process that sends an end command for the setting change confirmation process to the sub-control board 80, and similar to step S2740, executes the "DI" command and the "EI" command at the beginning and end of the process, respectively.

As described above, when a value is written to the counter setting register 503 after an RWM abnormality determination is made, it is possible to prevent an interrupt process from starting due to a malfunction or the like while the RWM abnormality determination is being made. Note that when an interrupt process is started, the RWM data may be updated.

Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 47 in the third embodiment. In Fig. 66, the same processes as those in Fig. 47 are given the same step numbers, and the explanation is omitted. In Fig. 66, step numbers different from those in Fig. 47 are underlined.
When an interrupt process is started, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "0." This results in an interrupt disabled state (a state in which multiple interrupts are not allowed).
In step S452 in FIG. 47, an initial process including inhibition of duplicated interrupts is executed, but in the fourth embodiment, a register value save process is executed in step S2891.

After the register values are restored in step S469, the "EI" instruction is executed in step S2892, whereby the IFF1 and IFF2 registers become "1" and an interrupt is permitted.
Furthermore, in the final step S2893, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value by a "RETI" command, which is equivalent to a return command. Also, the IFF2 register value is maintained.
As described above, the "EI" instruction in step S2892 sets the interrupt permission state, but the interrupt process is configured to be executable after the "RETI" instruction in the next step S2893.
If the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is completed, the program resumes from the main processing program (return address) before the interrupt processing was executed. On the other hand, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is completed, the interrupt processing is executed again.

Next, the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and the interrupt process will be described with reference to a time chart.
Fig. 67 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Fig. 67 shows an example in which there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main processing.
In Fig. 67, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" when the power is turned on, but the counter value "m" is set by the counter setting register set process described above. In the above example, the counter value "m" is "125". Then, as in the above example, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is decremented by "1" at a clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ (every "8.9375" microseconds).

When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1", it returns to "m". The time when it is updated from "1" to "m"("T1" in the figure) is the "timeout" of the 8-bit counter 501, and when the timeout occurs, the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In the figure, the OFF state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored, and the ON state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored (the same applies to the following Figures 68 to 75).
When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set (interrupt enabled state), interrupt processing is started.
Note that even at the moment when information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, some processing (instruction) is being executed in the main processing, and the interrupt processing starts when the processing (instruction) ends. In other words, the actual processing in the main processing and the interrupt processing do not run simultaneously in parallel. The example in Fig. 67 shows an example in which, after information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", the interrupt processing starts at timing "T2".

Furthermore, when the interrupt process is started, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. This corresponds to "IFF1=0, IFF2=0" shown to the right of step S2890 in Fig. 66. Then, when the interrupt process is ended, the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from the set state. This process corresponds to the process in step S2892 in Fig. 66 (IFF1=1, IFF2=1).
In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is set" refers to at least IFF1 becoming "1" (IFF2 may be "0" or "1"). Also, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from the set state" or "the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set" refers to at least IFF1 becoming "0" (is "0") (IFF2 may be "0" or "1").

Fig. 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Fig. 68 shows an example in which there is an interrupt disabled period in the main processing.
In Fig. 68, timing "T0" which is the start of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction shown in Fig. 62. Also, timing "T3" which is the end of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction shown in Fig. 62. Similarly, in Fig. 69 and onwards, the start of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction, and the end of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction.
The example of Fig. 68 shows an example in which an interrupt inhibition period is set in the main process at timing "T0" which is the timing before "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. Even in this case, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, which is the same as the example of Fig. 67.
On the other hand, at the time "T1", the interrupt disable period is still in progress and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set, so that the interrupt process is not started. However, even after that, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Thereafter, the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T3". As a result, "information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set", so interrupt processing can be executed. In the example of Fig. 67, an example is shown in which interrupt processing is started at timing "T4".
If timing "T3" corresponds to the "EI" instruction and an interrupt process is started at timing "T4" after execution of one more instruction (for example, a "RET" instruction), a time lag of one instruction occurs between timing "T3" and "T4". In contrast, if a "CALLEX" instruction is executed at timing "T0" and a "RETEX" instruction is executed at timing "T3", interrupt process is started immediately after execution of the "RETEX" instruction without executing one more instruction, so no time lag occurs between timing "T3" and "T4".
When the interrupt process is started, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. On the other hand, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set to disable duplicate interrupts.

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing an example (1) of the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing, in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times.
In this example, after the interrupt inhibition period is started at timing "T0", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2". At timing "T2", the interrupt inhibition period has not yet ended. As will be described later in detail, when the interrupt cycle (the timeout cycle of the 8-bit counter 501) is "Tc" and the designed period of the interrupt processing is "Tp", the designed maximum period of the interrupt inhibition period is configured to be less than "Tc-Tp". For this reason, normally, when the interrupt inhibition period is started immediately after the interrupt processing is ended, the next interrupt cycle arrives after the interrupt inhibition period ends.

On the other hand, if the main process goes out of control or if the main process executed during the interrupt disabled period takes longer than necessary, the 8-bit counter 501 may time out two or more times during the interrupt disabled period, as shown in FIG. 69.
Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value, and when it times out, it sets the interrupt flag 504. The example in Fig. 69 shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.
Thereafter, even if the interrupt inhibition period continues, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value if it is normal, and when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, an interrupt flag 504 is set, and if information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal has already been stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, that state is maintained.
Next, at timing "T3", the interrupt disable period ends (enters an interrupt enabled state), and interrupt processing becomes executable. Then, at "T4", interrupt processing starts, and the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Until the 8-bit counter 501 next times out and the interrupt flag 504 is set, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.

As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated only once. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the number of timeouts is not counted. Then, after the interrupt disabled period ends, the number of interrupts executed based on the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is one.
In other words, the interrupt process is not executed repeatedly (successively) "n" times based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out "n" times (n≧2).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main process from being unable to be executed during the interrupt process being repeated several times in succession after the interrupt disabled period ends.
Whenever the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set, and the interrupt flag 504 is released at a predetermined timing thereafter.

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example (2) of the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing, in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times.
In FIG. 70, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", and interrupt processing is started at timing "A1" based on that information. However, for example, an unexpected amount of time may be required for any process during the interrupt processing, or a runaway may occur, and the interrupt processing may not be completed by the time the 8-bit counter 501 next times out (timing "T2").
This example shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out twice (at timings "T2" and "T3") during interrupt processing that begins at timing "A1". When the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2" during interrupt processing, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Furthermore, when the 8-bit counter 501 subsequently times out at timing "T3", the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated that is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 remains stored.

Thereafter, when the interrupt process ends at timing "A2", the next interrupt process is immediately executed because the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at that time. In other words, the interrupt processes are executed continuously without executing the main process. Furthermore, when the interrupt process is executed, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared (timing "T4").
Next, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T5", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Meanwhile, the interrupt processing started at timing "A2" is completed before timing "T5". As a result, the next interrupt processing is started based on the fact that the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T5".
As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing is executed only once after the interrupt processing is completed, based on the fact that information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing is not executed multiple times in succession after the interrupt processing is completed. In addition, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the execution of interrupt processing, the number of times the timeout occurs is not counted.

Next, the execution timing of the interrupt process will be described.
71 to 75 described below show interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 (however, in the example of FIG. 74, interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 3), but interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 are all the same processing (the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66). To explain more specifically, for example, in the example of FIG. 71, this means that after interrupt processing 1 (the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66) is started, interrupt processing 2 (the same processing as interrupt processing 1) is started after "Tc" has elapsed.
FIG. 71 is a time chart showing the interrupt period etc. when there is no interrupt inhibition period in the main processing.
As described above, when the system clock is set to 16 MHZ, the value of prescaler register 502 is set to 143, and the value of counter setting register 503 is set to 125, the interrupt period "Tc" is the period until the value of 8-bit counter 501 changes from "125" to "125" again, and corresponds to approximately 1.117 ms.

As shown in Fig. 71, if there is no interrupt inhibition period during the period in which interrupt processing is executed four times, the interrupt processing is executed for each interrupt cycle "Tc". In the example of Fig. 71, an example is shown in which interrupt processing is started at the timings of "A1", "A2", "A3", and "A4". The time "Tp" required for one interrupt processing differs depending on the contents of the interrupt processing, but the design value of the interrupt processing time "Tp" is at least a time shorter than the interrupt cycle "Tc"(Tp<Tc).
Also, similarly to the above example, during the interrupt processing, interrupts are disabled and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

As is clear from FIG. 71, whatever the value of the 8-bit counter 501 may be, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 will not return to "m" when an interrupt process is executed, and the value continues to be updated at regular intervals even during the interrupt process.
In addition, in Fig. 71, the period (time) of each interrupt process is illustrated as being constant (Tp), but in reality, the period of the interrupt process is not necessarily constant. For example, the current interrupt process may take longer than the previous interrupt process.

FIG. 72 shows an example in which an interrupt inhibition period in the main process is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2. In this example, interrupt processing 1 is started at timing "A1", and after interrupt processing 1 ends at timing "A1'", the interrupt inhibition period in the main process starts at timing "T1", and ends at timing "T2" (the interrupt is permitted). Here, timing "T2" is before the start timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2. As is clear from FIG. 72, if the interrupt inhibition period is "Td", then "Td<Tc-Tp". In this way, when the interrupt inhibition period is within the period from the end of an interrupt processing to the start of the next interrupt processing, even if an interrupt inhibition period is set, the timing of the interrupt processing is not limited by the interrupt inhibition period. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 72, even if an interrupt inhibition period is set after the end of interrupt processing 1 and before the start of interrupt processing 2, interrupt processing 2 can be started when the interrupt period "Tc" arrives after the start of interrupt processing 1.
In particular, in the case where the interrupt inhibition period "Td" that satisfies "Td<Tc-Tp" is the designed maximum period of the interrupt inhibition period, when the interrupt processing ends and the process returns to the main processing, and an interrupt inhibition period is immediately set in the main processing, it is possible to set the start timing of the next interrupt processing to arrive after the end of the interrupt inhibition period.

FIG. 73 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period.
In this example, an interrupt inhibition period of the main process is set at a timing "T1" before the timing "A2" of the next interrupt process arrives after the end of interrupt process 1. The timing "A2" is after the elapse of an interrupt period "Tc" from the start timing "A1" of interrupt process 1.
During the interrupt inhibition period, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set. Therefore, when the timing "A2" arrives, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set and interrupt processing cannot be started. In the figure, the two-dot chain line indicates interrupt processing assuming that interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A2" (it is not actually started).
On the other hand, immediately before the timing "A2" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and therefore the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

After that, when the interrupt inhibition period ends at timing "T2", the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is released from being set. Also, at timing "T2", the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. As a result, at timing "T2", the interrupt is permitted, and the second interrupt processing 2 is started. Figure 73 shows an example where interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A5". When interrupt processing 2 is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Also, when interrupt processing 2 is executed, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set.

Next, at the time "A5'" when the interrupt process 2 ends, the time "A3" when the third interrupt process 3 starts has not yet arrived. Therefore, the interrupt process 3 can be started when the time "A3" arrives.
As described above, interrupt processing 2 cannot be executed at timing "A2", but interrupt processing 2 can be executed at the subsequent timing "A5", and interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A3", so the number of interrupt processing times at this point is the same as when there is no interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, since the interrupt cycle "Tc" is constant regardless of the presence or absence of an interrupt inhibition period, it is possible to prevent the interrupt cycle "Tc" from being disrupted. Furthermore, even if an interrupt cannot be processed due to an interrupt inhibition period, this does not affect the update of the 8-bit counter 501.
Furthermore, when the interrupt inhibition period ends and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, even if the interrupt process is executed without waiting for the next interrupt period, this does not affect the update of the 8-bit counter 501.

FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period.
In this example, after interrupt processing 1 ends, the interrupt inhibition period of the main processing starts at timing "T1" before timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2 arrives. As a result, the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set.
Therefore, at timing "A2", although the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt disable flag 302 is also set, so that the interrupt process cannot be executed.

When the interrupt period "Tc" has elapsed from timing "A2" and timing "A3" has arrived, the interrupt inhibition period is still ongoing. Therefore, at timing "A3", the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, but the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is also set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed. Note that at timing "A3", the 8-bit counter 501 times out, but there is no change in the situation in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
After timing "A3", when the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T2", the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. At this point, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Thereafter, at timing "A6", interrupt processing 2 is started. When interrupt processing 2 is started, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

In this example, the timing "A6'" when interrupt processing 2 ends is before timing "A4", i.e., the point when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1". Therefore, after interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This causes interrupt processing 3 to start at the following timing "A4". When interrupt processing 3 starts, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated that is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

In this way, interrupt processing cannot be executed when "Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1" (timing "A2"), and when "Tc" has further elapsed since that point (timing "A3"), but interrupt processing 2 is executed immediately after the interrupt inhibition period ends at timing "T2". Then, interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A4" when there is no interrupt inhibition period and interrupt processing 4 would normally be executed. As a result, interrupt processing can be executed three times between timing "A1" and timing "A4", which is only one less than the number of interrupt processing times (four times) when there is no interrupt inhibition period.
Furthermore, at timing A4, the interrupt cycle Tc from timing A1 is not disrupted. Furthermore, the update state of the 8-bit counter 501 is also not disrupted and is constant.

FIG. 75 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period.
In this example, after interrupt processing 1 ends, the interrupt inhibition period starts at timing "T1" before the timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing arrives, and ends at timing "T2". In other words, during the interrupt inhibition period, timing "A2" arrives, when interrupt processing 2 would normally be executed. At timing "A2", the interrupt inhibition flag 302 is set, so the interrupt processing cannot be executed.
However, since the 8-bit counter 501 times out immediately before the timing "A2" arrives, at the timing "A2" the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Next, at time "T2" when the interrupt disable period ends, the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, at the following time "A7", interrupt processing 2 is started.

Meanwhile, during the execution of interrupt processing 2, timing "T3" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. However, since interrupt processing 2 is being executed at this point in time, overlapping interrupts are not possible. In other words, interrupt processing 3 cannot be executed at timing "A3", which is the timing when interrupt processing 3 would normally be executed.
When interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A8", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is released from being set. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 starts immediately at timing "A8". In other words, no program (instruction) in the main processing is executed between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3, and interrupt processing 3 starts immediately after interrupt processing 2 ends.
However, when interrupt processing 2 ends, the IFF1 register becomes "1" by the "EI" instruction in step S2892 in Fig. 66, and the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. Next, when the "RETI" instruction is executed in step S2893, the interrupt processing in step S2890 is started again, and when this interrupt processing starts, the IFF1 register becomes "0", and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. Therefore, the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released for just a moment between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3.
When the interrupt process 3 is started, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
When interrupt processing 3 ends, timing "A4" (when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1"), which is the start timing of interrupt processing 4, has not yet arrived.

After interrupt processing 3 is completed, the 8-bit counter 501 times out and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. At this point, the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set, so the interrupt processing can be executed. Therefore, interrupt processing 4 is started at timing "A4". When interrupt processing 4 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated and stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
In this way, when "3 x Tc" has elapsed from timing "A1", four interrupt processes can be started, and the same number of interrupt processes can be executed as if there was no interrupt inhibition period of the main process.

In this way, if the timing to start interrupt processing is during an interrupt inhibition period, the next interrupt processing is started immediately after the end of the interrupt inhibition period. Furthermore, if an interrupt period arrives while the next interrupt processing is being executed, the next interrupt processing is started immediately after the end of the next interrupt processing. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the number of interrupts, while quickly returning to a situation where interrupt processing is started when the original interrupt period arrives.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and various modifications can be made as follows.
(1) In the fourth embodiment, when the system clock is "16" MHZ, in order to set the interrupt period to about "1" ms, the set value of the prescaler register 502 is "143" and the value of the counter setting register 503 is "125". Therefore, the set values of the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 vary depending on the setting of the interrupt period, and are not limited to the above values. Note that the system clock is not limited to "16" MHZ, and can be set to various values, such as "12" MHZ, "24" MHZ, etc.
For example, if the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to "250" under the above conditions, the interrupt period is set as follows:
250/(16/143)=2.234(ms)
It can be said that:
In this case, even if the value of the counter setting register 503 is "250", the value can be within one byte.
On the other hand, the counter setting register 503 may be, for example, a 2-byte storage area instead of a 1-byte storage area. When the counter setting register 503 is a 2-byte storage area, the 8-bit counter 501 may be a 16-bit counter 501.

(2) In Figs. 63, 64, and 65, the counter setting register is set before and after an RWM abnormality is determined, but the timing of the counter setting register is not limited to those shown in Figs. 63, 64, and 65. It is sufficient to execute the counter setting register set process by the timing at which you want to start the interrupt process.

(3) When moving to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the process of setting the IFF1 register to "1" (processing to enable interrupts) uses the set command set in step S2740, but is not limited to this and may be, for example, by executing the "EI" command after step S2747. In this way, even if each process during the initialization process is composed only of processes that do not have the "DI" and "EI" commands, as in steps S2740 and S2746, it is possible to enable interrupts.
(4) The fourth embodiment can be applied not only to slot machines, but also to pinball machines (pachinko machines), mahjong ball machines, casino machines, and the like.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment relates to displaying an error history.
76 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between the rotation of the reels 31 and the detection (occurrence) and notification of an error. In this embodiment, "reels are rotating" refers to a situation in which at least one reel 31 is rotating. Also, "reels have stopped" refers to a situation in which all reels 31 have stopped.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error occurs, the error is detected with almost no time lag. In other words, in this embodiment, the time when an error occurs and the time when an error is detected are almost the same.

Furthermore, the "error" in this embodiment corresponds to the "recoverable error" in the other embodiments described above.
76 shows an example in which an error is detected during rotation of the reel 31. The types of errors in this case include, for example, a selector error (such as an error in the passage sensor 46 due to medal retention or an error in the input sensor 44) and a hopper error (such as an error in the payout sensor 37 due to an abnormal payout).

While the reels 31 are spinning, medals are not accepted, and even if medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, they are returned by the blocker 45. However, if fraudulent behavior (cheating) is performed while the reels 31 are spinning, there is a possibility that a selector error will be detected. Also, while the reels 31 are spinning, the hopper 35 is not driven and medals are not paid out, but there is a possibility that fraudulent behavior (cheating) will cause the hopper 35 to be driven, resulting in the payment of medals.
In this manner, there are cases where an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating.

When the main control board 50 detects an error (time t0), it turns on the corresponding bit (the bit corresponding to the detected error) of the abnormal input flag provided in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. The main control board 50 also transmits the fact that an error has been detected (an error command) to the sub-control board 80, and the transmission timing in this embodiment is when the error is notified ("t1" in FIG. 76). However, this is not limited to the above, and an error command may be transmitted when an error is detected, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 76.
The main control board 50 judges whether an error has been detected in the interrupt process. Specifically, it judges whether the bit of the abnormal input flag is on. This judgment is executed, for example, by step S463 (input error check process) in the interrupt process shown in FIG.

Also, when an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80, this is done, for example, by the control command sending process of step S464 in the interrupt process of FIG.
In the case where an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 immediately upon detection of an error, the command may be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after the abnormal input flag bit is turned on. Alternatively, in the case where an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 after all the reels 31 have stopped (at the timing of reporting an error), the command may be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after all the reels 31 have stopped.

When all the reels 31 have stopped and an error command has been received, the sub-control board 80 notifies of an error using the performance lamps 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. When an error command is sent at the timing of time t1 in Fig. 76, the sub-control board 80 notifies of an error after all the reels 31 have stopped. In other words, an error is not notified while the reels 31 are spinning.
In addition, the main control board 50 also notifies the user of an error if an error occurs when all reels 31 are stopped. For example, the winning number display LED 78 may display "En" (where "n" is an integer and indicates the type of error).

Then, when the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 (see the third embodiment, not shown in FIG. 1) is operated, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 end the error notification. In other words, when the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated, the state before the error was detected is restored, provided that no error is detected. Therefore, even if the cause of the error is removed, the state before the error is not restored unless the reset switch 153 is operated. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated and no error is detected, the bit of the abnormal input flag stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is turned off.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores an error history (data) in a specified storage area of the RWM 83, and displays the error history when requested. The error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on and off or by changing settings. The error history is not erased unless a serious error (an unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM of the sub-control board 80.

FIG. 77 shows examples of error history including the process of FIG. 76 (Example 1) displayed on the image display device 23, and two examples are shown as (A) and (B).
In the fifth embodiment, power off, power on, door open, and door close are not errors themselves, but are displayed together with the error history.
Also, when the state transitions to a setting confirmation state or a setting change state, the error is not displayed on the error history screen, but is displayed on a setting change history screen (not shown) that is separate from the error history screen.
Furthermore, although the history of detected errors is displayed, the recovery from the error is not displayed on the error history screen. However, this is not limiting, and the recovery from the error may also be displayed on the error history screen.

The error history can be displayed, for example, in the setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation process in this embodiment is the same as the setting change confirmation process shown in FIG. 45 (third embodiment). Specifically, as described in the third embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a situation where the number of bets is "0" during game standby (before the game starts), "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755 in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 stores the D register value in the A register and judges whether the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", the main control board 50 judges that it is time for setting confirmation and proceeds to step S2760. After judging whether the A register value is "1", it stores the C register value in the A register. As described in the third embodiment, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes the setting value data.

In this way, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets waiting to be played is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the administrator of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the image display device 23. In this menu, an "Error History" item is provided, and when "Error History" is selected with the directional pad and a confirmation operation is performed (in this case, the push button is turned on), an error history screen such as that shown in FIG. 77 is displayed.

For example, in Fig. 77(A), the time of the ○× error with error number "003", "January 29, 2021, 13:27:45", corresponds to time t1 in Fig. 76. In other words, if the error is notified at time t1 three minutes after the time the error was detected (time t0 in the figure), the error was actually detected three minutes before the time of the ○× error displayed on the error history screen.
However, as described above, by displaying the start date and time of the error notification as the time of the error, even if an error is detected while the reel 31 is spinning and some time passes between the time the error is detected and the time it is notified, there will be no discrepancy between the timing at which the error is notified and the displayed error time, so the administrator will not recognize that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine 10 or that fraud may have occurred.
As described above, when the time of recovery from an error is displayed in the error history, "○× Error recovery" is displayed between the error numbers "001" and "002" in the figure together with the time.

77(A) shows the date and time when the sub-control board 80 started notifying the error as the error time. The sub-control board 80 stores the error content and the time in association with each other. The information on the time is obtained, for example, by using an RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the sub-control board 80.
On the other hand, Fig. 77(B) is an example in which the time is displayed as the elapsed date and time from the current time. In this way, the actual time may be displayed as shown in Fig. 77(A), or the elapsed date from the current time may be displayed as shown in Fig. 77(B).
Also, while "time" is displayed in the example of FIG. 77, it may be displayed as "alert time", "occurrence time", "detection time", etc.
However, even when the "time of occurrence" or "time of detection" is displayed, the actual time when the error occurred or was detected is not displayed; it is actually the time when the error notification began.

76, if an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the detected error cannot be notified immediately because the reel 31 is still rotating, and so the error is notified after the reel 31 has stopped. If an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the error is not notified while the reel 31 is rotating because the progression of the game (stopping the reel 31 while it is rotating) takes priority over notifying the error.
On the other hand, when an error is detected when the reels 31 are not rotating (for example, during game standby after all reels 31 have stopped), an error command is immediately sent to the sub-control board 80, and the error is notified by the sub-control board 80 (corresponding to the first error in FIG. 82 described later). Therefore, in this case, the time displayed in the error history will be the same as the time when the error was detected.

Example 2 of Figure 78 is a time chart showing a case where the settings are changed after an error is detected during rotation of the reel 31.
In the third embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a setting change unacceptable flag. When the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start to rotate), the setting change unacceptable flag is turned on, and when all the reels 31 stop, the setting change unacceptable flag is turned off. In this case, when the setting change unacceptable flag is on, it is not possible to transition to the setting change state. When the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating, the setting change unacceptable flag is stored as being on, and even if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the setting change state is not transitioned to (because the setting change unacceptable flag is turned on when the game starts up).
In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the setting change disable flag in the third embodiment is not provided. Therefore, when the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating, and then turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, it is possible to transition to the setting change state.

If an error is detected while the reel 31 is spinning, a "1" is stored in the corresponding bit of the abnormal input flag provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50, as described above.
Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, the power supply to the motor 32 that drives the reel 31 is cut off, and then the reel 31 stops rotating. Next, if the front door is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, as shown in Figures 41 and 44, the process moves to the setting change confirmation process (Figure 45) via the initialization process (Figure 44).

When the initialization process (Figure 44) is executed, the abnormal input flag is also initialized in the memory area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 ("RWM clear when setting changed" in Figure 78). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, the data of the error detected before the setting change process is erased. For this reason, when the gaming machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, the error detected before transitioning to the setting change state (the error based on the data stored in the abnormal input flag) is not notified.

As described above, as in Example 2 of Figure 78, when an error is detected while the reel 31 is spinning and then the setting change state is entered, if an error is detected while the reel 31 is spinning and before the transition to the setting change state is made, the error detection data is erased by the RWM clear process in the setting change state, and therefore the error will not be notified after the setting change process state ends.
In addition, in this example 2, by passing through the setting change state, the data of the error detected before moving to the setting change state is erased, so that no error command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 after the setting change state ends. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the first interrupt process is after step S2740 as shown in FIG. 44. In this case, since the initialization process has already been executed in step S2732, the error command stored before the power cut is erased at the time the first interrupt process is executed. Therefore, even if the process moves to the interrupt process (FIG. 47) and the control command transmission process of step S464 in FIG. 47 is executed, no error command is sent to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, the error is not stored as error history in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, nor is it displayed.

Fig. 79 is a diagram showing the error history screen of Fig. 78 (example 2). In Fig. 79, the power-off of error number "004" corresponds to time t3 in Fig. 78. Also, the power-on of error number "003" corresponds to time t4 in Fig. 78.
In this example, the power is turned off, the door is opened, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on, so that the door opening is detected at the same time as the power is turned on. Then, a setting change process is performed between error numbers "001" and "002", and then the door is closed. As mentioned above, the setting change process is not displayed on the error history screen.

As described above, the data of any errors detected before the transition to the setting change state (before the power is turned off) is erased, so the error is not notified even after the setting change state ends, and is not displayed in the error history.
Therefore, since errors that have not been notified are not displayed as error history, it is possible to ensure consistency between notified errors and errors displayed as history, and to prevent misunderstandings by the administrator. In other words, errors that have not been notified will not be displayed as error history.

FIG. 80 is a time chart showing a case (example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during the setting confirmation state.
In FIG. 80, the transition from the game waiting state to the setting confirmation state is the same as described above.
In this example, during the setting confirmation state, first, a first error is detected, and then a second error is detected. As the first and second errors, similar to the above, there are selector errors (errors related to the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44) and hopper errors (errors related to the payout sensor 37), etc.
When a first error and a second error are detected during the setting confirmation state, at the time the errors are detected, the main control board 50 stores information regarding the type of the detected error in the memory area of the RWM 53 in the same manner as described above.
In the setting confirmation state, as with the rotation of the reels 31, even if an error is detected, the error is not notified, and the error is notified after the setting confirmation state ends. This is because the control process of the setting confirmation state takes priority over the notification of an error.

When the main control board 50 ends the setting confirmation state, it first transmits an error command based on the detection of the second error to the sub-control board 80 (timing of time t5 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 notifies the second error based on receiving the error command. In other words, when errors are detected in the setting confirmation state in the order of the first error and the second error, after the setting confirmation state ends, the errors are notified in the order of the second error and the first error (the order of the errors detected is reversed). When the sub-control board 80 receives a command for the second error from the main control board 50, it stores the contents of the second error as an error history in a specified storage area of the RWM 83, linking it to the notification start date and time.
The sub-control board 80 continues to notify the second error until the cause of the second error is removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the second error has been removed, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it ends the notification of the second error.

Furthermore, when the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 then transmits an error command based on the detection of the first error to the sub-control board 80 (time t6 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 notifies the first error based on receiving the error command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command for the first error from the main control board 50, it stores the contents of the first error as an error history in a specified storage area of the RWM 83, linking it to the notification start date and time.
The notification of the first error continues until the cause of the first error is removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the first error has been removed, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it ends the notification of the first error.
As in example 1 of Figure 76, when a first error is detected, a command for a first error may be sent to the sub-control board 80 (dotted line in the figure), and when a second error is detected, a command for a second error may be sent to the sub-control board 80 (dotted line in the figure).

Here, in Example 3 of FIG. 80, it is assumed that the notification priorities of the first error and the second error are the same (there is no difference in notification priority).
In contrast, there are cases where a priority is set for the notification of errors. For example, if the notification priority of a first error is higher than that of a second error, the first error will be notified first after the setting confirmation state ends, and the second error will be notified when the cause of the first error is removed.
In this case, the error history will display the first error first, followed by the second error, in the order in which the errors were reported.

Fig. 81 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 3 of Fig. 80. In this example, after the door is opened with error number "004", the setting confirmation state is entered, and when this setting confirmation state ends, a second error with error number "003" is detected. Note that the "setting confirmation state" may or may not be displayed in the error history.
Then, when the cause of the second error is removed, the first error is notified. The first error is displayed in the error history with error number "002" (time t6 in FIG. 80). In this way, the error history also lists the second error first, which matches the order of the errors that were notified. This eliminates the difference between the order in which the errors are notified and the order in which the history is displayed, and prevents the administrator from being confused.
As described above, in this embodiment, if multiple errors occur under conditions in which it is not possible to notify errors, when the situation becomes such that it is possible to notify errors, the errors detected most recently will be notified in order.

Figure 82 is a time chart showing a case (example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game begins)).
During game standby, the reels 31 are not rotating and the setting confirmation state is not in progress, so if an error is detected, the detected error can be reported immediately.
First, when the main control board 50 detects a first error during game standby, it transmits a first error command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the first error command, the sub-control board 80 starts notifying the first error (time t7 in the figure). The received information on the first error is stored in the error history in association with information on the notification start time.
If a second error is detected after a first error is detected and before the cause of the first error is removed (during the notification of the first error), as described below, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the second error to the sub-control board 80 at the timing when notification of the second error becomes possible (time t8 in the figure) as in the above example. However, this is not limited to the above, and a command for the second error may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time when the second error is detected (two-dot chain line in the figure).

When the cause of the first error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the information to the effect that the cause of the first error has been removed, it ends the notification of the first error.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects that the cause of the first error has been removed, it transmits a command for the second error to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the command for the second error, the sub-control board 80 starts notifying the second error (time t8 in the figure). The received information on the second error is stored in the error history in association with information on the notification start time.
When the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the information to the effect that the cause of the second error has been removed, it ends the notification of the second error.
In this manner, when the first error and then the second error are detected during game standby, the first error and then the second error are notified in this order, unlike during the setting confirmation state. This is because when the first error is detected, there is no need to hold off on notifying the first error, and notification of the first error can be started immediately.

Fig. 83 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 4 of Fig. 82. In this Example 4, when a first error is notified, the history of the first error is displayed with error number "004". The time of the first error with error number "004" corresponds to time t7 in Fig. 82. Furthermore, when the cause of the first error is removed, a second error is then notified, and the second error is displayed with error number "002". The time of the second error with error number "002" corresponds to time t8 in Fig. 82.
Therefore, the notification order of the first error and the second error coincides with the error history order.

Although not illustrated in this embodiment, if errors are detected consecutively, the following processing is carried out.
For example, when a medal retention error (an error in the insertion sensor 44) of the selector is detected during game standby, a medal retention error command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In response, the sub-control board 80 notifies the user of the medal retention error.
Next, suppose that after the administrator removes the medal retention error, but before operating the reset switch 153, a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, causing a medal retention error to occur again. In this case, the main control board 50 does not resend the medal retention error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the administrator removes the medal retention error again and operates the reset switch 153, it is determined whether or not the cause of the error has been removed, and if it is determined that the cause of the error has been removed, information to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this information, it ends the medal retention error notification.

In this way, for example, even if two medal retention errors are detected on the main control board 50 side, before the reset switch 153 is operated, a medal retention error command will be sent only once to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the error history by the sub-control board 80 will show only one medal retention error.
Although the above example was given of a medal retention error, the same applies to other errors that can be resolved by operating the reset switch 153 after the cause of the error has been removed.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment relates to the structures of a main control board 50, a socket (also called a “chip socket”) 56, and a main chip 55.
In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described later, "mounting" refers to soldering various electronic components (CPU, ROM, RAM, resistors, connectors, seven-segment displays, etc.) to the main control board 50 or other boards (printed wiring boards) or mounting them in sockets, thereby causing them to function (operate) as electronic circuits.
In addition, the "main chip 55" in this embodiment refers to a one-chip microprocessor that has a main CPU 55 and built-in memory, and further has a ROM 54 and RWM 53 within the built-in memory, as described in Figure 32 (third embodiment).

FIG. 84 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50, the socket 56, and the main chip 55 not yet mounted in the socket 56 in the sixth embodiment.
The socket 56 is provided with the main chip 55 and serves to electrically connect the main chip 55 to the main control board 50. The socket 56 is mounted at a predetermined position on the main control board 50. As will be described in detail later, the socket 56 is made of a transparent resin material (it may be semi-transparent as long as the internal cavity 56a is visible). A pin insertion port 56c into which the pins 55a (terminals) of the main chip 55 are inserted is formed on the top surface of the socket 56.
In addition, in Figure 84, the resistor 50a is also shown on the main control board 50 in order to compare the height of the resistor 50a with the height of the notch 56e of the socket 56. This will be described in detail later.

Fig. 85 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing in more detail the main chip 55 mounted in the socket 56. Fig. 86 is a view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in Fig. 85. Fig. 87 is a view (side view) seen from the Z2 direction in Fig. 85.
In FIG. 85, the "upper side of the drawing" and the "lower side of the drawing" are defined as shown.
In this example, the main chip 55 has 71 pins 55a. Here, "pin 55a(1)" refers to the first pin 55a, "pin 55a(2)" refers to the second pin 55a, ..., and "pin 55a(71)" refers to the 71st pin 55a.

The main chip 55 has recesses 55b cut out in a substantially arc shape at approximately the center of the upper and lower edges in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure).
Of the 71 pins 55a, the first pin 55a (1) to the 35th pin 55a (35) are provided on the lower longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, except for the portion where the recess 55b is formed. Similarly, the 36th pin 55a (36) to the 71st pin 55a (71) are provided on the upper longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, except for the portion where the recess 55b is formed.
Of the first to seventy-first pins 55a, the seventeenth (pin 55a(17)), the thirty-fifth (pin 55a(35)), the fifty-fourth (pin 55a(54)), and the seventy-first (pin 55a(71)) are GND (ground) lines. The pins other than these four are signal lines.

Here, the 35th pin 55a (35) is located at the right end of the lower edge of the main chip 55, and the 71st pin 55a (71) is located at the left end of the upper edge of the main chip 55. In addition, the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), which are GND lines, are located adjacent to the recessed portion 55b.
When an operator grasps main chip 55, first, the operator holds the vicinity of the 35th pin 55a (35) and the 71st pin 55a (71) (holding diagonally opposite corners of main chip 55), thereby being able to hold the vicinity of the GND line, and therefore the number of signal lines that are touched by the operator's fingers can be reduced.

Secondly, it is possible to hold the main chip 55 by gripping the vicinity of the recessed portions 55b on the lower and upper edges of the main chip 55. The recessed portions 55b make it easier to hold the main chip 55. Furthermore, when gripping the recessed portions 55b, by holding the vicinity of the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), it is possible to hold the vicinity of the GND line in the same manner as above, thereby reducing the number of signal lines that the operator's fingers touch.

In addition, a two-dimensional code 55e is printed in the left region on the top surface of the main chip 55. In addition, a model number sticker 55f showing the model number of the gaming machine 10 is attached to the right region. The region where the two-dimensional code 55e is printed and the region where the model number sticker 55f is attached are flat surfaces (surfaces without steps). In particular, displaying the two-dimensional code 55e on a flat surface makes it easier to read the two-dimensional code. Also, providing the model number sticker 55f on a flat surface makes it easier to read the information displayed on the model number sticker 55f. Furthermore, attaching the model number sticker 55f to a flat surface makes it less likely to peel off.
Furthermore, a substantially semicircular step 55c is formed on the left edge of the main chip 55. This step 55c as well as steps 55d and 55i described below are all recessed from the surface.
The step portion 55c is formed in a substantially semicircular recessed area.
Further, a step portion 55d is formed in the vicinity of the step portion 55c and at a position closer to the pin 55a(1). The step portion 55d is formed by recessing an area formed in a substantially circular shape, and the number "1" is displayed within the substantially circular area. The portion of the number "1" may be recessed further than the substantially circular area, or conversely, may be formed in a convex shape from the substantially circular area (however, it does not protrude above the surface of the main chip 55). Furthermore, although the number "1" is shown in this example, other numbers, symbols, etc. may be used.

On the top surface of the main chip 55, a product name 55g (in bold characters in the figure) and a company name 55h (in dotted characters in the figure) are displayed between the two-dimensional code 55e and the model number sticker 55f. The product name 55g is printed. The company name 55h has a step portion 55i.
88A is an enlarged view of the product name 55g and the company name 55h, and FIG. 88B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Z3-Z3 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 88, an area corresponding to the thickness of the lines of the company name 55h is recessed from the surface to form a step portion 55i.
FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the above-mentioned step portion 55c (semicircular portion), step portion 55d (circular portion with the number "1" written inside), and step portion 55i.
When the depth of step portion 55c is D1, the depth of step portion 55d is D2, and the depth of step portion 55i is D3, the magnitude relationship between them is "D1>D2>D3." In this way, by making the depths of the three step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i different, counterfeiting is made difficult.
Furthermore, since the depths of the steps 55c, 55d, and 55i are different, the operator can grasp the mounting orientation by feeling the top surface of the main chip 55 with his/her hand.

88(A), the product name 55g is arranged so that at least a part of it overlaps with the company name 55h. In this example, the product names "B" and "C" overlap with the company name "A", the product names "D", "E", and "F" overlap with the company name "B", and the product name "G" overlaps with the company name "C".
In other words, the letters "BCDEFG" of the product name "ABCDEFG" are arranged so as to overlap the step portion 55i. By displaying the product name 55g in this manner, counterfeiting is made difficult.
For example, if an attempt is made to form the company name 55h by having the stepped portion 55i after the product name 55g is printed, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps with the stepped portion 55i may be erased.
On the other hand, when attempting to print the product name 55g after forming the company name 55h having the stepped portion 55i, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps the stepped portion 55i may not be printed neatly.

Furthermore, hidden characters 55j are displayed within the characters of the product name 55g. The size of each character of the hidden characters 55j is equal to or smaller than the line thickness of the characters of the product name 55g.
88(A), the letter "A" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within a line of the letter "C" of product name 55g. Similarly, the letter "B" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within a line of the letter "D" of product name 55g, and the letter "C" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within a line of the letter "E" of product name 55g.
Furthermore, among the letters "A,""B," and "C" of the hidden letters 55j, the letters "A" and "C" of the hidden letters 55j are arranged so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h.
Therefore, the letter "C" of the product name 55g and the letter "A" of the hidden characters 55j are displayed so as to straddle the step portion 55i of the letter "A" of the company name 55h.
Similarly, the letter "E" of the product name 55g and the letter "C" of the hidden characters 55j are displayed so as to straddle the step portion 55i of the letter "B" of the company name 55h.
This configuration makes counterfeiting more difficult. Also, by checking whether or not the hidden characters 55j are present, it is possible to determine whether or not the card has been counterfeited.

The body of the socket 56 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material as described above. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 87, socket pins 56d (terminals) are provided inside the socket 56 at positions corresponding to the pins 55a of the mounted main chip 55. Note that Fig. 87 shows only the 35th socket pin 56d (35) and the 36th socket pin 56d (36), and Fig. 86 omits the illustration of the socket pins 56d, but the socket pins 56d have socket pins 56d (1) to 56d (71) that are connected to the pins 55a (1) to 55a (71) of the main chip 55, respectively.
The socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 are soldered to the main control board 50, whereby the socket pins 56d and the main control board 50 are electrically connected and the socket 56 is mounted on the main control board 50.
Furthermore, when main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56, pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of main chip 55 are electrically connected to socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of socket 56, respectively, thereby electrically connecting main chip 55 to main control board 50. After main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56, it is coupled such that main chip 55 cannot be easily pulled out of socket 56.

As shown in FIG. 85, on the surface of the main control board 50, around the area where the socket 56 is mounted, a mark number 50b and a mark 50c are printed.
The mark numbers 50b include four: a mark number 50b(1) displaying the number "1", a mark number 50b(35) displaying the number "35", a mark number 50b(36) displaying the number "36", and a mark number 50b(71) displaying the number "71".
These four mark numbers 50b(1), 50b(35), 50b(36), and 50b(71) correspond to pins 55a(1), 55a(35), 55a(36), and 55a(71) of the main chip 55, respectively. Specifically, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, the pin 55a(1) is located near the mark number 50b(1), the pin 55a(35) is located near the mark number 50b(35), the pin 55a(36) is located near the mark number 50b(36), and the pin 55a(71) is located near the mark number 50b(71).

Furthermore, six marks 50c(5), 50c(10), 50c(15), 50c(20), 50c(25), and 50c(30) are printed between the mark number 50b(1) and the mark number 50b(35) on the surface of the main control board 50. These marks 50c are printed dots.
In FIG. 85, when main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above main chip 55, mark 50c(5) is located approximately directly below pin 55a(5) of main chip 55, mark 50c(10) is located approximately directly below pin 55a(10), mark 50c(15) is located approximately directly below pin 55a(15), mark 50c(20) is located approximately directly below pin 55a(20), mark 50c(25) is located approximately directly below pin 55a(25), and mark 50c(30) is located approximately directly below pin 55a(30).

On the other hand, on the surface of the main control board 50, seven marks 50c(40), 50c(45), 50c(50), 50c(55), 50c(60), 50c(65), and 50c(70) are printed between the mark number 50b(36) and the mark number 50b(71). These marks 50c are printed with dots, similar to the mark 50c described above.
In FIG. 85, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, the mark 50c (40) of the main control board 50 is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (40) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c (45) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (45) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c (50) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (50), the mark 50c (55) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (55), the mark 50c (60) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (60), the mark 50c (65) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (65), and the mark 50c (70) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (70).

With the above configuration, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56, the pin number of the main chip 55 can be easily known when viewed from directly above. For example, in FIG. 85, it can be easily known that pin 55a (36) of the main chip 55 located almost directly below the mark number 50b (36) is the "36th" pin. Also, for example, it can be easily known that pin 55a (17) (GND) is the "17th" pin 55a because of the mark number 50b (1), the mark 50c (5), the mark 50c (10), and the mark 50c (15).

In FIG. 85, steps 56b (56b(1) and 56b(71)) are formed at the left end of the surface (top surface) of socket 56. Step 56b(1) has a substantially rectangular area recessed from the surface, and the number "1" is displayed within the substantially rectangular area. The amount of recess of step 56b is arbitrary, but may be approximately the same as the amount of recess of step 55c of main chip 55, for example.
Also, the number "1" on stepped portion 56b(1) is displayed in a direction rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in Fig. 85. Therefore, when main chip 55 is attached to socket 56, the number "1" displayed on stepped portion 55d of main chip 55 and the number "1" displayed on stepped portion 56b(1) of socket 56 are misaligned by 90 degrees. In this way, when main chip 55 and socket 56 are viewed in the direction shown in Fig. 85, the number "1" displayed on stepped portion 55d of main chip 55 is in the correct direction.
Therefore, when the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in the orientation shown in Fig. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 can be seen in the correct orientation. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in an orientation rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the orientation shown in Fig. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 can be seen in the correct orientation. Therefore, regardless of which of the above orientations the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10, the number on either the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 or the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 can be seen in the correct orientation, which makes it easier to check the pin numbers when attaching the main chip 55 to the socket 56.

The orientation of the main chip 55 can also be confirmed by checking the position of the stepped portion 55c. That is, the side of the main chip 55 having the stepped portion 55c is the side with the pin numbers "1" and "71".
Also, when main chip 55 is viewed from above, only the lower left corner of the outer shape of main chip 55 is chamfered in Fig. 85. The chamfered corner side is pin number "1." Therefore, the position of pin number "1" can be easily confirmed by simply checking this chamfered corner.

Furthermore, step portion 56b (71) has a substantially rectangular region recessed from the surface, and the number "71" is displayed within the substantially rectangular region. Like the number "1" of step portion 56b (1), the number "71" of step portion 56b (71) is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
When main chip 55 is attached to socket 56, the first pin 55a(1) of main chip 55 is located near step portion 56b(1) of socket 56, and the 71st pin 55a(71) (GND) of main chip 55 is located near step portion 56b(71) of socket 56.

The stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) of the socket 56 are also configured to have recesses within which numbers can be displayed, making it difficult to counterfeit the socket 56.
The number of pins 55a of the main chip 55 is "71", that is, an odd number, with "35" on the lower side and "36" on the upper side in FIG. 85. The socket 56 is also shaped so that these pins 55a can be inserted, so that the main chip 55 cannot be attached in the reverse direction (inserting the side with 36 pins 55a as the lower side in the figure). This makes it possible to prevent incorrect attachment. When attaching the main chip 55 to the socket 56, if the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 matches the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56, the main chip 55 can be attached to the socket 56 in the correct orientation.

Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56, the number "1" on the stepped portion 56b(1) makes it easy to confirm that the pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is the "1"th pin 55a. Similarly, the number "71" on the stepped portion 56b(71) makes it easy to confirm that the pin 55a(71) (GND) of the main chip 55 is the "71"th pin 55a.

As shown in Fig. 86, two notches 56e (height H1) are formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the longitudinal direction. Also, as shown in Fig. 87, a notch 56f (height H2) is formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the lateral direction. These notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized parts are attached to the bottom surface of the socket 56. As described above, since the main body of the socket 56 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material, it is possible to visually confirm that no unauthorized parts are attached inside (the hollow portion 56a). Furthermore, the notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized parts are attached to the contact surface between the socket 56 and the main control board 50.
87, socket pins 56d are provided inside socket 56. Therefore, if height H1 of notch 56e is higher than necessary in the longitudinal direction of socket 56 (the side on which socket pins 56d are aligned), it becomes possible to insert a wire or the like through notch 56e, which may lead to fraudulent activity.

However, in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 86, the height H1 of the cutout 56e is lower than the height H3 of the resistor 50a mounted on the main control board 50 (H1<H3). Specifically, the height H1 of the cutout 56e is, for example, less than "1" millimeter, and the height H3 of the resistor 50a is, for example, about "1" to "3" millimeters. Note that the height H3 of the resistor 50a is the shortest among the multiple types of resistors mounted on the main control board 50.
From the above, it is configured to make it difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire through the notch 56e of the socket 56. As a result, it is difficult to access the socket pin 56d through the notch 56e, and therefore it is possible to suppress the act of cheating.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment relates to the positional relationship between the substrate and the electronic components.
In the seventh embodiment, the "board" may be the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 described above, as well as other control boards connected to the main control board 50 or the sub-control board 80, or relay boards, etc.
In addition, examples of the "electronic component" include a (cable) connector, a 7-segment display, etc. When the electronic component is a 7-segment display, examples include a setting value display LED 73 (1 digit), a credit number display LED 76 (2 digits), an acquisition number display LED 78 (2 digits), and a management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 (4 digits) (see FIG. 1 and FIG. 36).
In addition, in this embodiment, the "front surface" of the substrate refers to the surface on which a specific electronic component is mounted (the so-called "component surface"), and the "back surface" refers to the surface opposite to the surface on which a specific electronic component is mounted (the so-called "solder surface").

In the seventh embodiment, a predetermined amount of gap is provided between the board and the bottom surface (opposing surface) of the predetermined electronic component, so that it is possible to visually check whether or not an unauthorized component is attached between the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component and the board. In a situation where the board is attached to the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to visually check the gap depending on the attachment position, although this differs depending on the position where the board is attached.
However, when assembling the gaming machine 10 or during maintenance after installation of the gaming machine 10, a worker can easily visually check the above-mentioned gap.
Furthermore, as described below, if an LED is used to illuminate the gap, it will be possible to check the gap even in a dimly lit environment after the board is attached inside the housing of the gaming machine 10.

90A and 90B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) is a plan view and (B) is a front view.
The “predetermined electronic component” in this example 1 corresponds to the connector 57 .
91(A) is a view seen from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), with the circuit board omitted, and FIG. 91(B) is a view seen from the Z5 direction (the bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B), with the circuit board omitted.
90, a connector 57 is mounted on the board. The connector 57 corresponds to a cable connector for connecting to another board (for example, the main control board 50) via a cable.

91(B), a plurality of legs 57a are formed on the bottom side of the connector 57. As a result, the entire bottom surface of the connector 57 does not come into contact with the board, and only the legs 57a of the connector come into contact with the board, and a certain gap is formed between the bottom surface of the connector 57 (excluding the legs 57a) and the board surface. In other words, the connector 57 is disposed so as to be raised above the board surface by the height of the legs 57a.
With this configuration, the gap between the connector 57 and the board can be visually checked, making it possible to check whether or not an unauthorized component has been attached.

The lead wires 57b of the connector 57 are arranged in two rows as shown in Fig. 91(B) and are arranged to avoid the legs 57a. This allows the legs 57a and the lead wires 57b to be visually checked so as not to overlap when viewed from the front as in Fig. 90(B) or from the rear as in Fig. 91(A), making it possible to correctly determine whether or not an unauthorized component has been installed in the gap between the board and the connector 57.
Also, as shown in FIG. 91(A), when viewed from behind the connector 57, the lead wire 57b is visible, but when viewed from directly above the connector 57, the lead wire 57b is not visible, as shown in FIG. 90(A).
Furthermore, for example, if this board is installed inside the gaming machine 10 (for example, inside the cabinet or on the back of the front door), and if it is installed in a way that looks as shown in Figure 90 (A) when the front door is opened, the lead wire 57b of the connector 57 cannot be seen from that position, thereby enhancing security.

92A and 92B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 2) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) shows a plan view and (B) shows a side view (enlarged view).
The board in Example 2 corresponds to the display board 75 shown in Fig. 36 (third embodiment). The "predetermined electronic components" correspond to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78.
To briefly explain the outline of the display board 75 once again, as shown in FIG. 1, the display board 75 is a board that is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and therefore it is preferable that the display board 75 is provided with anti-tamper measures.

92, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 are mounted on a display board 75. Each of these is composed of two (higher and lower digit) seven-segment displays arranged side by side.
Furthermore, on the display board 75, six status display LEDs 79 are mounted below the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 in Fig. 92(A). Each of these is an independent LED.

As shown in FIG. 92(B), the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 have a foot (foot 78a in the case of the acquired number display LED 78) on the bottom surface, similar to the connector 57 shown in FIG. 90, and the height of this foot 78a is formed to be "H4". As a result, when the acquired number display LED 78 is mounted on the display board 75, a gap "H4" is formed between the bottom surface of the acquired number display LED 78 and the top of the display board 75. This is also true for the credit number display LED 76.

When the status display LED 79 (FIG. 92(B) shows the game start display LED 79d, but this applies to all status display LEDs 79) is mounted on the display board 75, the lead wire of the status display LED 79 is soldered to the display board 75 in the same manner as the connector 57, but the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 at that time is almost "0" or very small. Therefore, the gap "H4" between the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75 is larger than the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 (H5<H4). With this configuration, it becomes possible for the light when the status display LED 79 is turned on to illuminate the gap "H4" between the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75.

In particular, the status display LED 79 is located close enough to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 that the light emitted from the status display LED 79 when lit reaches the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. This makes it possible to visually confirm the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 by utilizing the light emitted from the status display LED 79 when lit.
For example, when medals are bet, at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, and the 3 bet display LED 79c will light up, so that when medals are bet, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the winning number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.

In addition, if the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off while medals have been bet, when the power supply is turned on again, the bet number data before the power supply is turned off is read, and at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 3 bet display LED 79c is lit again when the gaming machine 10 is started up. Therefore, the LEDs are lit by the simple operation of turning on the power supply, and the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed.
The above is not limited to the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c, but also applies to other LEDs. For example, after a replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the replay display LED 79f will remain lit unless the next game is started, and even if the power is turned off/on under this condition, the replay display LED 79f will light up again when the gaming machine 10 is started up. Therefore, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed by using the light emitted by the replay display LED 79f when it is lit.
The display board 75 is attached to the rear side of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and the credit number display LED 76, the winning number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 are arranged so as to be visible from the control panel 12c.
In this manner, when the display board 75 is attached to the gaming machine 10, even if the status display LED 79 is turned on, it may not be easy to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when the display board 75 is electrically connected to the gaming machine 10 (when the display board 75 is connected by a harness), if the display board 75 is removed from the front door and an operator holds the display board 75 in his/her hand and turns on the status display LED 79, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 can be easily visually checked.

Figure 93 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (example 3) between a substrate and a specified electronic component in the seventh embodiment, (A) showing a front view (the mounting surface of the specified electronic component), (B) showing a side view, and (C) showing a back view.
The board of this Example 3 corresponds to the main control board 50. Also, the "predetermined electronic component" corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is the same as that shown in FIG. 1 (first embodiment) and FIG. 36 (B) (third embodiment).

First, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of Fig. 93 is composed of four independent seven-segment displays (digits in Fig. 36(B)) arranged side by side. Also, each seven-segment display has a DP (decimal point) (segment P in Fig. 37) like the example of Fig. 36(B).
Furthermore, as shown in (B) in the figure, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, like the other examples of the seventh embodiment, is provided with a foot (not shown in FIG. 93) on the bottom surface, so that there is a gap between the bottom surface of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 and the surface of the main control board 50. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to visually check whether or not an illegal part is attached to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74.

Furthermore, on the back side of the main control board 50, in the area where the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached on the front side, a boundary line 50d having approximately the same dimensions as the external shape of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is printed. If the color of the main control board 50 is, for example, green, the boundary line 50d is displayed, for example, in white to make it easier to see. Furthermore, a DP mark 50e is also printed in a position corresponding to the DP of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 on the front side. The DP mark 50e is displayed, for example, in white, just like the boundary line 50d.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached to the correct position on the main control board 50. Specifically, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached correctly to the position on the front surface corresponding to the boundary line 50d on the back side of the main control board 50. In addition, if the outer dimensions of the boundary line 50d are made approximately the same as the outer dimensions of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, it is possible to check whether a different 7-segment display (for example, a 7-segment display with a different number of digits) is not attached.
Furthermore, by checking the positions of the four DP markings 50e on the back surface of the main control board 50 and the DP positions of each 7-segment display of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, it is possible to confirm whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is implemented in the correct orientation.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a modified example of Example 3 of FIG. 93. Like FIG. 93, (A) shows a front view (the surface on which a specified electronic component is mounted), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view.
The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of Fig. 94 is an integrally formed 4-digit 7-segment display (each digit cannot be separated), unlike the example of Fig. 93. In other words, this management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is a single component.
In such a case, only the outline of the boundary line 50d on the back surface of the main control board 50 is printed (displayed), and the boundary lines for each digit are not printed. Therefore, the number of parts can be easily confirmed by whether the boundary line 50d is printed as in Fig. 93(B) or as in Fig. 94(B).

On the other hand, the DP mark 50e is printed in a position corresponding to the number of DPs provided on the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. This makes it possible to check whether the four-digit management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is installed correctly and whether the orientation of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correct.

Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
A. Fifth embodiment (1) The number of error histories to be stored and displayed can be determined arbitrarily, taking into account the storage capacity of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. For example, the error history may be stored without being erased until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, and all of the stored error history may be displayed. Then, when the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, the oldest data in the error history may be erased in sequence.
Also, for example, any error that has occurred a predetermined number of days (e.g., six months, one year, etc.) from the current time may be erased from the error history data. Alternatively, the error history data is stored until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached (it is preferable to configure the error history so that it can be checked in some way), but the error history is displayed in such a way that only those errors from within one month prior to the current time are displayed.

(2) Although not illustrated in the above embodiment, if an error occurs while the reel 31 is rotating, the power is turned off before the reel 31 stops, and then the power is turned on (without transitioning to a setting change state), the following processing will be performed.
When the power is turned off after an error is detected, the error data is stored in the abnormal input flag as described above.
When the system starts up without going into the setting change state after power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2721 (power recovery process) in the process of Fig. 41 (program start). Then, after step S2724 in Fig. 42 (power recovery process), an interrupt process occurs, and the error command stored before the power was turned off is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it starts notifying the error. Then, the time in the error history for that error becomes the time when the notification of that error started.

(3) The error contents and time shown on the error history screen are merely examples and are not limited to these. For example, door open and door close do not have to be displayed in the error history. Also, power on/off does not have to be displayed in the error history. On the other hand, when the device transitions to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the error history screen may display something along with the time so that the user can understand that fact.
Furthermore, the time may be any of those that display the date and time, those that display the month and date and time, and those that display the year, month, date and time.

(4) The error history screen can be displayed in the setting confirmation state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be possible to switch to manager mode by performing a specified operation when opening the door, and the error history screen may be displayed in the manager mode (the setting key may not be required to display the error history screen).
Alternatively, on the contrary, the error history screen may be made to be unable to be displayed unless the setting change state is entered.
(5) In a situation where an error is being reported, the error report may be terminated when the cause of the error is removed even if the reset switch 153 is not operated. Alternatively, even if the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where an error is being reported, the error report may be continued until a predetermined time has elapsed from that point, and the error report may be terminated after the predetermined time has elapsed.

B. Sixth embodiment (1) The socket 56 is provided with two stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) to display the characters "1" and "71", respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if only the stepped portion 56b(1) is provided, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55.
(2) In addition to the four mark numbers 50b, the main control board 50 displays thirteen mark numbers 50c, but this is not limited to the above, and only the mark numbers 50b may be displayed. Furthermore, the mark numbers 50b may be only the mark number 50b(1), or only the mark numbers 50b(1) and 50b(71). Even if only the mark number 50b(1) is displayed, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on the step portion 55d of the main chip 55.

(3) In the above embodiment, a recess 55b is provided in main chip 55, a model number sticker 55f is attached, and a two-dimensional code 55e, a product name 55g, a company name 55h, and hidden characters 55j are displayed (printed). However, this does not necessarily mean that these are essential requirements of main chip 55.
(4) In the above embodiment, the number of pins on the main chip 55 is 71, but it is not limited to this and may be an even number (for example, 72). In addition, if the number of pins is an odd number, it is not limited to 71, but may be, for example, 75 (32 + 33). The number of pins on the main chip 55 is determined by the number of signal lines and GND (ground) required.

(5) The notches 56e and 56f of the socket 56 are not necessarily required. However, it is preferable to provide the notch 56e or 56f in at least one location on the bottom of the socket 56 so that the gap between the bottom surface of the socket 56 and the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed. Even if the notches 56e and 56f are provided, it is not essential that they have the height described above.
(6) The socket 56 may be made of an opaque material. However, from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activities, it is preferable to make the socket 56 from a transparent or translucent material that allows the inside to be visually observed.
(7) The step portion 55i of the company name 55h is not necessarily a required requirement. Even if the company name 55h is provided, the characters may not have a step portion. Furthermore, the depths of the step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i (D1, D2, and D3 in FIG. 89) may be partially the same (for example, D1=D2 and D1≠D3) or may be entirely the same (D1=D2=D3).

(8) The orientation of the characters of the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise relative to the character "1" of the stepped portion 55d and the character of the mark number 50b, but is not limited to this. The orientation of the characters of the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be the same as the orientation of the character "1" of the stepped portion 55d and the character of the mark number 50b.
Alternatively, the orientation of the characters in step portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise in FIG. 85, and the orientation of the character "1" in step portion 55d and the characters in marker numeral 50b may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85.
(9) In main chip 55, the pin numbers of the GND (ground) line are 17, 35, 54, and 71, but are not limited to these. For example, pins 1, 35, 36, and 71 may be GND (ground) lines. Alternatively, pins 17, 18, 53, and 54 (all pins adjacent to recessed portion 55b) may be GND (ground) lines.

C. Seventh embodiment (1) The shape of the foot (for ensuring a gap with the board) provided at the bottom of a specific electronic component may be any shape. For example, as shown in Fig. 91(B), the foot 57a of the connector 57 is formed in a line shape, but this is not limited to this, and a substantially cylindrical foot may be provided at each of the four corners of the specific electronic component. This is not limited to the connector 57, but is also the same for a seven-segment display (Figs. 92, 93, and 94).
(2) As shown in FIG. 92(B), the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate is illustrated as “H5”. However, in reality, the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate are almost in contact with each other, and the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate is almost “0”.

(3) In the examples of Figures 93 and 94, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display board 75 shown in Figure 92 can be configured in the same manner. For example, if the credit number display LED 76 is a combination of two 7-segment displays, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the two 7-segment displays is displayed on the back surface of the display board 75, and two DP marks 50e are displayed.
In addition, when the credit number display LED 76 is an integrated seven-segment display in which the upper and lower digits are connected, a boundary line 50d showing its outline and two DP marks 50e are displayed on the back surface of the display board 75. This is the same for the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the same configuration can be applied to the set value display LED 73 consisting of, for example, one digit. In this case, a border 50d corresponding to the outline of the set value display LED 73 is displayed on the back surface of the board (the main control board 50 or the board on which the set value display LED 73 is mounted), and one DP mark 50e is displayed. If the set value display LED 73 does not have a DP, only the border 50d is displayed on the back surface of the board.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also called "interrupt vector addresses").
In the eighth embodiment, the following terms are used:
(1) The "timer interrupt processing" in the eighth embodiment is the same as the "interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 66). In the following description of the eighth embodiment, the "timer interrupt processing" may be abbreviated to simply "interrupt processing" as necessary.
(2) "Address value" refers to the numerical value of an address in the built-in memory. For example, in FIG. 96 described later, the "vector address value" is "0004H." Note that in this specification, the terms "address" and "address number" may be used as necessary, but these terms are synonymous.

(3) "Data value of an address" refers to the value of the data stored at that address. For example, the above-mentioned "vector address" is actually composed of two-byte addresses "0004H" and "0005H", but the "data value of a vector address" refers to the data value (a 2-byte (16-bit) value) stored at addresses "0004H" and "0005H".
(4) An "H" is added to an address value. "H" indicates a "hex" in hexadecimal. Also, a "B" is added to the bit value stored in the address. "B" indicates a "bit" in binary.
Furthermore, when indicating a 2-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is added between the upper byte (8-bit) value and the lower byte (8-bit) value, for example, "00000000/00000100B".

(5) On the other hand, a register does not have an address, and the "value of a register" refers to the value of the data stored in that register.
(6) In this embodiment, the storage areas in the built-in memory are referred to as the "program area,""dataarea,""registerarea,""program management area,""workarea," and "stack area." However, without being limited to these, they may also be referred to as the "program area,""dataarea,""registerarea,""program management area,""workarea," and "stack area," respectively.
The "program region" is also called a "program code region" or a "program code area."

95 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "chip") in the eighth embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in FIG. 1, and integrates the RWM 53, ROM 54, and main CPU 55 into a single chip.
95, the chip includes a main CPU 55 (same as in FIG. 1) and a built-in memory. Note that the chip also includes various other pieces of hardware in addition to these two pieces of hardware, but the description and illustration of these will be omitted.
The built-in memory includes a built-in ROM 54 having an address range of "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16,384 bytes) and a built-in RWM 53 having an address range of "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1,024 bytes).
The built-in ROM 54 is the same as "ROM 54" in FIG. 1, and the built-in RWM 53 is the same as "RWM 53" in FIG.

Furthermore, the internal memory includes a function setting register area and a function control register area as internal memory register areas.
The function setting register area is a storage area for registers for operation settings including interrupt processing (for example, initial settings for interrupt processing, etc.). Specific examples of registers (including counters) stored in the function setting register area include the prescaler register 502 and counter setting register 503 in Fig. 61 (fourth embodiment). Furthermore, although not shown in Fig. 95, a register for setting the maximum value of random numbers, etc. are also provided in the function setting register area.
As in the fourth embodiment, the prescaler register 502 is a register in which a setting value for selecting a clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 can be set.
The counter setting register 503 is a built-in register capable of setting the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 .

The function control register area is a storage area for registers that perform monitoring and control, such as monitoring interrupt processing and storing random numbers. For example, in Fig. 61 (fourth embodiment), the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the 8-bit counter 501, and the interrupt flag 504 are provided in the function control register area.
As in the fourth embodiment, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 has been set.
The 8-bit counter 501 is a storage area for a counter value consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing.
The interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
It should be noted that the built-in memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and function control register area shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has a CPU register area. This CPU register area is a register area different from the built-in memory register area provided in the built-in memory.
The CPU register area includes general-purpose registers A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L. The F register is a flag register.
The Q register is a register that stores the upper address "F0H" of the work area (see FIG. 97) in the used area of the built-in RWM 53 and is used for instructions to read data whose upper address is "F0H" from the memory area of the built-in RWM 53.
Furthermore, the I register is a register called an interrupt page address register, the details of which will be described later, and is a register for determining the upper byte value of a vector address.

The interrupt disable flags (IFF1, IFF2) 302 are the same as those shown in Fig. 61 (fourth embodiment). The IFF1 register is a register for determining whether to enable or disable a maskable interrupt. The IFF2 register is a register used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, and to restore by a RETEX instruction after executing a CALLEX instruction.
In addition to the registers mentioned above, various other registers such as a Q register and a U register are provided, but illustration and description of these are omitted in the eighth embodiment.

The registers, counters, and flags shown in FIG. 95 are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. 95. For example, the 8-bit counter 501 is provided in the function control register area, but is not limited to this, and can be provided in the CPU register area in the main CPU 55, or can be configured by a circuit. The interrupt flag 504 can also be anything that has the function of storing on/off, and can be provided in the CPU register area, for example, rather than in the function control register area, or can be configured by a circuit. Similarly, the prescaler register 502, counter setting register 503, and interrupt wait monitor register 301 can also be provided in the CPU register area or other areas in the built-in memory, or can be configured by a circuit.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM 54 in FIG.
The internal ROM 54 has a used area and a non-used area.
The "usage area" is a memory area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
In addition, the "area outside the use area" is a memory area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, such as a memory area in which a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), a program used during testing, and a program for preventing cheating are stored.
The used area and the non-used area in the built-in ROM 54 are each provided with a program area and a data area.
The "program area", also called the "control area", is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
Moreover, a "data area" is a storage area in which information other than programs is stored, and in which data used when a program is executed is stored.

Here, as shown in parentheses in Fig. 96, the "usage area" may be referred to as a "first area." Also, the "area outside the use area" may be referred to as a "second area."
The program area of the area in use may be called a "first program area" or a "first control area."The data area of the area in use may be called a "first data area."
Furthermore, a program stored in the program area of the usage area may be referred to as a "first program."
Similarly, the program area outside the area in use may be called a "second program area" or a "second control area." Also, the data area outside the area in use may be called a "second data area."
Furthermore, a program stored in the program area outside the area in use may be called a "second program."

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area and data area of the used area, but this unused area may be eliminated and the program area and data area of the used area may be arranged so that they are contiguous.
In addition, there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the area outside the used area, but this unused area may be eliminated and the used area and the area outside the used area may be arranged so that they are continuous.
Furthermore, in the area outside the used area, the program area and data area are arranged contiguously, but like the used area, there may be an unused area of one or more bytes between the program area and the data area.
The used area and the area outside the used area may be defined to refer only to the program area and the data area, and to exclude the unused area. On the other hand, when there is an unused area between the program area and the data area, as in the used area of Fig. 96, the unused area may be included in the used area (or the area outside the used area).

In addition to the above-mentioned used area, non-used area, and unused area, the built-in ROM 54 is provided with a memory area for storing the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., and a program management area.
In the above, the vector address (0004H) described in detail below is provided in the program area of the usage area in this embodiment.
Also, the program code area start/end addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are provided in the program management area.
The program management area includes program code area setting addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and an interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), which will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in RWM 53 in FIG.
The area of the built-in RWM 53 is provided with a used area (which may be referred to as a "first area") and an area outside the used area (which may be referred to as a "second area"), similar to the area of the built-in ROM 54. The concept of the "used area" and the "outside the used area" is the same as that of the built-in ROM 54.
The used area and the non-used area in the built-in RWM 53 each have a working area, an unused area, and a stack area.
The working area (also referred to as the "first working area") and the stack area (also referred to as the "first stack area") in the usage area are memory areas used (updated, referenced) during the execution of programs (programs related to the progress of the game) stored in the program area of the usage area of the built-in ROM 54.

Similarly, the working area (also referred to as the "second working area") and the stack area (also referred to as the "second stack area") in the area outside the use area are memory areas used (updated, referenced) during the execution of programs (programs not related to the progress of the game, for example, programs related to the display of the role ratio monitor) stored in the program area of the area outside the use area of the built-in ROM 54.
The "stack area" is a storage area in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, the interrupt initial setting address will be described.
First, a "vector address" refers to an address that stores the start address (first address) of a timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) that is executed when a timer interrupt processing factor occurs. In other words, the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself is not stored in a vector address, but rather, it refers to an address that stores the location (first address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR).
The "interrupt initial setting address" is an address that stores data that enables the value of the vector address to be specified. In particular, in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be specified only by the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address, but the value of the vector address can be specified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address.

98 is a diagram for explaining an interrupt initial setting address, in which (A) is a diagram showing details of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt priority level and the interrupt priority level setting value.
96, the interrupt initial setting address is provided in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and the address is "3FDAH" (1 byte) in this embodiment. However, this is an example and is not limited to this.
After the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored in this interrupt initial setting address is read, and the data value is used to determine a vector address.

98A, the upper 4 bits (A7 bits to A4 bits) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address have a value that is predetermined as a vector address setting value, which is "0000B" in this embodiment. This vector address setting value constitutes a part of the vector address value, as will be described later.
In this embodiment, the vector address setting value is set to "0H (0000B)", but it is not limited to this and can be set to various values such as "8H (1000H)" or "FH (1111B)".
In addition, the A3 and A2 bits in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are fixed values, and are set to "00B" in this embodiment. Note that, as will be described in detail later, this fixed 2-bit value is configured to be checked (in security mode) when the gaming machine 10 is started, and if the 2-bit value is not "00B", an error occurs.
Moreover, this fixed value is not limited to "00B", but can be set to various values such as "11B".
Furthermore, the two lowest bits A1 and A0 of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are an interrupt priority setting value.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98B, four types of interrupt priority setting values are provided: "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B".

FIG. 98B shows the relationship between interrupt priority setting values and interrupt causes.
In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt causes, "IR0" to "IR5", and the smaller the last number, the higher the interrupt priority. In other words, the interrupt cause "IR0" has the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt cause "IR5" has the lowest interrupt priority.
The types of interrupts include "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used in timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the interrupt priority setting value is set to "01B." As a result, the interrupt priorities are set to "PTC0,""PTC1,""PTC2,""XINT,""RX0," and "RX1," in descending order of priority.
Furthermore, when "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 bit and A0 bit of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address become "01B".
As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initial setting address is "3FDAH", and the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "00000001B".

FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining vector address values and data values stored in the vector addresses.
FIG. 99A shows vector address values.
In this embodiment, the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54, and is 2 bytes.
As shown in FIG. 99A, the vector address value has an upper byte value that is the I register value, and a lower byte value that is made up of a vector address setting value and an automatically assigned value.

Here, the I register value in this embodiment is "00H". As shown in Fig. 95, the I register is provided in the CPU register area, and is set to "00H" after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In other words, each register value provided in the CPU register area is cleared immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Thereafter, unless a value other than "00H" is stored in the I register, the I register value remains at "00H".
In this embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value remains "00H."
Therefore, the value of the most significant byte of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7 to A4 bit values correspond to the A7 to A4 bit values (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH). As shown in Figure 98 (A), the A7 to A4 bit value of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "0000B", so this value becomes the A7 to A4 bit value of the lower byte of the vector address as is.

In addition, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3 to A0 bit values are automatically assigned values.
Fig. 99B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt causes and automatically assigned values. As shown in Fig. 98B, in this embodiment, the interrupt priority setting value is "01B", and the priority of the interrupt cause of PTC2, which is the timer interrupt process (I_INTR) in this embodiment, is "IR2".
99B, the automatically assigned value for the interrupt cause "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" is "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" becomes the A3 to A0 bit value of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the value of the vector address is
"00000000/00000100B" = "0004H"
It becomes.
As a result, in FIG. 96, of the storage area of the internal ROM 54 starting from "0000H", "0004H" becomes the vector address.
As the vector address value is 2 bytes as described above, the actual vector addresses are "0004H" and "0005H".

99C is a diagram showing an example of data values of vector addresses. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored from "1134H" in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54. In other words, the top address of the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is "1134H".
Therefore, the data value of the vector address (0004H) becomes "1134H".
When storing "1134H" in a 2-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H" and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H".
This means:
0004H:34H (00110100B)
0005H:11H (00010001B)
is stored.

When the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the main CPU 55 starts up, it is possible to recognize where the vector address is located based on the data value of the interrupt initial setting address and the I address value.
Specifically, since the upper four bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are "0000B", the upper four bits of the lower byte of the vector address are "0000B".
In addition, since the value of the interrupt priority setting value, which is the value of the lowest 2 bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), is "01B", the value of the lowest 4 bytes of the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2) is assigned to "0100B" by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H", so that the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B".
From the above, the main CPU 55 can recognize that the vector address (the address where the starting address of "I_INTR" is stored) corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2, which corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) is "0004H".
Therefore, it is possible to recognize the address at which the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored (the start address of the timer interrupt processing program) based on the data value stored in the vector address.

Note that the process of setting the I register to "00H" is not executed after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side in Fig. 95 is initialized, and as a result, the I register value becomes "00H" like the other register values.
Furthermore, when the power is turned on and the registers are initialized, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, the Q register is specified when specifying the upper address "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53.
In this embodiment, when the timer interrupt process (I_INTR) of the PTC2 is entered, the program (i.e., the timer interrupt process (I_INTR)) at the address corresponding to the data (1134H) stored in the vector addresses ("0004H" and "0005H") is called. In other words, the program code of the timer interrupt process (I_INTR) becomes executable.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the process from when the power is turned on until the transition to the user mode in this embodiment.
First, before the power is turned on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is "L (low)." Here, "XSRST" indicates the operating status of the main CPU 55, and when the main CPU 55 is in a status in which it should not operate (stopped), "XSRST=L" is set (indicating that the main CPU 55 is stopped).
When the power is turned on under these circumstances, the system reset is released, and when the power supply becomes stable, the main CPU 55 circuitry goes from "L (low)" to "H (high)."

Next, the registers in the CPU register area are initialized, and it is determined whether or not there is a PROM mode request. Here, "PROM mode" refers to a mode in which data is written to ROM (ROM is burned). If it is determined that there is a request to switch to PROM mode, the mode switches to PROM mode, and if it is determined that there is no request to switch to PROM mode, the mode switches to security mode. Note that gaming machines installed in the market are configured to determine that there is no request to switch to PROM mode after the system reset is released.
In the security mode, a security check is performed, and if the security check is judged to be OK, the process transitions to the user mode, and if the security check is judged to be NG, the execution (processing) is stopped.
As a security check in this security mode, the program code area setting address in the program management area, the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), etc. are read. Then, the presence or absence of setting errors in the program management area is checked, and self-diagnosis is performed. In this security mode, the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) is read, and the vector address value is recognized.

Here, the data of the interrupt initial setting address is read, and if the fixed value (A3 and A2 bits) in FIG. 98(A) is not "00B", it is determined that a setting error has occurred in the program management area.
If the security check in the security mode is judged to be OK, the process moves to the user mode.
This user mode corresponds to a program process that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54.
In addition, in FIG. 100, "traveling outside the designated area" will be described later.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of a program starting from "0000H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54.
In this embodiment, the call instructions issued by the main CPU 5 include a special call instruction and a normal call instruction.
The special call instruction is called a "RST instruction" and the normal call instruction is called a "CALLF instruction."
The RST instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a one-byte (four cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a two-byte (four cycle) program. Therefore, the number of bytes required to write the RST instruction is smaller than the number of bytes required to write the CALLF instruction, so the program size can be reduced by using the RST instruction rather than the CALLF instruction. Therefore, programs that are called frequently are called using the RST instruction.

Here, a "frequently called program" refers to a program that is called many times (multiple times) in one game.
However, examples of "frequently called programs" include programs that are called at least once per game, and programs that are likely to be called during play, although they may not necessarily be called at least once per game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, addresses that can be called using the RST command are limited to predetermined addresses.
Specifically, the "predetermined address" is
0008H
0010H
0018H
0020H
0028H
0030H
0038H
0040H
It is composed of eight parts:
It should be noted that these eight addresses are merely examples, and the values (numbers) and numbers of the "predetermined addresses" can be set to various values depending on the specifications of the chip, etc.

By storing programs that can be called by the RST command in the above eight addresses, the program capacity can be reduced.
On the other hand, as described above, the program area of the usage area starts at "0000H", and the power-on program is stored from this "0000H". The power-on program corresponds to, for example, the "program start process (M_PRG_START)" shown in Fig. 41 (third embodiment).

As mentioned above, the vector address is "0004H".
Therefore, as shown in FIG.
0000H: Power-on program (start program)
:
0004H: Vector address:
0008H: Program 1 called by the RST command
:
0010H: Program 2 called by RST command
:
0018H: Program 3 called by RST command
:
0020H: Program 4 called by RST command
:
0028H: Program 5 called by RST command
:
0030H: Program 6 called by RST command
:
0038H: Program 7 called by RST command
:
0040H: Program 8 called by RST command
:
This is the arrangement of data (including instructions and programs).

In addition, the jump command requires a capacity of 3 bytes in this embodiment. Therefore, the jump command is stored in "0001H" to "0003H", and "0050H", for example, is specified as the jump destination address. After "0050H", the program following "0000H" is stored.
Here, the power-on program may include the jump instruction, or may not include the jump instruction.
This allows the power-on program to start at "0000H", and then jump to "0050H" with the next jump command "0001H", from which the power-on program can continue.
By setting it in this way, the power-on program can be started from "0000H" while placing the vector address at "0004H." Furthermore, the power-on program can be started from "0000H" while placing the RST instruction at "0008H,""0010H," etc.

In the subsequent power-on program, a determination is made as to whether or not to transition to a setting change mode, for example.
Here, since the voltage is unstable when the power is turned on, there is a risk that the jump command will not be executed normally. If the jump command is not executed normally, it may take a long time to switch to the setting change mode, or the setting change mode may not be switched to. Therefore, when the power is turned on by performing an operation for switching to the setting change mode (for example, a predetermined operation of the setting key), if the setting change mode is not switched to within a target time (T), it can be determined that the program including the jump command was not executed normally. Then, when the administrator determines that the setting change mode will not be switched to within the target time (T), the administrator turns the power of the gaming machine 10 back on. When the power is turned on again, the program starts again from address "0000H" via the security mode.
Also, it is preferable that the jump command of the power-on program is executed from "0000H" to "0007H" so that "0008H" can be used as the RST command.

In addition, when storing program 1 called by the RST command at "0008H", the program 1 is allocated to the 8-byte capacity from "0008H" to "000FH", or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less.
Similarly, when storing program 2 called by the RST command at "0010H", the program 2 is allocated in an 8-byte capacity from "0010H" to "0017H", or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less.

Here, if the program 2 is made up of, for example, the four bytes "0010H" to "0013H", the addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be used in any way.
For example, first, addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be an unused area (storing "00000000B").
Secondly, other programs that fit within 4 bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H".
Furthermore, thirdly, a continuation of the power-on program starting at "0000H" may be stored at "0014H", and a jump command (a command to jump to the address where the continuation of the program at "0014H" is stored) may be stored at "0015H" to "0017H".

The same applies to "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H" and "0040H".
For example, when storing program 4 called by the RST instruction at "0020H," if program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH," program 5 that calls "0028H" with the RST instruction may not be provided. However, if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it after "0040H," where there is no limit to the program capacity. With this configuration, eight programs that can be called by the RST instruction can be stored.
In addition, when a program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, the method of arranging the program is not limited to storing it after "0040H", but for example, in the above example, the program can be stored from "0020H" to "0024H", a jump command can be stored from "0025H" to "0027H", and the jump command can be used to jump to "0040H" or later. In this way, a program that can be called by the RST instruction can be stored at "0028H". By using this method, even if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, eight programs that can be called by the RST instruction can be provided.
In the example of FIG. 101, a command to jump to "0050H" is stored at "0001H", and the program following "0000H" is stored after "0050H".

In this embodiment, the vector address is set to "0004H", but the present invention is not limited to this.
Here, the upper byte of the vector address value is the value of the I register. As in this embodiment, the process of setting a specific value in the I register is not executed after power-on, and the I register is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 and remains in a state of "00H", so the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "00H". However, this is not limiting, and if the process of setting a specific value in the I register is executed after power-on and the I register is initialized, the upper byte value of the vector address can be set to the specific value.
However, as shown in FIG. 96, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register will be in the range of "00H" to "11H".
As will be described later, vector addresses are not limited to being provided in the program area of the used area, but can also be provided in the data area of the used area, the program area of an area outside the used area, or the data area of an area outside the used area.

However, if the I register is initialized after power-on and then a process of setting a specific value in the I register is executed, then a corresponding amount of program capacity is required. For example, if the specific value is "02H", then after power-on and the I register is initialized, it is necessary to provide "LD I, 02H" (a command (program) to load "02H" into the I register). If the program requires a capacity of, for example, 2 bytes, then that amount of program storage area is consumed.
In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the initialized value "00H" is used as the I register value, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register, so that the program storage area can be saved. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced by setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H".

Furthermore, when the I register value is "00H", the value of the vector address is not limited to "0004H". Specifically, the vector address value can be set to any value other than "00FEH" and "00FFH" and the address to be called by the RST instruction (such as the above-mentioned "0008H" and "0010H"). For example, it can be set to "00F4H". If the lower 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is "0100B (4H)", the automatically assigned value of this embodiment shown in FIG. 99B can be used as is.
Also, when the upper 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the upper 4-bit value (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) in Figure 98 (A) becomes "1111B".

102 is a diagram showing an example where the vector address value is "00F4H." In this case, since "0004H" is not a vector address, a power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H."
Also, if 3 bytes are required as the program capacity of a jump instruction, the jump instruction can be placed in the 3-byte memory area from "0005H" to "0007H", and program 1 called by the RST instruction can be stored in "0008H" as in FIG. 101.

Next, a program called by the RST command, that is, a program called multiple times in one game, will be described.
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing examples of processing called by the RST command, where (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively.
Example 1 in Fig. 103(A) is a flowchart showing control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process corresponds to the process of step S303 in Fig. 46 (third embodiment), for example, and is a process for setting command data to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, although not shown, in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), in the game start setting process in step S272, an output request for the operating state (whether or not the BB operating pattern has been displayed, whether or not the replay operating pattern has been displayed, etc.) is set, and control command set 1 is executed.
Similarly, although not shown, in the start switch acceptance process in step S279 of FIG. 46 (third embodiment), an output request at the start of reel rotation is set and control command set 1 is executed.

103A, first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt inhibition processing. In the next step S152, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S503, where the interrupt processing inhibited in step S151 is released (i.e., interrupt is permitted). Through the above processing, interrupt processing is inhibited while control command set 2 is being executed.
Although detailed processing of the control command set 2 is omitted, this processing is processing for writing control commands. Also, since interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by interrupt processing being executed during the writing processing of control commands.

Example 2 in Fig. 103B is a flowchart showing an interrupt wait process (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, step S2754 in Fig. 45 (third embodiment) or step S295 in Fig. 46 (third embodiment).
First, in step S161, the main control board 50 acquires an interrupt counter value. This process is a process for storing the interrupt counter value in the A register. Note that a 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a specific address in the working area of the use area of the built-in RWM 53, and in step S161, the value stored in the address of the lower 8 bits is stored in the A register.
In the next step S162, the main control board 50 judges whether the value of the lowest 8 bits of the interrupt counter value has changed. Specifically, the value of the lowest 8 bits is subtracted from the A register value, and if the calculation result is not "0" (if the zero flag is "0"), the result is judged as "Yes". If it is judged that the value has changed, the process according to this flowchart ends, and if it is judged that the value has not changed, the process of step S162 continues.

Example 3 of Figure 103 (C) is a flowchart showing countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process is used, for example, in the process of subtracting the advantageous zone clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) of Figure 46 (third embodiment), the process of updating the timer value in step S455 (timer measurement) of Figure 47 (third embodiment), or the process of updating the number of AT games during AT play (not shown).
In this process, in step S171, the counter value is decremented by "1", and the process of this flowchart ends.
The three processes shown in Fig. 103 are examples of processes that are called multiple times in one game, and are not limited to these three processes, and many more processes can be included. Then, a program that has a program capacity that can be stored in the above-mentioned address and is called many times in one game is set as the process to be called by the RST command.

104 is a diagram showing program code area designation addresses and their data values. Note that, although hereinafter, they are referred to as "program code area designation addresses", they may also be referred to as "program code area setting addresses".
As shown in FIG. 96, in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designated addresses.
The main CPU 55 judges that the program code stored within the range of addresses specified in the program code area is normal when executed, and judges that the program code stored outside the range of addresses specified in the program code area is abnormal (traveling outside the specified area) when executed. When the main CPU 55 judges that the program code is abnormal (traveling outside the specified area), it generates a reset.
In other words, a reset occurs when program code (instruction) stored outside the designated area is called (instruction is fetched).

This is done for the following reasons.
The first reason is that there is a risk of fraudulent activity in which malicious program code is stored in an area other than the actual program area, and the malicious program code is jumped to from the actual program area, for example by a jump command, and then executed.
The second reason is that runaway may occur when the voltage is unstable immediately after power-on, or runaway may occur due to heat, which may cause instructions to jump to an area other than the program area. Specifically, for example, if there is an instruction to jump from address A to address B, if the instruction is not executed correctly, the instructions stored after address B may not be executed within the designed time. In such a case, the power is turned off once and then turned on again (restarted).

FIG. 100 also illustrates the processing when traveling outside the designated area.
100, when traveling outside a designated area is detected during execution of the user mode, a reset occurs. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the registers, passes through the security mode, and executes the user mode again (executes the program from address "0000H").
However, without being limited to this, when travel outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, after initializing the registers, the process may be executed from the user mode without going through the security mode.
In addition, in the example of FIG. 100, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request is determined after the register is initialized, but this is not limited to the above. When travel outside a designated area is detected and a reset is generated, it is also possible not to determine the presence or absence of a PROM mode request.
However, when driving outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, the registers are always initialized.

Fig. 104(A) is a diagram showing an address for specifying the end address of program code area 1. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area in the used area in Fig. 96. Note that "program code area 2", which will be described later, corresponds to the program area in the area outside the used area in Fig. 96.
As shown in Fig. 96, the address range of the program area in the used area is from "0000H" to "11FEH". For this reason, in this embodiment, the start address "0000H" is not defined, and only the end address "11FEH" is defined. In this way, a memory area (2 bytes) for defining the start address "0000H" is not required.
If only the end address is specified and not the start address, the main CPU 55 will inevitably recognize the range from the first address to the end address of the built-in memory as program code area 1. And since program code area 1 (the program area of the used area) actually starts from "0000H", there is no problem if the main CPU 55 recognizes it as above.

The end address of the program code area 1 is stored in addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area) in the program management area. In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 104(A), the lower byte is stored in address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored in address "3FD4H".
Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored in address "3FD3H", and "11H" (00010001B) is stored in address "3FD4H".

FIG. 104B is a diagram showing an address for specifying the start address of the program code area 2.
The addresses for specifying the start address of the program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H". As shown in Fig. 96, the address range of the program area outside the used area is "2000H" to "245DH". Therefore, the start address of the program code area 2 is "2000H".
Therefore, "00H" (000000000B) is stored in address "3FD5H", and "20H" (00100000B) is stored in address "3FD6H".

104C is a diagram showing addresses for specifying the end address of the program code area 2. The addresses for specifying the end address of the program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H".
Then, "5DH" (01011101B) is stored in address "3FD7H", and "24H" (00100100B) is stored in address "3FD8H".

As described above, when the end address of program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 determines that the program code within these specified address ranges is normal when it is being executed, but determines that there is an abnormality when program code outside the specified address range is being executed.

It is also possible not to specify a program code area. In this case, "0000H" is stored in all of the program code area 1 end address, program code area 2 start address, and program code area 2 end address.
Also, for example, if an address is specified only for program code area 1 and not for program code area 2, the end address of program code area 1 can be set to "11FEH" as shown in FIG. 104, and the start address and end address of program code area 2 can be set to "0000H".

Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) Although the vector address is provided in the program area of the area of use, it is also possible to provide the vector address in the data area of the area of use. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H", after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "12H" in the I register.
Also, a vector address may be provided in the program area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H", then after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "20H" in the I register.
Furthermore, a vector address may be provided in the data area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H", then after the power is turned on, a process is executed to store "24H" in the I register.
In addition, in any case where a vector address is set in the data area of the area in use, where a vector address is set in the program area of the area outside the area in use, or where a vector address is set in the data area of the area outside the area in use, simply reading the data value stored in the vector address will not result in travel outside the specified area and will not cause a reset.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, i.e., the top address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored, can be set arbitrarily. In the example of Fig. 99(c), it is set to "1134H", but it is not limited to this. In addition, the top address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be later than the vector address or earlier than the vector address.
(3) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, two address ranges are defined as the executable range (runnable area) of the program code. However, this is not limited to this, and only one address range may be defined.
In addition, when determining the executable range of program code in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM 54, in the above embodiment, only the end address is determined and the start address is not determined, but this is not limited to this and both the start address and the end address may be determined.

(4) In the above embodiment, the addresses storing the programs called by the RST instruction are set to "0008H", "0010H", "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H", but the addresses are not limited to these eight addresses. However, it is preferable to set the upper byte of the addresses storing the programs called by the RST instruction to "00H".
By doing this, a module that is called multiple times in one game can be placed near the top address (0000H), so that during the development stage, the module can be designed first and other modules can be designed (considered) later.

(5) The relationship between the address at which a program called by the RST instruction is stored and the vector address is as follows:
First, as shown in FIG. 101, a vector address may be placed before all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Secondly, as shown in FIG. 102, a vector address may be placed after all addresses that store programs called by the RST instruction.
Thirdly, a vector address may be placed (e.g., "0026H" and "0027H") between one address (e.g., "0020H") that stores a program called by the RST instruction and another address (e.g., "0028H") that stores a program called by the RST instruction.

In this case, if the vector address is located within the program area of the used area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH"), there is no need to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power-on. In other words, if the I register value is set to "00H", the program capacity can be reduced.
99B, in this example, the A3-A0 bit value in the lowest byte of the vector address value is "0100B." Therefore, at this point, the vector address value is "00000000/#####0100B" (where "#" is an arbitrary value of "0" or "1").
Here, the above-mentioned "####B" (vector address setting value) is "0000B" in the example of Fig. 99(A). However, this is not limiting, and "####B" may be, for example, "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)".
When "####B" is set to "1000B (8H)", the vector address value becomes "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is set to "1111B (FH)", the vector address value becomes "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is the I register value, which is set to "00H". However, this is not limited to this, and although this overlaps with what has been described above, the upper byte value of the vector address may be a value other than "00H", for example, "02H". In this case, after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the I register is initialized, and then a process is executed to store "02H" in the I register.
In particular, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the internal ROM 54, the value of the I register, that is, the upper byte value of the vector address, may be in the range of "00H" to "11H".

However, since the I register is initialized (to "00H") each time the gaming machine 10 is powered on, after the initialization, a process is executed to store, for example, "02H" in the I register again. As described above, for example, a program code "LD I, 02H" is provided, and a process is executed to store "02H" in the I register.
On the other hand, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is set to "00H" as in this embodiment, the I register value will be "00H", so after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the I register is initialized, there is no need to store a specific value in the I register. In other words, there is no need to provide a program code such as "LD I, 00H". This allows the program capacity to be reduced accordingly.

(7) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to eighth embodiments may be implemented in any suitable combination, rather than being implemented alone.

Ninth embodiment
The ninth embodiment relates to a slot machine 10 having a medal selector 110 for selecting medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47, a chute member 120 for guiding medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, and a return member 130 for guiding medals M not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the medal tray 19.

Hereinafter, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 105 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the ninth embodiment.
106, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion port 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a cross key 87 are added to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105, the slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening at the front, and a front door 12 attached so as to cover the opening of the cabinet 13.
The cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate and a left side plate (not shown), etc.
Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the opening at the front side of the cabinet 13 .

The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.
Specifically, the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 are attached via a hinge (not shown).
In addition, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion slot (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the locking device on the front surface of the front door 12. The door key insertion slot is a portion into which a door key for operating the locking device is inserted.
When the front door 12 is closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key slot and turning the door key clockwise in this state unlocks the door. When the front door 12 is unlocked and pulled, the front door 12 rotates about the hinges and opens.

Further, the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 is provided with a door switch 17 (FIG. 106) for detecting the opening of the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 (Figure 106).
The main control board 50 is configured to determine that the front door 12 is closed when the door switch 17 is off, and to determine that the front door 12 is open when the door switch 17 is on.

A display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12. The display window 18 is configured to be located in front of the symbol display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. The three reels 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be viewed through the display window 18.
In addition, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, etc. are provided below the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12 (the surface facing the player). The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion into which a player inserts medals M when betting or crediting medals M.

Furthermore, a medal payout opening 16 and a medal receiving tray 19 that receives medals M discharged from the medal payout opening 16 are provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12. The medal payout opening 16 is an opening through which medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 and medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 pass.
In addition, a medal selector 110 for sorting medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is provided at a position corresponding to the medal insertion port 47 on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the side facing the player).

Specifically, a selector base 113 (Figure 107) is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47, and a medal selector 110 is removably attached to this selector base 113.
The selector base 113, which is for detachably holding the medal selector 110, is formed by bending sheet metal and is fixed with screws to a position corresponding to the medal insertion port 47 on the rear surface of the front door 12. The medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113.

Furthermore, a chute member 120 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 for guiding the medals M that have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35 .
Furthermore, at a position on the back side of the front door 12 corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16, a return member 130 is provided for guiding medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal receiving tray 19.

A medal payout device 15 is disposed at the bottom inside the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals M, a hopper motor 36 (Fig. 106) that is driven when paying out medals M stored in the hopper 35, and a payout sensor 37 (Fig. 106) for detecting medals M paid out from the hopper 35.

The hopper 35 is for storing the medals M. In addition, a storage receiving port 35a, which is an opening for receiving the medals M guided by the chute member 120, is provided at the top of the hopper 35. The storage receiving port 35a opens downward from the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121).
As explained in the first embodiment, the dispensing sensor 37 is composed of a pair of dispensing sensors 37a and 37b (Figure 106) arranged at a predetermined interval.
When a medal M is paid out, a predetermined moving member (not shown) is moved by the medal M, and the movement of the predetermined moving member turns on/off the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b.

Also, in FIG. 106, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an output port 52, and the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51.
When the medals M are paid out from the medal payout device 15, the main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36.
In addition, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medals M have been normally paid out based on whether or not the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In Fig. 105, a power supply unit (not shown) is disposed at the bottom inside the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (Fig. 106) that is operated to turn the power on and off, a setting key switch 152 (Fig. 106) that is operated to transition to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (Fig. 106) that is operated to change the setting value and to cancel an error.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off.
Turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "powering on,""turning on the power," or "resume power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is operated to transition to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed, or to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 (Figure 106) and rotated clockwise by approximately 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and when the setting key is returned to its original position, the setting key switch 152 is turned off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 serves as both the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing a setting value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to cancel the error notification after the cause of the error has been removed.
In this way, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 when an error is notified.

Hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "setting change (reset) switch 153," a "setting change switch 153," or a "reset switch 153."
In addition, with regard to various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning them on may be referred to as "operating," the on state may be referred to as "being operated," and the off state may be referred to as "not being operated."
In the ninth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 serve as a single switch. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

In FIG. 106 , a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 .
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the on state, the state transitions to a setting change state, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned on with the power on, the state transitions to a setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, when the state transitions to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50. Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value is changed (increased by "1") each time the setting change switch 153 is operated. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change state ends, and the setting value display LED 73 goes out.
In addition, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the setting value display LED 73 goes out.

Next, the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130 will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 107 to 115.
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130, and is a diagram explaining the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
Figure 108 is a diagram in which a hopper 35 is added to Figure 107, and explains the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the hopper 35.

FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the width of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M.
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M.
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between one medal M that has fallen into the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and another medal M traveling from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. In FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the width of the medal guide passage 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that fixes the chute member 120.
Figure 113 is a diagram illustrating an example in which neither the return receiving opening 131 nor the upper edge portion 135 is located vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

Figure 114 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a blocking member 140 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and this blocking member 140 blocks a portion of the return receiving opening 131.
Figure 115 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is located vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

As shown in FIG. 107, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a roughly L-shape, and in FIG. 107, has a vertical section 111a extending roughly vertically downward from the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an inclined section 111b that gently inclines diagonally downward to the right from the bottom end of the vertical section 111a to the lower right side of the medal selector 110. An entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, an entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is positioned vertically below the medal insertion port 47. The medal M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 is sent to the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110.
Also, as shown in Figure 107, a blocker 45 for allowing/disallowing the insertion of a medal M is provided at the midpoint of the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111, and an insertion sensor 44 capable of detecting a medal M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided downstream of the blocker 45 on the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111.

The blocker 45 is used to permit/prohibit the insertion of a medal M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an output port 52 (Figure 106).
The main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 so as to not permit insertion of medals M during play (from the time when the reels 31 start to rotate, until all the reels 31 stop, and when a winning combination is achieved, until the end of the payout of medals M corresponding to the winning combination).

Furthermore, when a specified number of medals M have already been bet and the number of credits has reached an upper limit, no more medals M can be bet or credited, so the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to not permit insertion of medals M.
On the other hand, when no game is being played (after the payout of medals M has been completed and before the reels 31 start to rotate), if the number of medals M betted has not reached the specified number or the number of credits has not reached the upper limit, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to permit the insertion of medals M.

When insertion of medals M is not permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to remove medals M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and cause them to fall downward. In addition, medals M that fall downward after leaving the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 are guided by the return member 130 and discharged from the medal payout port 16, and stored in the medal tray 19.

In contrast, when the insertion of medals M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide the medals M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. Furthermore, the medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 pass through insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b (hereinafter both collectively referred to as "insertion sensor 44"), are discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, are guided by the chute member 120, and are stored in the hopper 35.

The insertion sensor 44 is for detecting the medal M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, and is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance, as shown in FIG. 107. The insertion sensor 44a is arranged on the upstream side, and the insertion sensor 44b is arranged on the downstream side. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 106).

The medal M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 is first detected by the upstream insertion sensor 44a, and then detected by the downstream insertion sensor 44b.
Specifically, when a medal M is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a first detects the medal M (changes from off to on).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream insertion sensor 44b next detects the medal M (changes from OFF to ON).

When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off).
When the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off).
Then, the main control board 50 determines whether the medal M has passed through the medal passage 111 normally based on whether the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b have been turned on/off within a specified time range, respectively.

The chute member 120 guides the medals M that have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 to the hopper 35 located at the bottom inside the cabinet 13, and is provided adjacent to the medal selector 110 on the back side of the front door 12.

The chute member 120 also has a medal guide passage 121 for guiding the medals M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.
The medal guide passage 121 is gently inclined so that its height gradually decreases from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.

In addition, in FIG. 107, when a medal M is permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and passes through the medal passage 111, it is discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. Here, the medal selector 110 is attached to the back surface of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. 105. Therefore, the exit 111d is located closer to the back surface of the front door 12. In contrast, the hopper 35 is located closer to the center inside the cabinet 13 as shown in FIG. 105. In other words, in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107, the hopper 35 is located closer to the front side than the exit 111d. Therefore, there is a certain distance between the exit 111d and the hopper 35. Therefore, the medal guide passage 121 is curved in an arc shape toward the hopper 35 side in order to guide the medal M discharged from the exit 111d toward the hopper 35 side.

107, the chute member 120 has a bottom portion 122 which constitutes the bottom surface of the medal guide passage 121, an inner wall portion 123 which constitutes the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121, and an outer wall portion 124 which constitutes the outer side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121. The upper part of the medal guide passage 121 is open.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110, the chute member 120 has a step portion 125 at a position on the bottom surface 122 corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage 121, the step portion 125 being lower on the hopper 35 (downstream) side than on the medal selector 110 (upstream) side.

As described above, the medal guide passage 121 is formed in a curved arc shape. Therefore, the medal M moves from the upstream side to the downstream side on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide passage 121, and its speed is decelerated by coming into contact with the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 midway through the medal guide passage 121.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110, a step 125 is provided at a position on the bottom surface 122 that corresponds to the middle of the medal guide path 121, where the downstream side is lower in height than the upstream side. Then, medals M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide path 121 are dropped at the step 125. This allows the medals M that have decelerated due to contact with the inner wall 123 and the outer wall 124 to be accelerated.

As shown in FIG. 107, a fixing portion 126 is provided near the end of the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 on the medal selector 110 side. The fixing portion 126 is for fixing the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124. The fixing portion 126 is also provided with a screw hole (not shown) that penetrates from the front side to the back side. Furthermore, the screw hole that penetrates the fixing portion 126 is provided above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

The chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a screw hole in the fixing portion 126. When the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by the screw 127, the screw 127 is located above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

Here, as shown in FIG. 109, the thickness of the medal M is set to "T".
110, the diameter of the medal M is "D" and the radius of the medal M is "R". Furthermore, the height of the step portion 125 is "H1", the height of the inner wall portion 123 is "H2", and the height of the outer wall portion 124 is "H3".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 112, the width of the medal guide passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124) is "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is "L3".

The width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the thickness "T" of the medal M, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "L1>T" and "L1<D." In other words, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M, and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This allows the medal M to move above the bottom portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 in an upright state.

Furthermore, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "H2<D" and "H3<D." In other words, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 is also lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This allows the medal M to move over the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 with the upper portion of the medal M protruding upward from the upper ends of the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124.

Furthermore, the height "H1" of the step portion 125, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius "R" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "H1<H2", "H1<H3", and "H1<R". In other words, the height "H1" of the step portion 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and lower (smaller) than the radius "R" of the medal M.
This prevents the medal M from climbing over the inner wall portion 123 or the outer wall portion 124 and flying out of the medal guide passage 121 when it falls from the step portion 125 .

The height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy "H2 = H3", or may be configured to satisfy "H2 <H3", or may be configured to satisfy "H2 >H3".
That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, or may be lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124.

Furthermore, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy "L1 <L2" and "L1 <L3." In other words, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head is thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
This prevents the removed screw 127 from entering the medal guide passage 121 even if the screw 127 comes off from the rear surface of the front door 12, so that the passage of the medal M is not hindered.
The screw 127 is also configured to satisfy the relationship "L2>L3". In other words, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. This allows the chute member 120 to be firmly fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the screw 127.

A locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member 120. This locking portion is for locking the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12. With the sheet member 120 locked to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a screw hole in the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not fall off the rear surface of the front door 12.

The medal insertion port 47 also has a medal placement section (not shown) on which multiple medals M can be placed in a lined up state. In the ninth embodiment, the medal placement section is capable of placing 10 medals M in a lined up state. Then, multiple medals M placed in a lined up state on the medal placement section can be inserted continuously from the medal insertion port 47.

When the thickness of the medal M is "T", the width of the medal guide passage 121 is "L1", and the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placement section is "M", the medal guide passage 121 is configured to satisfy "L1 < (M÷2) x T". In other words, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is narrower (smaller) than the thickness "(M÷2) x T" of half the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placement section of the medal insertion port 47.

The return member 130 is intended to guide medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110, and medals M that have been paid out from the medal payout device 15, to the medal receiving tray 19, and is provided at a position on the back side of the front door 12 corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout opening 16.
When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal payout passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in FIG.

The medal return passage 132 is a passage that guides medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 to the medal payout opening 16 .
Furthermore, the medal payout passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16 .
The medal return passage 132 and the medal payout passage 134 merge midway to form a single passage.

107, a return receiving opening 131 is provided on the upper part of the return member 130. The return receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving a medal M that has been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 and has fallen downward after falling out of the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, and is an opening that serves as the entrance to a medal return passage 132.
Then, the medal M, which is not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and falls downward off the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, passes through the return receiving port 131, is guided by the medal return passage 132, passes through the medal payout port 16, and is stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

Further, a payout receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the return member 130 and toward the right in Fig. 107. The payout receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15, and serves as an entrance to a medal payout passage 134, and is configured to be located in front of the medal payout device 15 when the front door 12 is closed.
Then, the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass through the payout receiving port 133, are guided by the medal payout passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

107, the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131 at the upper part of the return member 130 is referred to as the "upper edge 135." In other words, the upper edge 135 is a part that corresponds to the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131. When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal.
107, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. An upper edge portion 135 is disposed vertically below the gap 112. As a result, the return receiving opening 131 is not disposed vertically below the gap 112.

Also, as shown in FIG. 109, the thickness of the medal M is "T", the distance between the gaps 112 is "W", and the width of the upper edge 135 is "B".
The thickness "T" of the medal M and the space "W" of the gap 112 are configured to satisfy "W>T." In other words, the space "W" of the gap 112 is larger than the thickness "T" of the medal M. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 111, the medal M can be inserted into the gap 112.
More specifically, it is configured to satisfy "W ≈ 2 × T". In other words, the width "W" of the gap 112 is set to be approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, "2" medals M can be placed in the gap 112.

Furthermore, an upper edge 135 is disposed vertically below the gap 112, and is configured so that the thickness "T" of the medal M, the spacing "W" of the gap 112, and the width "B" of the upper edge 135 satisfy "B>T" and "B>W." In other words, the width "B" of the upper edge 135 is greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M and greater than the spacing "W" of the gap 112. In addition, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal. Therefore, the medal M inserted in the gap 112 can be placed on the upper edge 135.

For example, a hall attendant may place a medal M in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 during maintenance of the medal selector 110. At this time, the medal M rests on the upper edge 135, so that the medal M can be kept in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
However, there may be cases where a store attendant in the hall closes the front door 12 forgetting that the medal M is still in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. In this case, the medal M falls out of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed.

At this time, the upper edge 135 is located vertically below the gap 112, and the return receiving port 131 is not located there, so the medal M that falls from the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving port 131. Therefore, the medal M that falls from the gap 112 does not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and reach the medal tray 19. This makes it possible to prevent the medal M that has been placed in the gap 112 by a hall staff member for maintenance of the medal selector 110 from being given to the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 108, the gap 112 is positioned above the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35. In other words, the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35 opens at a position lower than the gap 112. This allows medals M that fall from the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed to fall into the storage receiving port 35a, and can therefore be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, as described above, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, so when "one" medal M is inserted into the gap 112, there is a gap between the gap 112 and the medal M, so that the "one" medal M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.
When the front door 12 is closed with this "one" medal M in the gap 112, this "one" medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time, falls into the storage receiving port 35a, and is stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "two" medals M are placed in the gap 112, the "two" medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.
When the front door 12 is closed with these "2" medals M remaining in the gap 112, just as when the front door 12 is closed with "1" medal M remaining in the gap 112, the medal falls from the gap 112 due to the impact of closing the front door 12, falls into the storage receiving port 35a, and is stored in the hopper 35.

Conversely, if the width "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, then "2" medals M will be pushed into the gap 112. In this case, there is no case where the pushed-in "2" medals M cannot be removed from the gap 112.
However, if the front door 12 is closed with the “2” medals M still pushed into the gap 112 , there is a possibility that the “2” medals M may remain in the gap 112 .

As shown in FIG. 111, the medal M that is inserted into the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 remains in the gap 112, blocking the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. Therefore, when one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 hits the one medal M in the gap 112 and stops when it passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

In addition, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 hits one medal M in the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M in the gap 112 is located above the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. Therefore, the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111 will not climb over the one medal M in the gap 112.
Therefore, when one medal M has entered the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

In addition, it is not possible to directly detect whether a medal M is remaining in the gap 112, but as described above, when one medal M is remaining in the gap 112, another medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 will hit the one medal M in the gap 112 and stop. At this time, the other medal M will be stuck near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, causing the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b to remain on.

In addition, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which the medal M is stuck (remains) in the medal selector 110, and notifies the user of this fact. This makes it possible to indirectly detect that the medal M is stuck in the gap 112. The detection and notification of errors will be described later.

Furthermore, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by the screw 127 , the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the screw 127 .
Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131. Therefore, the removed screw 127 will not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and reach the medal tray 19.

As shown in FIG. 106, the medal selector 110 is also equipped with a passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine the presence or absence of errors such as clogging (retention) of medals M, cheating, etc. Although not shown in FIG. 107, the passage sensor 46 is provided in the vertical portion 111a of the medal passage 111. In other words, the passage sensor 46 is provided upstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111.

For this reason, the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is first detected by the passage sensor 46. Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 is in a state in which the insertion of the medal M is permitted (on state) or not permitted (off state).

Although not shown in Figures 105 to 115, the chute member 120 is equipped with a chute sensor in the middle of the medal guide passage 121. Like the passage sensor 46, the chute sensor is a sensor provided to determine whether there is an error in which medals M become clogged (stagnated) or whether cheating has occurred. Since the chute member 120 is intended to guide medals M that have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is provided downstream of the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b.

In addition, the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 .
It is to be noted that both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided, or neither of them may be provided.

Next, detection of an error, notification of an error, and cancellation of the error notification in the ninth embodiment will be described.
For example, when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected an error in which a medal M is jammed (remains) in the medal selector 110 (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention error"), and issues a notification indicating the selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating the selector retention error (for example, "CE") on the winning number display LED 78 as the selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector congestion error, it transmits a command indicating the selector congestion error (hereinafter referred to as the “selector congestion command”) to the sub-control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stuck command, it executes a selector stuck notification by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the selector stuck notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23.

Also, for example, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not turn on in this order (the medal M does not pass normally), the main control board 50 determines that it has detected an error in which the medal M does not pass normally (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passing error"), and issues an alert indicating the selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passing error alert").

As described above, when a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the insertion sensor 44b changes from off to on, next the insertion sensor 44a changes from on to off, and finally the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.
When the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b turn on/off in the above-mentioned order, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through normally, and when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not turn on/off in the above-mentioned order, it determines that a selector passing error has been detected.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has normally passed through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, it executes a process of adding "1" to the bet number or credit number for that medal M.
In response to this, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays a code indicating the selector passage error (for example, "CP") on the winning number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, it transmits a command indicating the selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as the “selector passing error command”) to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passing error command, it issues a selector passing error notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the selector passing error notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23.

It should be noted that it may be determined that a selector passing error (or a selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on while the input sensor 44a is in the off state.
In addition, it may be determined that a selector pass error (or selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, and finally the input sensor 44a changes from on to off.

Furthermore, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time from when it detects the medal M, and no longer detects the medal M after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the passage sensor 46 first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Furthermore, when the passage sensor 46 no longer detects the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since it detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

In addition, when the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time from the time it detects the medal M, and the medal M is no longer detected after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally.
In contrast, if the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the chute sensor detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Furthermore, if the chute sensor no longer detects the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since it detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has been detected.

The main control board 50 also includes an input monitoring counter (not shown).
The insertion monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented by "1" when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally while the blocker 45 is in the on state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is permitted), and is decremented by "1" when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally. Therefore, the insertion monitoring counter alternates between "1" and "0" under normal circumstances.
When the blocker 45 is in the off state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is not permitted), the insertion monitoring counter is not incremented by "1" even if the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46.
In addition, the insertion monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from an off state (a state in which the passage of medals M is not permitted) to an on state (a state in which the passage of medals M is permitted).

When the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes normally through the passage sensor 46, and subtracts "1" from the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes normally through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b.
When the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the passage sensor 46 does not detect the passage of the medal M, and only the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 determines that a insertion monitoring error has been detected.

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of a medal M, but the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of a medal M, and then the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of a medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 determines that a insertion monitoring error has been detected.

In addition, the insertion monitoring counter may be a counter that adds "1" when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally when the blocker 45 is in the on state, and subtracts "1" when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.
In other words, when the blocker 45 is on, the main control board 50 may add "1" to the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, and may subtract "1" from the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.

When the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of a medal M, but the chute sensor does not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b further detect the passage of a medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 may determine that an insertion monitoring error has been detected.
In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M and only the chute sensor detects the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 may determine that an insertion monitoring error has been detected.

The normal value of the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1". In other words, the main control board 50 does not necessarily determine that an input monitoring error has occurred when the input monitoring counter reaches "2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or more, or a predetermined value of "-2" or less.

In addition, when the main control board 50 increments/decrements the input monitoring counter using the input signal from the aisle sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b, it clears the input monitoring counter when the blocker 45 is changed from the off state to the on state.
However, when the main control board 50 increments/decrements the input monitoring counter using input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor, the main control board 50 may or may not clear the input monitoring counter when the blocker 45 is changed from the off state to the on state.
In other words, when the input monitoring counter is incremented/decremented by the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor, it may be cleared or not cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

Also, a feed monitoring counter for the passage sensor 46 and a feed monitoring counter for the chute sensor may be provided separately.
That is, the input monitoring counter may include a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter.
The first input monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented/decremented by an input signal from the passage sensor 46 and input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Furthermore, the second input monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented/decremented by input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and an input signal from the chute sensor.

In other words, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the first insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and subtracts "1" from the first insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally.
Then, the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected when the first input monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value below "-1" or a predetermined value above "2").

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the second insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, and subtracts "1" from the second insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.
Then, the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected when the second input monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value below "-1" or a predetermined value above "2").

For example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected an error in which no medals M are stored in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty error"), and issues a notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a hopper empty error (for example, "HE") on the winning number display LED 78 (Figure 106) as a hopper empty notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it sends a command indicating that the hopper is empty (hereinafter referred to as an “empty command”) to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, it executes a hopper empty notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the hopper empty notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23.

For example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error in which medals M are jammed in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam error") has been detected, and issues an alert indicating the hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam alert"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a hopper jam error (for example, "HP") on the winning number display LED 78 as a hopper jam alert.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it sends a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as the “hopper jam command”) to the sub-control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it executes a hopper jam alert using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the hopper jam alert, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Hopper jam" on the image display device 23.

When any of the above-mentioned various errors are detected, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the various error notifications are released.
Furthermore, when the causes of the various errors described above are removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the various errors, but once the various error notifications have been issued, they will not be released simply by removing the cause of the corresponding error (the error will no longer be detected), and will continue until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will release the various error notifications.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open (hereinafter referred to as "door open") by the door switch 17 being turned on, it issues a notification indicating that the front door 12 is open (hereinafter referred to as "door open notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (e.g., "dE") indicating that the front door 12 is open on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door open notification.
In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open by the door switch 17 being turned on, it sends a command indicating that the front door 12 is open (hereinafter referred to as the ``door open command'') to the sub-control board 80.

Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it executes a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

In addition, a release switch (not shown) for releasing the door open notification is provided near the locking device on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player). When the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot and turned counterclockwise about 45 degrees in this state, the release switch changes from off to on. In other words, when the door key is turned about 45 degrees in the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12, the release switch changes from off to on.
As described above, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot and turned 90 degrees clockwise in this state, the lock is released. When the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge and opens.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, but once the door open notification is executed, it is not released simply by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, but continues until the release switch is changed from off to on.
Then, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) by about 45 degrees to turn the release switch from off to on, thereby cancelling the door open notification.

In this way, the operation of turning the door key in the opposite direction to that for unlocking the front door 12 is the operation for canceling the door open notification.
Furthermore, when the door open notification is released, the main control board 50 causes the acquired number display LED 78 to display the acquired number before displaying "dE".
Furthermore, when the release switch changes from off to on, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the release of the door open notification (hereinafter referred to as the "notification release command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it ends the door open notification that has been being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

Next, the operation modes when an error is detected, an error is notified, and an error is released in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
116 to 123 are time charts showing the operation modes when an error is detected and when an error is released in the ninth embodiment.
FIG. 116 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the selector retention error is removed, and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 is closed.

116, when a selector congestion error occurs at the timing of "X11", the main control board 50 detects the selector congestion error. In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 execute a selector congestion notification.
116, when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the main control board 50 displays "CE", which indicates a selector retention error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stuck command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stuck notification, and displays the words "Selector stuck error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing "X12" in Figure 116, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door opening).
116, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X12", the door switch 17 turns on and the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects that the front door 12 is open, and continues the selector retention notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is open to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it will not execute the door open notification and will continue the selector dwell notification.

After that, at the timing of "X13" in Figure 116, when the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed, that is, when the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector retention error. However, once the selector retention notification has been issued, it will not be released simply by removing the cause of the selector retention error (the selector retention error will no longer be detected), and will continue until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on).

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing "X14" in FIG. 116, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error reset command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it resets the selector dwell notification that had been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

However, at the timing of "X14" in Fig. 116, even if the reset switch 153 is operated to release the selector stuck notification, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. Then, when the main control board 50 releases the selector stuck notification, it then issues a door open notification using the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE", which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE", which indicates the front door 12 is open (door open).
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector dwell notification, this time it executes a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as the door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message saying "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

After that, when the front door 12 is closed at the timing of "X15" in FIG. 116, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects that the front door 12 is open. However, once the door open notification has been issued, it cannot be released simply by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, and will continue until the release switch is operated (turned on).

116, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before the error code was displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 to release the door open notification.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

FIG. 117 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error.
In FIG. 117, at the timing of "X21", when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE", indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stuck command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stuck notification, and displays the words "Selector stuck error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X22" in Figure 117, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened.
However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification.
In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is open to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it will not execute the door open notification and will continue the selector dwell notification.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, i.e., the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector retention notification.

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it resets the selector dwell notification that had been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.
However, in FIG. 117, the selector retention notification is once cancelled at the timing of "X23", but thereafter, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed again.

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117 in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stuck notification and instead controls to execute a door open notification. After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stuck notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "CE", which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at the timing of "X24", controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "CE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stuck command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 117.

In addition, when an error clear command is received at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the selector stuck notification and controls the system to execute a door open notification this time. After that, when a selector stuck command is received at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to execute a selector stuck notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open". Then, at the timing of "X24", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error".

Here, various errors such as selector congestion errors, selector passing errors, hopper empty errors, hopper jam errors, etc. are managed (detected, notified, released) by the main control board 50, but door opening is sometimes managed (detected, notified, released) by the main control board 50 and sometimes managed (detected, notified, released) by the sub-control board 80.
In addition, the door open notification may be deactivated (terminated) when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the door was detected as open, when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, or when the release switch is operated (from off to on, or from off to on and back to off) with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off.

Furthermore, the door open notification can be displayed in three ways: a code such as "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, a voice output such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, and a text display such as "Door open" on the image display device 23; a voice output such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and a text display such as "Door open" on the image display device 23; a voice output such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 only, or a text display such as "Door open" on the image display device 23 only.

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, depending on the content of the processing executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", the time required from "X23" to "X24" may be extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) so as not to be discernible by human perception, or it may be relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) so as to be discernible by human perception.
For this reason, by combining the various cases described above, various operating modes are possible between the time when the selector stagnant notification is temporarily cancelled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117 and the time when the selector stagnant notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

That is, in FIG. 117, between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", there are cases where the door open notification is executed and cases where the door open notification is not executed.
In addition, in FIG. 117, when a door open notification is executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", there are times when it is possible for a human being to recognize that the door open notification has been executed visually or audibly, and times when it is not possible for a human being to recognize that the door open notification has been executed, or when it is recognized only for an instant.

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, if the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", there are times when it is possible for a human to visually or aurally recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and then executed again, and times when it is not possible for a human to visually or aurally recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and then executed again, or when it is recognized, it is only for an instant.

For example, door opening may be managed by the main control board 50, and the door open notification may be released (ended) when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off. The door open notification may be displayed in three ways: a code such as "dE" on the acquisition count display LED 78, a voice such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, and text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.

In this case, in FIG. 117, the door open notification can be executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in FIG. 117, if the time required from canceling the selector dwell notification at timing "X23" until the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24" is relatively long enough to be recognized by human perception (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), then when the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", this door open notification can be recognized by human vision and hearing.

In contrast to this, if the time required from canceling the selector dwell notification at timing "X23" in FIG. 117 until the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24" is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) so as not to be noticeable to human perception, even if a door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it will be difficult for humans to perceive this door open notification visually or audibly.
However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so extremely short that it cannot be recognized by human perception, there are cases in which the human hearing can recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled at the timing of "X23" and then re-executed at the timing of "X24".

That is, when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily released at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call an attendant" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning. Therefore, since it sounds like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, it is possible for a human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been released and then executed again.
In addition, when an alarm sound such as "beep" or "beep" is output from the speaker 22 as the selector dwell notification, the human hearing may not be able to recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and then executed again, or even if it is recognized, it is only for an instant.

In addition, for example, door opening may be managed by the sub-control board 80, and the condition for canceling (terminating) the door open notification may be the lapse of a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) from the detection of door opening, and the door open notification may be implemented in two ways: by outputting a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, and by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.
In this case, if the selector dwell notification is cancelled and then executed again before a predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of door opening, the door open notification can be executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" in FIG. 117 and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24".

In contrast, the door open notification is not executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the door open detection, so if the selector dwell notification is cancelled and then executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the door open detection, the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" in FIG. 117 and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24".

Also, in FIG. 117, if the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", there are times when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to a degree that can be recognized by human perception.
In this case, between "X23" and "X24", the winning number display LED 78 displays the winning number before "CE" was displayed, the speaker 22 outputs the sound before outputting the sound "Please call an attendant", and the image display device 23 displays the screen before displaying the words "SELECTOR ERROR" (for example, the game screen or game standby screen). These displays between "X23" and "X24" can be recognized by human eyesight and hearing. Therefore, it is also possible for human eyesight and hearing to recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and then executed again.

Also, in FIG. 117, if the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", there are times when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) that it cannot be detected by human perception.
In this case, it is difficult for humans to visually or aurally recognize the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 and the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22, between "X23" and "X24."

However, when the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call an attendant" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted halfway, and when the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so that it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stuck notification was cancelled and then executed again.

In addition, in FIG. 117, the following patterns (1) to (6) are possible patterns of processing that may be executed between "X23" and "X24".
(1) A pattern in which the selector congestion notification is once released and then executed again in the same interrupt processing (FIG. 47). (2) A pattern in which the selector congestion notification is once released and then executed again in the next interrupt processing.

(3) A pattern in which the selector jam notification is cancelled once in one interrupt process and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, where multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector jam notification is cancelled and the time the selector jam notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. (4) A pattern in which the selector jam notification is cancelled once in one interrupt process and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, where multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector jam notification is cancelled and the time the selector jam notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

(5) A pattern in which the selector dwell notification is cancelled once in one interrupt process and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, where a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. (6) A pattern in which the selector dwell notification is cancelled once in one interrupt process and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, where a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

First, the above-mentioned (1) pattern of once canceling the selector stagnation notification and then executing the selector stagnation notification again in the same interrupt process will be described.
In this case, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches (reset switch 153, etc.) and various sensors (insertion sensor 44a, input sensor 44b, etc.). Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the input error check processing (step S463) is started, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and when it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes a selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Moreover, the release of the selector congestion notification and the re-issuance of the selector congestion notification are executed by the same interrupt process. Furthermore, the interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector congestion notification to the execution of the re-issuance of the selector congestion notification is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

For this reason, in FIG. 117, the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", and then executed again at the timing of "X24". However, it is difficult for the human eye or ear to perceive the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 and the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 between "X23" and "X24".

However, when the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call an attendant" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted halfway, and when the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so that it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stuck notification was cancelled and then executed again.

Next, a pattern in which the selector retention notification is once cancelled in the above-mentioned (2)-1 interrupt process and then re-executed in the next interrupt process will be described.
In this case, as in the case of the above pattern (1), when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Then, as in the case of pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) in the main processing (FIG. 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag memory area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
However, unlike the above pattern (1), in one interrupt process, the selector stuck notification is cleared, and in the main process executed after that, an error process is executed to stop the game progress as a selector stuck error state. Then, in the interrupt process executed after that, the selector stuck notification is executed again. Therefore, the time required from the clearing of the selector stuck notification to the execution of the selector stuck notification again is about the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

In this case, too, the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, and then executed again at the timing of "X24". However, it is difficult for the human eye or ear to perceive the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 and image display device 23, or the sound from the speaker 22, between "X23" and "X24".

However, when the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call an attendant" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted halfway, and when the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so that it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stuck notification was cancelled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector hold notification is cancelled once in the above (3)-1 interrupt process, and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, in which multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector hold notification is cancelled once and the time the selector hold notification is executed again, and in which the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector dwell notification.

After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) in the main processing (FIG. 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector stuck error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is released by the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error release command to the sub control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, in the "Z"th interrupt process ("Z" is an integer), the selector stuck notification is temporarily released, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stuck error state is temporarily released. Then, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the number of wins before "CE" was displayed is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, a selector stuck error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector stuck error state. Then, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, a selector stuck notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector congestion notification to the execution of the next selector congestion notification is about the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8.94 ms).
Therefore, in FIG. 117, the selector dwell notification is once cancelled at the timing of "X23", and then the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". However, between "X23" and "X24", it is difficult for human eyes and ears to recognize the displays on the acquisition number display LED 78 and the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22.

However, when the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call an attendant" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted halfway, and when the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant", for example, so that it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stuck notification was cancelled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector hold notification is cancelled once in the above (4)-1 interrupt process, and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, in which multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector hold notification is cancelled once and the time the selector hold notification is executed again, and during that time the door open notification is executed.

In this case, as in the case of pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector dwell notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above. When it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
After that, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) in the main processing (FIG. 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the memory area of the error flag, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is put into the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE", indicating that the door is open, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, it cancels the door open notification, and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117. Then, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in the "Z"th interrupt process ("Z" is an integer), the selector stuck notification is cleared and the door open is detected, and in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the game progress as the door is open. Then, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, a door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the door open notification is cleared and a selector stuck error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the game progress as the selector stuck error state. Then, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, a selector stuck notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector congestion notification to the execution of the next selector congestion notification is about the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8.94 ms).
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification is not recognized by the human eye or ear, or even if it is recognized, it is only for an instant. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is cancelled once in the above (5)-1 interrupt processing, and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, in which a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) elapses between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled once and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and in which the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in the case of the above pattern (1), when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.
Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the timer setting process (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector retention notification was released.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector stuck error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is released by the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error release command to the sub control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to an elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector dwell notification was released.
Then, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stuck notification was released, and the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector stuck error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector stuck error in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector retention notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily released, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation notification was released. In the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily released. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of wins before displaying "CE" is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and an error release command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation notification was released, a selector stagnation error is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector stagnation error state. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation notification is executed, and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, after the selector dwell notification is once cancelled, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required before the selector dwell notification is executed again.
Also, in FIG. 117, between the time when the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" and the time when the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but displays the screen before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" were displayed (for example, a game screen or a game waiting screen).

Therefore, in FIG. 117, between the time when the selector stagnant notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnant notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human being to visually and aurally recognize that the selector stagnant notification has been cancelled.
In addition, instead of the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed between canceling the selector dwell notification and executing the selector dwell notification again, the condition may be, for example, that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off.
In this case too, in FIG. 117, at timing "X23", the selector stagnant notification is once cancelled, and at timing "X24", the selector stagnant notification is executed again, and between this time the cancellation of the selector stagnant notification can be recognized by human eyes and ears.

In addition, in the above (5)-1 interrupt processing, when the selector hold notification is once cancelled and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) is required to pass between the time the selector hold notification is cancelled and the time the selector hold notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. As an example of such a pattern, the following is also conceivable.

First, in the interrupt process (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector dwell notification.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector stuck error state.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is released by the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "CE" on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error release command to the sub control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt process (Figure 47), if the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector stuck error state has been entered in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the timer set processing (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector stuck error state was entered.
In the subsequent interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to an elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector retention error state was established.

Then, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stuck error state occurred, the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), and the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, in FIG. 117, the selector dwell notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.

In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector stuck notification is temporarily cleared, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stuck error state is temporarily cleared. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of wins before "CE" is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and an error clear command is sent to the sub-control board 80. If a selector stuck error is detected in the interrupt process executed thereafter, an error process is executed in the main process executed thereafter to stop the progress of the game as a selector stuck error state, and in the interrupt process executed thereafter, a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stuck error state was entered. Then, in the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stuck error state was entered, a selector stuck notification is executed and a selector stuck command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, after the selector dwell notification is once cancelled, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required before the selector dwell notification is executed again.
Also, in FIG. 117, during the period between canceling the selector stuck notification at the timing of "X23" and executing the selector stuck notification again at the timing of "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but displays the screen before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" were displayed (for example, a game screen or a game standby screen).

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, during the period between canceling the selector stuck notification at the timing of "X23" and executing the selector stuck notification again at the timing of "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not output the voice "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22, but outputs the voice that preceded the voice "Please call an attendant".
Therefore, in FIG. 117, between the time when the selector stagnant notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector stagnant notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human being to visually and aurally recognize that the selector stagnant notification has been cancelled.

Finally, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is cancelled once in the above (6)-1 interrupt processing, and then executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, in which a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) elapses between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled once and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and during that time the door open notification is executed.

In this case, as in the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector dwell notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above. When it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the error flag indicating the door being open is stored.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the memory area of the error flag, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is put into the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since storing an error flag indicating that the door is open.
Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating that the door is open, and the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117. Then, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
In one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is temporarily cancelled, door opening is detected, and a timer is set to measure the time that has elapsed since the door opening was detected. In the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as the door is open. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, a door open notification is executed, and a door open command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opening was detected, the door open notification is cancelled, and a selector dwell error is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as the selector dwell error state. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, a selector dwell notification is executed, and a selector dwell command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, after the selector dwell notification is once cancelled, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required before the selector dwell notification is executed again.
Also, in FIG. 117, after the selector stuck notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", until the selector stuck notification is executed again at the timing of "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but displays the words "DOOR OPEN".

Therefore, in FIG. 117, between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human being to visually and aurally recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and that the door open notification has been executed.
In addition, instead of the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed between canceling the selector dwell notification and executing the selector dwell notification again, the condition may be, for example, that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off.
In this case too, in FIG. 117, between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human being to visually and aurally recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and that the door open notification has been executed.

In addition, the system measures the time that has elapsed since detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating that the door is open, and executes a door open notification until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed, and during that time, the door open notification is not canceled even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated. This ensures that the system can notify the driver that the front door 12 is open.

The same applies when an error such as a selector stuck error is detected. In other words, the time that has elapsed since an error such as a selector stuck error was detected and an error flag indicating this was stored is measured, and an error notification such as a selector stuck error notification is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed, and during that time, the error notification such as the selector stuck error notification is not cancelled even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated. This makes it possible to reliably notify that an error such as a selector stuck error has been detected.

In FIG. 117, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector stuck error as an example, but in the case of a selector passing error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error, it will operate in the same way as when a selector stuck error occurs.

For example, in FIG. 117, if the hopper motor 36 is driven at the timing of "X21" but the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off, the main control board 50 will determine that a hopper empty error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it displays "HE" indicating a hopper empty error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper empty alert, and sends an empty command indicating a hopper empty error to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives an empty command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper empty notification, and displays the words "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, at the timing "X22" in Figure 117, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.

However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it will not execute the door open notification and will continue the hopper empty notification.
In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the hopper empty alert is being issued, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it will not issue a door open alert and will continue to issue the hopper empty alert.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 117, when no medals M are stored in the hopper 35, i.e., when the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the hopper empty alert.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the hopper empty notification that had been being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

However, in FIG. 117, although the hopper empty notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", the hopper empty notification is then executed again at the timing of "X24".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117 in a situation where the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification and controls to execute a door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X24" in Fig. 117, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the hopper empty notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "HE", which indicates a hopper empty error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at the timing of "X24", controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "HE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 sends an empty command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 117.

In addition, when an error clear command is received at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the hopper empty notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification this time. After that, when an empty command is received at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper empty notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Hopper empty" to "Door open". Then, at the timing of "X24", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Hopper empty".

Also, for example, when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on at the timing of "X21" in Figure 117, and then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector pass error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays "CP", indicating a selector passage error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification, and sends a selector passage error command indicating the selector passage error to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector passing error command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector passing error notification, and displays the words "Selector error" on the image display device 23.
Thereafter, at the timing "X22" in Figure 117, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.
However, while the selector passing error notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector passing error notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the sub-control board 80 is executing the selector passing error notification, even if it receives a door opening command, it will not execute the door opening notification and will continue to notify the selector passing error.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector passage error has not been removed (the input sensor 44b turns from off to on, and then the input sensor 44a turns from off to on, so that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector passage error notification.

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it cancels the selector passing error notification that has been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.
Here, although the selector passing error notification is cancelled, since the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 now determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and executes a selector retention notification at timing "X24".

Specifically, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 117, when the cause of the selector passing error has not been removed (the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, and then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, causing the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b to remain on), if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the selector passing error notification and controls the main control board 50 to execute a door open notification.
Since the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b continue to remain on after that, the main control board 50 determines that it has now detected a selector stuck error, and controls the door open notification to be cancelled and the selector stuck notification to be executed at the timing of "X24" in Figure 117.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "CP", which indicates a selector pass error, to "dE", which indicates the opening of the front door 12.
Thereafter, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "dE", indicating that the front door 12 is open, to "CE", indicating a selector retention error.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80 at timing "X24" in FIG.

Also, when an error clear command is received at the timing of "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the selector passing error notification and then controls the system to execute a door open notification.
Thereafter, when a selector dwell command is received at the timing of "X24" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and instead controls to execute the selector dwell notification.

In other words, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the voice output from the speaker 22 to be changed from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and the display on the image display device 23 to be changed from "Selector error" to "Door open."
Thereafter, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the voice output from the speaker 22 to be changed from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and controls the display on the image display device 23 to be changed from "Door open" to "Selector error."

In this way, when a selector passing error is detected, a selector passing error notification is executed, and thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector passing error has not been removed, the selector passing error is released, and then a selector retention error is detected and a selector retention notification is executed.
As described above, when a selector stuck error is detected, a selector stuck notification is executed. If the reset switch 153 is operated after that in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the selector stuck notification may be cancelled once and then executed again.
In other words, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, there are times when the same error notification is executed before and after the operation of the reset switch 153, and times when different error notifications are executed before and after the operation of the reset switch 153.

In Fig. 117, the selector passing error notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23", but there are cases where the door open notification is not executed at this timing. And there are cases where the selector dwell notification is executed at the timing of "X24" without executing the door open notification.
For example, in the same interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when reading the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47), input error checking (step S463 in FIG. 47), and error processing (not shown) are performed, a door open notification is not performed.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (such as the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b). Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the input error check processing (step S463) is started, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data described above, and when it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
Thereafter, when the interrupt process (FIG. 47) proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and executes a selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector passing error notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, the release of the selector passage error notification and the selector congestion notification are executed in the same interrupt process, so the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector congestion notification is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

In addition, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the input port 51 is read (step S457 in Figure 47) and an input error check (step S463 in Figure 47) is performed, and in the main processing (Figure 46) that is executed thereafter, even if error processing (not shown) is performed, the door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

After that, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is also cancelled at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector dwell notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector passing error notification is released, and in the main process executed after that, the progress of the game is stopped as a selector retention error state, and in the interrupt process executed after that, the selector retention notification is executed this time. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passing error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is about the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

In Fig. 117, at the timing of "X23", the selector passing error notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed, but there are cases where the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by the human eye or ear, or even if it is recognized, it is only for an instant. Then, at the timing of "X24", there are cases where the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed.
In some cases, multiple interrupt processes are required between the time when the input port 51 is read and an input error check is performed in the interrupt process and the time when the error processing is performed in the main process. In such a case, a door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by the human eye or ear, or if it can be recognized, it is only for an instant.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals of the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the input signals that have been read, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when the input error check processing (step S463) is started, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above. When it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.
After that, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) in the main processing (FIG. 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the memory area of the error flag, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Thereafter, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is put into the open state in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to the LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

After that, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, it cancels the door open notification, and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stuck error state is reached in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE", indicating a selector stuck error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Thereafter, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector passing error notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117. Then, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector retention notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in the "Z"th interrupt process ("Z" is an integer), the selector passing error notification is cleared and the door open is detected, and in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the game progress as the door is open. Then, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, a door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the door open notification is cleared and a selector stuck error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the game progress as the selector stuck error state. Then, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, a selector stuck notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passing error notification to the execution of the selector dwell notification is about the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms).During that time, the door open notification is executed.
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in Fig. 117, the selector passing error notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by the human eye or ear, or even if it is recognized, it is only for an instant. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed.

In addition, the sub-control board 80 stores an error history in a specified storage area of the RWM 83, and is capable of displaying the stored error history when a request to display the error history is made.
In the ninth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation state.
Specifically, when the power is on, the machine is in game standby mode (before game starts) and the number of bets is "0", if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the machine transitions to a setting confirmation state.

When the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the administrator is displayed on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the administrator menu screen has an "Error History" item.
Then, while the administrator menu screen is displayed, the cross key (Figure 106) is operated to select the "Error History" item, and in this state, the push button 86 is operated (turned on), and the error history screen is displayed on the image display device 23.

The error history screen also displays an error code indicating the type of error (for example, "CE", "CP", "dE", etc.) and the time the error was reported (for example, "September 17, 2021, 15:35:25" etc.).
Here, for example, in FIG. 117, at timing "X21", a selector dwell notification is executed, at timing "X23", the selector dwell notification is temporarily released and a door open notification is executed, and at timing "X24", the door open notification is released and the selector dwell notification is executed again.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17th, 2021, 15:35:25 "dE" September 17th, 2021, 15:36:45 "CE" September 17th, 2021, 15:36:45

Also, for example, in FIG. 117, a selector dwell notification is executed at timing "X21", the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23", but a door open notification is not executed, and then, at timing "X24", a selector dwell notification is executed again without the door open notification being executed.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45

Also, for example, in FIG. 117, at timing "X21", a selector passing error notification is executed, at timing "X23", the selector passing error notification is temporarily released and a door open notification is executed, and at timing "X24", the door open notification is released and this time a selector dwell notification is executed.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17th, 2021, 15:35:25 "dE" September 17th, 2021, 15:36:45 "CP" September 17th, 2021, 15:36:45

Also, for example, in FIG. 117, a selector passing error notification is executed at timing "X21", the selector passing error notification is cancelled at timing "X23", but a door opening notification is not executed, and then, at timing "X24", a selector dwell notification is executed without executing the door opening notification.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17th, 2021, 15:35:25 "CP" September 17th, 2021, 15:36:45

The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub-button 86, a performance button 86, a performance switch 86, etc., and is operated when progressing (developing) a performance, etc.
The cross key 87 is also called a selection switch 87 and is operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like.
The push button 86 and the cross key 87 are electrically connected to the sub-control means 80 via the input port 81 .
Furthermore, the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on/off or by changing the settings. The error history will not be erased unless a serious error (an unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be executed, and when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation to cancel the specified error notification, i.e., operation of reset switch 153, is performed, the specified error notification is once canceled and then the specified error notification can be executed again.
This makes it possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally, and also to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

FIG. 118 is a time chart showing the operation modes when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 open.
In FIG. 118, at the timing of "X31", when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE", indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stuck command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stuck notification, and displays the words "Selector stuck error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X32" in Figure 118, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.
However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification.

In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it will not execute the door open notification and will continue the selector dwell notification.

After that, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118, when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, i.e., the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector retention notification.

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it resets the selector dwell notification that had been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.
However, in FIG. 118, although the selector retention notification is once cancelled at the timing of "X33", the selector retention notification is thereafter executed again at the timing of "X34".

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118 in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stuck notification and instead controls to execute a door open notification. After that, at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stuck notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "CE", which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at the timing of "X34", controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "CE". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stuck command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 118.

In addition, when an error clear command is received at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 clears the selector stuck notification and controls the system to execute a door open notification this time. After that, when a selector stuck command is received at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to execute a selector stuck notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open". After that, at the timing of "X34", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error".

After that, at the timing of "X35" in Figure 118, when the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed, that is, when the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector retention error. However, simply removing the cause of the selector retention error (no longer detecting the selector retention error) will not release the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it resets the selector dwell notification that had been being performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

However, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 118, even though the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the selector stuck notification, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on, so the main control board 50 now issues a door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE", which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

In addition, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stuck notification and then issues a door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and controls the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open."

After that, at the timing of "X37" in FIG. 118, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open, i.e., while the door switch 17 remains on, the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

In addition, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is left open (the door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 does not send an alert release command indicating the cancellation of the door open alert to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is on), the sub-control board 80 continues to execute the door open notification without releasing it.

Here, in FIG. 118, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error, is explained using the selector stuck error as an example. However, in the case of a selector passing error, hopper empty error, and hopper jam error, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when a selector stuck error occurs.

For example, in FIG. 118, when the dispensing sensor 37a remains off and the dispensing sensor 37b remains on at the timing of "X31", the main control board 50 determines that a hopper jam error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it displays "HP" indicating a hopper jam error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a hopper jam alert, and sends a hopper jam command indicating the hopper jam error to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a hopper jam command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam alert, and displays the words "Hopper jam error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X32" in Figure 118, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door is open.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being executed, even if the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the hopper jam notification.
In addition, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80 .
However, while the hopper jam alert is being issued, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it will not issue a door open alert and will continue to issue the hopper jam alert.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X33" in Figure 118, when medals M remain stuck in the hopper 35, i.e., when the cause of the hopper jam error has not been removed, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 controls the hopper jam alert to be cancelled.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification that had been performed.

However, in FIG. 118, although the hopper jam notification is cancelled at the timing of "X33", the hopper jam notification is then executed again at the timing of "X34".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X33" in Fig. 118 in a situation where the cause of the hopper jam error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper jam notification and performs control to execute a door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X34" in Fig. 118, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute a hopper jam notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "HP", which indicates a hopper jam error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at the timing of "X34", controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "HP". Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 118.

In addition, when an error clear command is received at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 clears the hopper jam notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification this time. After that, when a hopper jam command is received at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper jam notification again.

That is, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 118, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open". Then, at the timing of "X34", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Hopper jam error".

After that, when the medal M stuck in the hopper 35 is removed at the timing of "X35" in FIG. 118, that is, when the cause of the hopper jam error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the hopper jam error. However, the hopper jam notification will not be released just by removing the cause of the hopper jam error (no longer detecting the hopper jam error).

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X36" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 performs control to cancel the hopper jam notification.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error release command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error reset command, it controls the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. to cancel the hopper jam notification that had been performed.

However, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 118, even though the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the hopper jam alert, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on, so the main control board 50 now controls to execute a door open alert. In other words, the main control board 50 controls to switch the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 from "HP", which indicates a hopper jam error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

In addition, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 118, when the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam alert, it then controls the system to issue a door open alert. That is, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and controls the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open."

After that, at the timing of "X37" in FIG. 118, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open, i.e., while the door switch 17 remains on, the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

In addition, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is left open (the door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 does not send an alert release command indicating the cancellation of the door open alert to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is on), the sub-control board 80 continues to execute the door open notification without releasing it.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be executed, and when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation to cancel the specified error notification, i.e., operation of reset switch 153, is performed, the specified error notification is once canceled and then the specified error notification can be executed again.
This makes it possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally, and also to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

In addition, when the opening of the front door 12 (door open) is detected, a door open notification can be executed, and even if a release switch for releasing the door open notification is operated (turned on) with the front door 12 open, the door open notification can be continuously executed without being released.
This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being committed without any notification being issued even though the front door 12 remains open.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued. However, for example, the door open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and then turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes capable of being opened; at this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the door has been unlocked and the front door 12 is capable of being opened.

The main control board 50 may be configured to execute a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, even if the front door 12 is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, when the door key is turned counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch, the main control board 50 can be configured to release the door open notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door switch 17 has been turned on, unlocking the front door 12 and making it possible to open the front door 12, it may send a door open command indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub-control board 80 even if the front door 12 is closed.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 may be configured to execute a door open notification via the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc., when the door open command is received, even if the front door 12 is closed.

In other words, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be executed, and even if an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed when the front door 12 is open or can be opened, the door open notification can be configured to continue to be executed without being canceled.
This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being committed without any notification being given even when the front door 12 is in an open state or can be opened.

Figure 119 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once released until the selector retention notification can be executed again, and the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

In Figure 119, the on/off of selector retention detection, door open detection, selector retention notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 117.
117. Moreover, the timings of "X41", "X42", "X43" and "X44" in FIG. 119 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 117, respectively.

In Figure 119, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X43" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then, at timing "X44", the main control board 50 will control the selector stuck notification to be executed again.
The time from "X43" to "X44" is the time "T1" from the moment the selector retention notification is cancelled until the moment the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Also, in Figure 119, if we assume that a medal M is inserted through the medal insertion port 47 at the timing just before "X43", and that the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the timing "X43", then, at the timing "X45", the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.
The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

In addition, "when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a" means the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, approaches the insertion sensor 44a, and the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on.
Furthermore, "the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b" means the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, passes through the insertion sensor 44a, passes through the insertion sensor 44b, and then the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.

Here, it is assumed that the medal M falls from the medal insertion port 47 at an initial speed of "0", passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b as it passes through them in this order. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 permits the passage of the medal M.
In other words, the medal M is released from the hand at the medal insertion port 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, and passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b in sequence, at which point it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, respectively.

The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T2." In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once cancelled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

For example, suppose that the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) and a medal M is inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 to check whether the selector retention error has been cleared. Then, at the timing of "X43" in FIG. 119, the selector retention notification is cleared and at the same time the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, if the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X44" in FIG. 119, and then, at the timing of "X45", the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

As a result, a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 does not pass through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, and the medal M is swallowed, but the process of adding "1" to the bet number or credit number for that medal M can be prevented from being executed.
In Figure 119, the operation when reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using a selector stuck error as an example. However, in the case of a selector passing error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as in the case of a selector stuck error.

Figure 120 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the time "T3" from when digit 5 is lit until digit 1 is lit.

The ninth embodiment also includes digits 1 to 5, similar to the third embodiment.
Digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (accumulated number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78. Digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.

Furthermore, the address "F051(H)" shown in FIG. 33 in the third embodiment is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which of digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated with each interrupt.
Furthermore, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned as follows: bit D0 is a digit 1 signal, bit D1 is a digit 2 signal, bit D2 is a digit 3 signal, bit D3 is a digit 4 signal, and bit D4 is a digit 5 signal. In one interrupt process, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is executed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is turned on.

The LED display counter 1 has an initial value of "00010000 (B)". Then, for each interrupt, the LED display counter 1 updates by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 one digit to the right. Also, at the next interrupt after the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", the LED display counter 1 shifts one digit to the right to become "00000000 (B)", but at the time of that interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized and the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 has one cycle of five interrupts.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" Interruption: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interruption: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interruption: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interruption: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interruption: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interruption: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interruption)
"N+6" interruption: 00001000 (B)
:
It becomes.

In the ninth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one period, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically illuminated.
Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, the output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to be turned on (digits 1 to 4 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)", at which time a digit 4 signal is output and digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digits 1 to 3 and digit 5 are turned off).

At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100 (B)", at which time a digit 3 signal is output and digit 3 (the most significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1, digit 2, digit 4 and digit 5 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)", at which time a digit 2 signal is output and digit 2 (the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 1 and digits 3 to 5 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt process, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", at which time a digit 1 signal is output and digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on (digits 2 to 5 are turned off).

In Figure 120, the on/off of selector retention detection, door open detection, selector retention notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 117.
117. Moreover, the timings of "X51", "X52", "X53" and "X54" in FIG. 120 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 117, respectively.

In Figure 120, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X53" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then, at timing "X54", the main control board 50 will execute the selector stuck notification again.
The time from "X53" to "X54" is the time "T1" from the moment the selector retention notification is cancelled until the moment the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Also, in FIG. 120, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) is lit at timing "X53", then digit 1 (the most significant digit of credit number display LED 76) is lit at timing "X55".
The time from "X53" to "X55" is the time "T3" from lighting up digit 5 (the set value display LED 73) to lighting up digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, dynamic lighting control is executed to sequentially light up digit 5 through digit 1 for each interrupt. Also, there are four interrupts from lighting up digit 5 to lighting up digit 1. Therefore, the time "T3" is the time for four interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms).
In the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that "T1<T3" is satisfied. That is, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once released until when the selector retention notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T3" from when the digit 5 (the set value display LED 73) is turned on until the digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) is turned on.

Here, in FIG. 120, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X53" in a situation where the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been removed, the main control board 50 controls to cancel the selector stagnation notification once and execute the door open notification. At this time, the main control board 50 controls to switch the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating the selector stagnation error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open). Then, at the timing of "X54", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector stagnation notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 controls to switch the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "dE" to "CE". Then, assuming that the digit 5 (the set value display LED 73) is lit at the timing of "X53", the digit 1 (the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) is lit at the timing of "X55". In other words, between "X53" and "X55", digits 5 through 1 will light up once each.

Therefore, although the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled to be switched from "CE" to "dE" at the timing of "X53", and then switched from "dE" to "CE" at the timing of "X54", between "X53" and "X54", "dE" will only be lit once on the acquisition number display LED 78, or "dE" will not be lit even once. Therefore, since it is difficult for the human eye to confirm that "dE" has been lit on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking that the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.
In Figure 120, the operation when reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using a selector stuck error as an example. However, in the case of a selector passing error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as in the case of a selector stuck error.

Figure 121 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 121, the on/off of selector retention detection, door open detection, selector retention notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 117.
117. Moreover, the timings of "X61", "X62", "X63" and "X64" in FIG. 121 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. 117, respectively.

In Figure 121, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X63" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then, at timing "X64", the main control board 50 will control the selector stuck notification to be executed again.
The time from "X63" to "X64" is the time "T1" from the moment the selector retention notification is cancelled until the moment the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Also, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X63" in FIG. 121, then, at timing "X65", an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and at timing "X66", power outage processing is executed.
The time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.
The time from "X65" to "X66" is the time "T5" from when an event that cuts off the supply of power (power failure) is detected to when power failure processing is executed.

Figure 121 also shows the voltage level when an event occurs in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power outage) (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.).
In FIG. 121, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0". The voltage level (power interruption detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is "V1". When the power supply voltage is at voltage level "V0", the slot machine 10 operates normally. When the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1", it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off.

Figure 121 shows an example where an event (power outage) occurs at timing "X63" in which the power supply is cut off. When the power outage occurs at timing "X63", the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at timing "X65". The time from "X63" to "X65" is "T4". In other words, when the power outage occurs, the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at time "T4" thereafter.

In addition, the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected is designed to be greater than or equal to 20 interrupt times (2.235 ms x 20 = 44.7 ms).
In addition, the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected is not limited to the 20 interrupt time, but can be set appropriately depending on the performance of the voltage monitoring device (power outage detection circuit) and the main CPU 55.

A voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50. When the power supply voltage falls below the power interruption detection level "V1", a power interruption detection signal is input to a specific bit in the input port 51, and a power interruption is detected by detecting whether or not the signal has been input.

Furthermore, if the power supply voltage drops further from the power interruption detection level "V1" and falls below the drive limit voltage level of the main CPU 55, it will be impossible to drive the main CPU 55 (the operation of the main CPU 55 will no longer be guaranteed).
Since the main control board 50 cannot execute power-off processing when the power supply voltage falls below the driving limit voltage level, it is set so that when a power-off occurs at timing "X63", the power-off processing can be completed by timing "X66".

Power cut detection is performed within the interrupt process that is executed every 2.235 ms, but if two consecutive interrupts detect that the power supply voltage is below the power cut detection level "V1", the power cut process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in Figure 121, the timing of "X65" is the timing when the interrupt process detects that the power supply voltage is below the power cut detection level "V1" for two consecutive times. The main control board 50 then executes the power cut process in the next interrupt process (timing of "X66" in Figure 121).

During power-off processing, the main control board 50 backs up the data in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. Thereafter, when the power supply is resumed (the power is turned on, the power is turned on, or the power is restored from a power-off), the main control means 50 executes the power-restore processing and restores the backed-up data to the specified memory area of the RWM 53. As a result, when the power is restored from a power-off, it is possible to restore the state to the state when the power-off was detected.

FIG. 121 also illustrates the timing (timing "X63") when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, and the timing (timing "X64") when the selector stuck notification is cancelled and then executed again.
Furthermore, in FIG. 121, the timing when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) is matched with the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation in which the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed.

The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T4." In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is once released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In FIG. 121, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing "X63" while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification and control the main control board 50 to execute a door open notification. Also, assume that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). In this case, in FIG. 121, the main control board 50 will control the main control board 50 to execute the selector stuck notification again at the timing "X64", and then at the timing "X65", the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and then at the timing "X66", the main control board 50 will execute the power outage process.

For this reason, in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed and an event (power off) occurs in which the supply of power is cut off substantially simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, control is performed so that the selector stuck notification is executed again before the power off process is executed upon detecting the power off. Therefore, since data indicating that the selector stuck notification is being executed can be backed up in the power off process, the selector stuck notification can be executed when the supply of power is resumed (recovered from the power off).
In Figure 121, the operation when reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using a selector stuck error as an example, but in the case of a selector passing error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, it will operate in the same way as in the case of a selector stuck error.

Figure 124 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is cut off during a door opening notification, the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed.
In FIG. 124, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

In FIG. 124, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing "X91", the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected.
Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X91" in Fig. 124, the door switch 17 is turned on and the main control board 50 determines that the door opening has been detected. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it executes a door open notification. Specifically, as the door open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.

When the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it executes a door open notification. Specifically, as the door open notification, it outputs a voice message saying "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, if the power supply is cut off (for example, the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, the breaker trips, or a power outage occurs) at the timing of "X92" in Fig. 124, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will operate, and the door open notification will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power cut process. As a result, data in a specified memory area in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is backed up.
Thereafter, at the timing "X93" in Figure 124, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

After that, when the power supply is resumed at the timing of "X94" in FIG. 124, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute the power interruption recovery process. This restores the data backed up during the power interruption process to a specified storage area in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. This restores the state to the state when the power interruption was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a door open notification.

124, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 to release the door open notification.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued. However, for example, the door open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion port of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and at this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is openable. When it is detected that the front door 12 is openable, a door open notification may be issued even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is being supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be executed. Also, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed.

Here, it is conceivable that a person may fraudulently open the front door 12, then fraudulently cut off the power supply while the door open notification is being executed, and then close the front door 12 while the power supply is cut off, in an attempt to conceal the fraud. Even in such a case, the above-described configuration makes it possible to execute the door open notification when the power supply is resumed, even if the front door 12 is closed, thereby preventing the fraudulent behavior described above.

Figure 125 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is cut off during a door open notification, the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed with the door key turned to the left (the release switch is operated).
In Figure 125, as in Figure 124, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

125, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X101", the main control board 50 determines that the door is opened. Then, as a door open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs a voice message saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, when the power supply is cut off at the timing of "X102" in Fig. 125, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 operates, and the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power cut process and back up the data in a specified storage area.
Thereafter, at the timing "X103" in Figure 125, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X104" in Fig. 125, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to that when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until the timing of "X105" in Fig. 125.
Thereafter, at the timing of "X105" in FIG. 125, the power supply is resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, since the door key is turned counterclockwise, the release switch is turned on when the power supply is resumed. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification. The main control board 50 also sends a notification release command to the sub-control board 80, which indicates the cancellation of the door open notification. The sub-control board 80 then receives the notification release command and does not execute the door open notification.

In addition, instead of configuring the door switch 17 to turn on and execute a door open notification when the front door 12 is opened, the vehicle may be configured to execute a door open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion port of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and such a state may be detected by the door switch 17. When it is detected that the front door 12 is openable, a door open notification may be executed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is being supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be executed. Also, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, if the power supply is subsequently resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the release switch is operated), it is possible to prevent the door open notification from being executed.

Note that while the door open notification is being executed, if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and the door key is turned counterclockwise in this state (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked), the release switch is turned on and the door open notification is released. However, for example, it may be configured as shown below.

While the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to change the release switch from off to on, and then the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off, thereby cancelling the door open notification.
In this case, the operation for canceling the door open notification is to turn the door key in the opposite direction to that used for unlocking the front door 12 and then return the door key to its original position.

Figure 126 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the door open notification is cancelled by turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) to change the release switch from off to on, and then returning the door key to its original position to change the release switch from on to off.

In Figure 126, as in Figure 125, the power supply is cut off during the door opening notification, and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed when the door key is turned to the left (the release switch is operated).
Also, in Figure 126, as in Figures 124 and 125, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when a breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

126, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X111", the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). Then, as a door open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs a voice message saying "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

After that, when the power supply is cut off at the timing of "X112" in FIG. 126, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 operates, and the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power cut process and back up the data in the specified memory area.

Thereafter, at the timing "X113" in Figure 126, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.
Thereafter, at the timing of "X114" in Fig. 126, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to that when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until the timing of "X116" in Fig. 126.

After that, at the timing of "X115" in FIG. 126, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) and power supply is resumed. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power cut recovery process. This causes the data backed up during the power cut process to be restored to a specified storage area in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. This restores the state to the state when the power cut was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a door open notification.

In addition, because the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked), the release switch turns on when the power supply is resumed. However, simply turning on the release switch does not release the door open notification, so the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each continue to display the door open notification without releasing it.

126, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, and transmits a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 to release the door open notification.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancel command, it cancels the door open notification that has been being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

In addition, instead of configuring the door switch 17 to turn on and execute a door open notification when the front door 12 is opened, the vehicle may be configured to execute a door open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion port of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes openable, and such a state may be detected by the door switch 17. When it is detected that the front door 12 is openable, a door open notification may be executed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is being supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be executed. Also, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, when the power supply is subsequently resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 was unlocked), the door open notification can be configured to be executed. Then, when the door key is subsequently returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the door open notification is released.

This prevents the above-mentioned fraudulent acts from being committed by opening the front door 12 fraudulently, then cutting off the power supply fraudulently while the door open notification is being executed, and then closing the front door 12 with the power supply cut off, even if the fraudulent act is concealed. When the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door is closed, so that it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the ninth embodiment, the door switch 17 is turned off when the front door 12 is closed and is turned on when the front door 12 is open. However, this is not limited to the above.
For example, the door switch 17 may be configured to be turned on when the front door 12 is closed, and turned off when the front door 12 is open, thereby detecting whether the front door 12 is closed or open.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect that the front door 12 is open, an alert indicating that the front door 12 is open (door open alert) is issued. However, this is not limited to the above.
For example, when a door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and then turned clockwise in this state, the door is unlocked; at this time, the door switch 17 may detect that the door has been unlocked.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may execute a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed.
In addition, the main control board 50 can display, for example, "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door open notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may send a command indicating that the front door 12 should be opened (door open command) to the sub-control board 80 even if the front door 12 is closed.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it may execute a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc., even if the front door 12 is closed.
In addition, the sub-control board 80 can output a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 or display the words "Door open" on the image display device 23 as a door-open notification.

(3) In the ninth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect the opening of the front door 12, an alert indicating that the front door 12 is open (door open alert) is issued by both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. However, this is not limited to this.
When the door switch 17 is turned on to detect the opening of the front door 12, the main control board 50 executes a door open notification, but the sub-control board 80 does not have to execute the door open notification.

In addition, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect the opening of the front door 12, the main control board 50 may not execute a door open notification, and only the sub-control board 80 may execute the door open notification.
In this case, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open by the door switch 17 being turned on, it does not execute a door open notification, but may transmit a command (door open command) indicating that the front door 12 is open to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it can execute a door open notification by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

(4) In the ninth embodiment, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . However, this is not limiting, and the door switch 17 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 .
When the door switch 17 is turned on and the sub-control board 80 detects that the front door 12 is open, the sub-control board 80 can execute a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, commands are sent in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, if the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 cannot detect the opening of the front door 12, nor can it receive a door open command from the sub-control board 80. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 does not execute a door open notification, nor does it stop the progress of the game by marking the door open state. In other words, the main control board 50 can continue the game even when the front door 12 is open.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. In this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on, thereby canceling the door open notification. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to change the release switch from off to on, and then the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned from on to off, so that the door open notification is cancelled.

In this case, simply turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on will not release the door open notification and will continue.
The door key is then turned in the opposite direction to that used to unlock the front door 12, and then the door key is returned to its original position, which is the operation for canceling the door open notification.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, thereby avoiding the need to position the return receiving opening 131, but this is not limited to this.
113, the return receiving opening 131 and the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 may be disposed to the left of the vertically downward position of the gap 112, so that the return receiving opening 131 is not disposed vertically downward of the gap 112. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is not disposed vertically downward of the gap 112 either.

Even if the upper edge 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, it is possible to push "one" medal M into the gap 112 and have the "one" medal M remain in the gap 112. In this case, it is not impossible for the pushed-in "one" medal M to become unable to be removed from the gap 112.

When the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. In this case, since the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flies out of the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but falls into the storage receiving opening 35a and can be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, it is possible to push "two" medals M into the gap 112 and have the "two" medals remain within the gap 112. In this case, the pushed-in "two" medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause "2" medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Then, just as when the front door 12 is closed with "1" medal M pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M that fly out of the gap 112 do not fall into the return receiving port 131, but fall into the storage receiving port 35a and can be stored in the hopper 35.

(7) In the ninth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not limited to this.
114, for example, a blocking member 140 may be provided vertically below gap 112, and this blocking member 140 may block the portion of return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below gap 112. In other words, the portion of return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below gap 112 may be blocked by blocking member 140. Also, blocking member 140 may be configured to be approximately horizontal.

In this case, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be made to rest on the blocking member 140. If the front door 12 is closed with the medal M still in the gap 112, the impact will cause the medal M to fall from the gap 112. At this time, since the portion of the return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below the gap 112 is blocked by the blocking member 140, the medal M that falls from the gap 112 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but will fall into the storage receiving opening 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(8) In the ninth embodiment, the return receiving opening 131 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, a portion of the return receiving opening 131 may be positioned vertically below the gap 112, as shown in FIG. 115.
Furthermore, even if a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is located vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the width "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, it is possible to push "one" medal M into the gap 112 and have the "one" medal M remain in the gap 112. In this case, it is not the case that the pushed-in "one" medal M cannot be removed from the gap 112.

When the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. At this time, since a part of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flies out of the gap 112 falls into the return receiving opening 131, passes through the medal return passage 132, passes through the medal payout opening 16, and is guided to the medal tray 19.

Even if a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is located vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medals M, it is possible to push "two" medals M into the gap 112 and have the "two" medals M remain within the gap 112. In this case, it is not the case that the pushed-in "two" medals M cannot be removed from the gap 112.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed with "2" medals M pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause "2" medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Then, just as when the front door 12 is closed with "1" medal M pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M that fly out of the gap 112 will fall into the return receiving opening 131, pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and be guided to the medal tray 19.

(9) In the ninth embodiment, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the length "L2" of the screw 127, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 are configured to satisfy "L1 < L2" and "L1 < L3." In other words, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 is also thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, the screw 127 may be configured to satisfy "L1<L2" and "L1>L3." In other words, the length "L2" of the screw 127 may be longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 may be thinner (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
This allows the removed screw 127 to enter the medal guide passage 121 when the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, so that the removed screw 127 is prevented from being lost.

As described above, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position of the chute member 120 for locking the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12. Then, with the sheet member 120 locked to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a screw hole in the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not fall off the rear surface of the front door 12.

(10) In the ninth embodiment, when one medal M has entered the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 to the chute member 120. However, this is not limited to the above, and the medals M may be allowed to pass from the medal selector 110 to the chute member 120 even when one medal M has entered the gap 112.
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M in the gap 112, even if the one medal M remains in the gap 112, it does not hinder the passage of other medals M from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

(11) In the ninth embodiment, five digits (displays), digit 1 to digit 5, are provided, and dynamic lighting control is executed to sequentially light digits 5 to 1 with five interrupts as one cycle.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to have four digits, digit 1 to digit 4, and have four interrupts as one cycle, with digit 4 to digit 1 being sequentially lit by dynamic lighting control.
That is, the number of digits (displays) is not limited to five and can be set appropriately as needed. Also, the cycle of dynamic lighting control is not limited to five interrupts and can be set appropriately according to the number of digits, etc.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, the design value "T1" of the time from when the selector stuck notification is released until when the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected, are configured to satisfy "T1 < T4", but conversely, they may be configured to satisfy "T1 > T4".

Figure 122 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 122, the on/off of selector retention detection, door open detection, selector retention notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 117.
117. Moreover, the timings of "X71", "X72" and "X73" in FIG. 122 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22" and "X23" in FIG. 117, respectively.

In Fig. 122, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector stuck notification. If there is no event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) thereafter, at timing "X76", the main control board 50 makes the selector stuck notification executable again.
The time from "X73" to "X76" is the time "T1" from the moment the selector retention notification is cancelled until the moment the selector retention notification can be executed again.

Also, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X73" in FIG. 122, then, at timing "X74", an event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and at timing "X75", power outage processing is executed.
The time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.
The time from "X74" to "X75" is the time "T5" from when an event that cuts off the supply of power (power failure) is detected to when power failure processing is executed.

Also, in the same manner as in FIG. 121, FIG. 122 shows the voltage level when an event occurs in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power failure).
122, the voltage level when the power supply is on is set to "V0." Also, the voltage level at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off (power interruption detection level) is set to "V1."

122 also shows an example in which an event in which the supply of power is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X73". When the power outage occurs at timing "X73", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at timing "X74". Furthermore, the time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4".
Furthermore, since power-off processing cannot be executed when the power supply voltage falls below the driving limit voltage level, when a power-off occurs at timing "X73" in FIG. 122, the power-off processing is set to be completed by timing "X75".

FIG. 122 also illustrates the timing (timing "X73") when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, and the timing (timing "X76") when the selector stuck notification can be executed again after the selector stuck notification has been cancelled, provided that no event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage).
Furthermore, in FIG. 122, the timing when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) is matched with the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation in which the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed.

The system is configured to satisfy "T1>T4." In other words, the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected is configured to be shorter than the time "T1" until the selector stuck notification can be executed again after the selector stuck notification is once released, unless an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs.

If the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X73" in FIG. 122 in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification and execute a door open notification. Also, assume that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). In this case, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected at the timing of "X74" in FIG. 122, and then the power cut-off process is executed at the timing of "X75". If no event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs thereafter, the selector stuck notification can be executed again at the timing of "X76" in FIG. 122.

For this reason, if the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed and an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (on), the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled, and then, before the selector stuck notification is executed again, the power outage is detected and power outage processing is executed. Therefore, since the data indicating the execution of the selector stuck notification is not backed up during the power outage processing, it is possible to prevent the selector stuck notification from being executed when the power supply is resumed (recovered from the power outage).

In Fig. 122, at the timing of "X75", a door open notification is executed instead of a selector retention notification. Therefore, in the power off process, data indicating that the door open notification is being executed is backed up, so when the power supply is resumed (recovered from a power off), the door open notification is executed.
Also, in FIG. 122, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is explained using the selector retention error as an example, but in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

(13) In the ninth embodiment, when the reset switch 153 is operated when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the selector stuck notification is once cancelled and then executed again without the need for any operation. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, if the reset switch 153 is operated, the selector stuck notification is cancelled and a door open notification is issued, and thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, if the release switch is operated, the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stuck notification is issued again.

FIG. 123 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated with the front door 12 open and the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated.
In FIG. 123, at the timing of "X81", when a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE", indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.
In addition, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector stuck command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stuck notification, and displays the words "Selector stuck error" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X82" in Figure 123, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12, but while the selector dwell notification is being executed, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it transmits a door open command, which indicates that the front door 12 is open, to the sub-control board 80. However, while the selector retention notification is being executed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector retention notification.

After that, at the timing of "X83" in FIG. 123, when the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), and the main control board 50 cancels the selector stuck notification and issues a door open notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 is switched from "CE", which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error clear command, it clears the selector stuck notification and issues a door open notification. Specifically, it switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and switches the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open."

After that, at timing "X84" in FIG. 123, if the front door 12 is closed while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the door switch 17 turns off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects that the front door 12 is open. However, the door open notification is not released even if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and continues until the release switch is operated (turned on).

After that, at the timing of "X85" in FIG. 123, when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification and executes the selector stuck notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 is switched from "dE", which indicates a selector stuck error, to "CE", which indicates the front door 12 is open.

When the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an alarm release command to the sub-control board 80, which indicates that the door open alarm should be released. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the alarm release command, it releases the door open alarm and issues a selector stuck alarm. Specifically, it switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and switches the display on the image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error."

Here, Figure 123 uses a selector stuck error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated with the front door 12 open and the cause of the error not removed, and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the cause of the error not removed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and also in the event of a selector passing error, a hopper empty error, or a hopper jam error, when the reset switch 153 is operated with the front door 12 open and the cause of the error not being removed, and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the cause of the error not being removed, the operation is the same as when a selector retention error occurs.

In addition, in FIG. 123, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued, but it may be configured to issue a door open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and then turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes capable of being opened; however, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the door has been unlocked and the front door 12 is capable of being opened.

The main control board 50 may be configured to execute a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, even if the front door 12 is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, when the door key is turned counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch, the main control board 50 can be configured to release the door open notification.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be made. Thereafter, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, and an operation to cancel the specified error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed, the specified error notification is canceled once, and then a door open notification can be made. Thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed or locked, and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, and an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open notification is canceled, and then the specified error notification can be made again.

This makes it possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally, and also to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is open and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, the specified error notification is cancelled and a door open notification is executed, thereby once again informing the driver that the front door 12 is open, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

(14) In the ninth embodiment, the processes related to error detection, error notification, and cancellation of the error notification are executed in the interrupt process.
In addition, in the same interrupt process, there may be a case where the error notification is once cancelled and then executed again.
In the example shown in Fig. 117, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing "X23" in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the selector stuck notification is cancelled and a door open notification is issued. After that, at the timing "X24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stuck notification is issued again.

However, in the same interrupt process, there may be a case where the selector dwell notification is cancelled and then executed again, in which case the door open notification is not executed.
In this way, depending on the order of error detection, error notification, and cancellation of the error notification within the interrupt processing, there may be cases where the selector stuck notification is cancelled and then the selector stuck notification is executed again without executing the door open notification.

In addition, in one interrupt process, there may be cases where only one of the processes related to error detection, error notification, and error notification cancellation is performed. In such a case, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been removed, the selector stuck notification may be canceled and a door open notification may be executed, and then the door open notification may be canceled and the selector stuck notification may be executed again.

(15) In the ninth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge portion 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the front side to the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of Fig. 107. In other words, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that the height is high on the front side and low on the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of Fig. 107.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M trying to slide toward the back side in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 107. In other words, a force acts on the medal M trying to slide toward the back surface of the front door 12. For this reason, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 tends to remain in the gap 112. Therefore, if the front door 12 is closed with the medal M still in the gap 112, the medal M is unlikely to fall out of the gap 112 even if an impact is applied when the front door 12 is closed.

When one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 hits the one medal M in the gap 112 and stops. At this time, the other medal M remains in the medal passage 111, so that the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, which causes a selector retention notification, making it possible to indirectly detect that a medal M has remained in the gap 112.

Also, conversely to the above, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the back side to the front side in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107. In other words, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that the height is higher on the back side and lower on the front side in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 107.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M trying to slide towards the front in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 107. In other words, a force acts on the medal M trying to slide in the opposite direction to the back surface of the front door 12 (towards the inside of the cabinet 13). For this reason, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is likely to slide down from the gap 112 towards the inside of the cabinet 13. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is less likely to remain in the gap 112.

(16) In the ninth embodiment, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 is the storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a is provided below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be disposed above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). In other words, the upper opening of the hopper 35 may be disposed above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).

In this case, for example, a recess is provided at a predetermined position on the side wall of the hopper 35 by cutting out the upper end of the side wall of the hopper 35 downward. The lower end of this recess is positioned lower than the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). This recess can then be used as a storage receiving port 35a that receives medals M guided by the chute member 120.

In this case, with the front door 12 closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) faces the recess serving as the storage receiving port 35a.
In addition, when the front door 12 is closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) may be inserted inside the recess serving as the storage receiving port 35a.

(17) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional Notes>
The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification etc. of the present application can be, for example, the following Original Invention 1 to Original Invention 15, and the problems that the original inventions aim to solve, the means for solving the problems related to the original inventions, and the effects of the original inventions are as follows. However, this does not mean that the inventions described in this specification are limited to Original Invention 1 to Original Invention 15.

1. Initial invention 1
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a medal selector that sorts medals inserted through a medal insertion port, a chute member that guides medals that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper, and a return member that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that have a medal selector that sorts medals inserted through a medal insertion port, a chute member that guides medals that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper, and a return member that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (see, for example, JP 2016-013339 A).
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is how to appropriately position the medal selector, the chute member, and the return member.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
a medal selector (110) for selecting medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47);
a chute member (120) for guiding the medals permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35);
a return member (130) that guides the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19);
A gap (112) of a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member,
A return receiving port (131) is provided on the upper portion of the return member for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector.
The return receiving opening is not located vertically below the gap (for example, the upper edge 135 is located as shown in FIG. 107).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return receiving port and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, the medal that was placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player.

2. Initial invention 2
(a) The problem that the original invention 2 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
a medal selector (110) for selecting medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47);
a chute member (120) for guiding the medals permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35);
a return member (130) that guides the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19);
A gap (112) of a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member,
A return receiving port (131) is provided on the upper portion of the return member for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector.
A storage receiving port (35a) for receiving the medals guided by the chute member is provided at the upper portion of the hopper,
The return receiving port is not disposed vertically below the gap,
The gap is characterized in that it is located above the storage receiving port.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return receiving port and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, the medal that was placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player.
Furthermore, according to the original invention, medals that fall through the gaps can be dropped into the storage receiving port and stored in the hopper. This prevents medals that fall into the gaps from scattering inside the cabinet during maintenance.

3. Initial invention 3
(a) The problem that the original invention 3 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
a medal selector (110) for selecting medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47);
a chute member (120) for guiding the medals permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35);
a return member (130) that guides the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19);
A gap (112) of a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member,
A return receiving port (131) is provided on the upper portion of the return member for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector.
The return receiving port is not disposed vertically below the gap,
The gap is defined as "W"("W" in FIG. 109),
When the thickness of the medal is "T"("T" in Figure 109),
"W ≒ 2 × T" (Figure 109)
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return receiving port and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, the medal that was placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player.
Furthermore, according to the original invention, the gap distance is approximately twice the thickness of the medal, so that when only one medal is placed in the gap, it is possible to prevent the medal from becoming unable to be removed from the gap.
Furthermore, according to the original invention, when only one medal is inserted into the gap, the medal can be made to fall through the gap when the front door is closed, so that the passage of other medals inserted thereafter through the medal insertion slot can be prevented.

4. Initial invention 4
(a) The problem that the original invention 4 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
a medal selector (110) for selecting medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47);
a chute member (120) for guiding the medals permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35);
a return member (130) that guides the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19);
A gap (112) of a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member,
A return receiving port (131) is provided on the upper portion of the return member for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector.
The return receiving port is disposed vertically below the gap (FIG. 115).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering this, when the medal falls through the gap, it can be made to fall into the return receiving port, and therefore can be paid out into the medal tray.

5. Initial invention 5
(a) The problem that the original invention 5 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
a medal selector (110) for selecting medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47);
a chute member (120) for guiding the medals permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35);
a return member (130) that guides the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19);
A gap (112) of a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member,
A return receiving port (131) is provided on the upper portion of the return member for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector.
The return receiving port is not disposed vertically below the gap,
The chute member is
a medal guide passage (121) for guiding medals from the medal selector side toward the hopper side;
A bottom surface portion (122) that constitutes the bottom surface of the medal guide passage;
A first side wall portion (inner wall portion 123) that constitutes one (inner) side surface of the medal guide passage;
a second side wall portion (outer wall portion 124) that constitutes the other (outer) side surface of the medal guide passage;
a step portion (125) having a lower height on the hopper side than on the medal selector side is provided at a position on the bottom surface corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage,
The height of the step portion is "H1"("H1" in FIG. 110),
The height of the first side wall portion is “H2” (see “H2” in FIG. 110 ),
When the height of the second side wall portion is “H3” (see “H3” in FIG. 110 ),
"H1<H2" and "H1<H3" (Figure 110)
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 5 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return receiving port and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, the medal that was placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player.
Furthermore, according to the initial invention, by dropping a medal moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide passage at the step portion, the medal that has lost momentum due to contact with the first side wall portion or the second side wall portion can be accelerated.
Furthermore, according to the original invention, by making the height "H1" of the step portion lower than the height "H2" of the first side wall portion and the height "H3" of the second side wall portion, when a medal falls down the step portion, it is possible to prevent the medal from climbing over the first side wall portion or the second side wall portion and flying out of the medal guide passage.

6. Original invention 6
(a) The problem that the original invention 6 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
a medal selector (110) for selecting medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47);
a chute member (120) for guiding the medals permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35);
a return member (130) that guides a medal that is not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19);
A gap (112) of a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member,
A return receiving port (131) is provided on the upper portion of the return member for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector.
The return receiving port is not disposed vertically below the gap,
A feature of this invention is that when one medal ("one medal M" in Figure 111) has fallen into the gap, other medals ("other medals M" in Figure 111) are prevented from passing from the medal selector toward the chute member.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return receiving port and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, the medal placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player.
Furthermore, according to the original invention, when one medal has fallen into a gap, other medals inserted through the medal insertion port can be made to hit the one medal that has fallen into the gap and stop, causing it to become retained within the medal selector. Then, by detecting the other medals retained in the medal selector, it is possible to indirectly detect that a medal has fallen into the gap.

7. Initial invention 7
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that, when an error is detected, issues an error notification according to the type of the detected error.
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that, when they detect an error in which medals become stuck in a medal selector or an error in which the medals become empty in a hopper, issue an error notification according to the type of error detected, and cancel the error notification when the cause of the error is removed and a reset switch is operated (see, for example, JP 2021-052892 A).
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to appropriately cancel an error notification depending on the situation when the reset switch is operated.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) is enabled ("X21" in FIG. 117).
When the cause of the specified error has not been removed and an operation for canceling the specified error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed ("X23" in FIG. 117), the specified error notification is once canceled ("X23" in FIG. 117), and then the specified error notification can be executed again ("X24" in FIG. 117).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed even if the cause of the specified error has not been removed, by once canceling the specified error notification, it is possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally, and then by making it possible to execute the specified error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the specified error has not been removed.

8. Original invention 8
(a) The problem that the original invention 8 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
The apparatus includes a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be capable of opening and closing;
When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) is enabled ("X31" in FIG. 118).
When the cause of the specified error has not been removed and an operation for canceling the specified error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed ("X33" in FIG. 118), the specified error notification is once canceled ("X33" in FIG. 118), and then the specified error notification is made executable again ("X34" in FIG. 118).
When it is detected that the front door is opened or can be opened, a door open notification is enabled ("X36" in FIG. 118).
When the front door is in an open state or can be opened, even if an operation for canceling the door open notification (an operation of turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to that for unlocking the front door 12) and turning on the release switch) is performed, the door open notification can be continued without being cancelled ("X37" in FIG. 118).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed even if the cause of the specified error has not been removed, by once canceling the specified error notification, it is possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally, and then by making it possible to execute the specified error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the specified error has not been removed.
Furthermore, according to the original invention, even if an operation to cancel the door open notification is performed when the front door is in an open state or can be opened, the door open notification continues without being canceled, thereby preventing fraudulent acts from being committed without issuing any notification even when the front door is in an open state or can be opened.

9. Original invention 9
(a) The problem that the original invention 9 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
A medal selector (110) is provided for selecting medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47),
The medal selector includes:
a medal passage (111) through which the medal inserted from the medal insertion port passes;
a medal insertion sensor A (insertion sensor 44a) and a medal insertion sensor B (insertion sensor 44b) (insertion sensor B is disposed downstream of insertion sensor A) that are provided in the medal passage and capable of detecting medals;
When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) is enabled ("X41" in FIG. 119).
When the cause of the specified error has not been removed and an operation for canceling the specified error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed ("X43" in FIG. 119), the specified error notification is once canceled ("X43" in FIG. 119), and then the specified error notification is made executable again ("X44" in FIG. 119).
The time from when the predetermined error notification is once released until when the predetermined error notification can be executed again is "T1" (the time "T1" from "X43" to "X44" in FIG. 119),
When the time from when the medal inserted through the medal insertion port is detected by insertion sensor A to when it is no longer detected by insertion sensor B is "T2" (the time "T2" from "X43" to "X45" in FIG. 119),
T1 < T2
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed even if the cause of the specified error has not been removed, by once canceling the specified error notification, it is possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally, and then by making it possible to execute the specified error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the specified error has not been removed.
Also, suppose that an operation is performed to cancel the predetermined error notification, and that a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot to check whether the predetermined error notification has been canceled. Then, suppose that the predetermined error notification is canceled once, and at the same time, the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot is detected by insertion sensor A. If the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed at this time, the predetermined error notification is executed again, and thereafter, the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot is no longer detected by insertion sensor B. For this reason, the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot does not pass through insertion sensor A and insertion sensor B normally, and therefore it is possible to prevent the process of adding "1" to the number of bets or credits for that medal from being executed.

10. Original invention 10
(a) The problem that the original invention 10 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
Equipped with "N" (N≧2) (5) display units (digits),
A dynamic lighting control for sequentially lighting the "N" display devices is made possible;
When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) is enabled ("X51" in FIG. 120).
When the cause of the specified error has not been removed and an operation for canceling the specified error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed ("X53" in FIG. 120), the specified error notification is once canceled ("X53" in FIG. 120) and then the specified error notification can be executed again ("X54" in FIG. 120).
The time from when the predetermined error notification is once released until when the predetermined error notification can be executed again is "T1" (the time "T1" from "X53" to "X54" in FIG. 120),
When the time from lighting the "1" indicator (digit 5) to lighting the "N" indicator (digit 1) by dynamic lighting control is "T2" (the time from "X53" to "X55" in FIG. 120 is "T3"),
T1 < T2
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed even if the cause of the specified error has not been removed, by once canceling the specified error notification, it is possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally, and then by making it possible to execute the specified error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the specified error has not been removed.
Furthermore, according to the original invention, in the period from when the predetermined error notification is released until when the predetermined error notification can be executed again, each of the "N" display devices lights up only once or does not light up even once. For this reason, it is difficult for the human eye to confirm the information displayed on the "N" display devices in the period from when the predetermined error notification is released until when the predetermined error notification can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a user from misunderstanding that the cause of the predetermined error has been removed based on the information displayed on the "N" display devices in the period from when the predetermined error notification is released until when the predetermined error notification can be executed again.

11. Original invention 11
(a) The problem that the original invention 11 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
The apparatus includes a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be capable of opening and closing;
When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) is enabled ("X81" in FIG. 123).
Thereafter, when it is detected that the front door has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, and an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed, the predetermined error notification is once cancelled, and then a door open notification is made executable ("X83" in FIG. 123).
Thereafter, when the front door is closed or locked and the cause of the specified error has not been removed, if an operation for canceling the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed, the specified error notification is made possible again after the door open notification is canceled ("X85" in FIG. 123).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, when the front door is open or can be opened and the cause of the specified error has not been removed and an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed, the specified error notification is first canceled and a door open notification is executed, making it possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally and preventing fraudulent activity by notifying the driver that the front door is open.
In addition, according to the original invention, when the front door is closed or locked and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation is performed to cancel the door open notification, the door open notification is cancelled and the specified error notification can be made again, thereby once again notifying the driver that the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated.

12. Original invention 12
(a) The problem that the original invention 12 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) is enabled ("X61" in FIG. 121).
When an operation for canceling the specified error notification is performed in a situation where the cause of the specified error has not been removed ("X63" in FIG. 121), the specified error notification is once canceled ("X63" in FIG. 121), and then the specified error notification is made executable again ("X64" in FIG. 121).
The time from when the predetermined error notification is once released until when the predetermined error notification can be executed again is "T1" (the time "T1" from "X63" to "X64" in FIG. 121),
When the design value of the period from when an event that cuts off the supply of power occurs ("X63" in FIG. 121) to when the event that cuts off the supply of power is detected ("X65" in FIG. 121) is "T2" (the time "T4" from "X63" to "X65" in FIG. 121),
T1 < T2
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed even if the cause of the specified error has not been removed, by once canceling the specified error notification, it is possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally, and then by making it possible to execute the specified error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the specified error has not been removed.
According to the original invention, if an event in which the supply of power is cut off occurs at approximately the same time as an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification in a situation in which the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification can be executed again before the event in which the supply of power is cut off is detected. Therefore, in the power-off process, data indicating that the predetermined error notification is being executed can be backed up, so that the predetermined error notification can be executed when the supply of power is resumed.

13. Original invention 13
(a) The problem that the original invention 13 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) is enabled ("X71" in FIG. 122).
When an operation for canceling the specified error notification is performed in a situation where the cause of the specified error has not been removed ("X73" in FIG. 122), the specified error notification is once canceled ("X73" in FIG. 122) and then the specified error notification is made executable again ("X76" in FIG. 122).
The time from when the predetermined error notification is once released until when the predetermined error notification can be executed again is "T1" (the time "T1" from "X73" to "X76" in FIG. 122),
When the design value of the period from when an event that cuts off the supply of power occurs ("X73" in FIG. 122) to when the event that cuts off the supply of power is detected ("X74" in FIG. 122) is "T2" (the time "T4" from "X73" to "X74" in FIG. 122),
T1>T2
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, when an operation for canceling a specified error notification is performed, even if the cause of the specified error has not been removed, by first canceling the specified error notification, it is possible to confirm that the operation for canceling the specified error notification functions normally.
According to the original invention, if an event that cuts off the power supply occurs at approximately the same time as an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is performed in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification is canceled once, and then the event that cuts off the power supply is detected before the predetermined error notification is executed again. Therefore, since data indicating the execution of the predetermined error notification is not backed up in the power cutoff process, it is possible to prevent the predetermined error notification from being executed when the power supply is resumed.

14. Original invention 14
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 14 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that, when it detects that the front door is open, issues a door open notification to indicate that the front door is open.
Conventionally, there has been known amusement machines that, when detecting the opening of a front door, executes a door open notification indicating that the front door is open (see, for example, JP 2018-117888 A).
In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, once the door open notification is started, the door open notification is continued until it is detected that the front door is closed, and upon detection of the front door being closed, the door open notification is terminated.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to appropriately execute control related to door-opening notification depending on the situation of the front door when power supply is subsequently resumed when power supply is cut off while a door-opening notification is being executed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
The apparatus includes a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be capable of opening and closing;
When the power is supplied and it is detected that the front door is open or can be opened, a door open notification is enabled ("X91" in FIG. 124).
If the power supply is cut off while a door open notification is being executed ("X92" in FIG. 124) and the front door is then closed with the power supply cut off ("X93" in FIG. 124), when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed ("X94" in FIG. 124).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 14 Even if a person attempts to conceal the fraudulent act by opening the front door fraudulently, then cutting off the power supply fraudulently while the door open notification is being executed, and then closing the front door with the power supply cut off, according to the original invention, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door is closed, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act can be prevented.

15. Original invention 15
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 15: Same as Original Invention 14.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is as follows:
The apparatus includes a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be capable of opening and closing;
When the power is supplied and it is detected that the front door is open or can be opened, a door open notification is enabled ("X91" in FIG. 124, "X111" in FIG. 126).
In the case where the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being executed ("X92" in FIG. 124) and then the front door is closed while the power supply is cut off ("X93" in FIG. 124), when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed ("X94" in FIG. 124).
If the power supply is cut off while a door open notification is being executed ("X112" in FIG. 126) and the front door is then closed with the power supply cut off ("X113" in FIG. 126), when the power supply is resumed with the door key used to unlock the front door turned in the opposite direction to that used when unlocking the front door, the door open notification can be executed ("X115" in FIG. 126).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of Original Invention 15 Even if a person attempts to conceal the fraudulent act by opening the front door fraudulently, then cutting off the power supply fraudulently while the door open notification is being executed, and then closing the front door with the power supply cut off, according to the original invention, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door is closed, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act can be prevented.

10. Slot machines (gaming machines)
10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c Top plate 14 Pattern display device 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door switch 18 Display window 19 Medal tray 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp section)
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 (24A, 24B) Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 35a Storage receiving port 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Token insertion port 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Resistor 50b Mark number 50c Mark 50d Boundary line 50e DP mark 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU (main chip)
Description of the Related Art 55a Pin 55b Depression 55c Step 55d Step 55e Two-dimensional code 55f Model number sticker 55g Product name 55h Company name 55i Step 55j Hidden characters 56 Socket 56a Hollow 56b Step 56c Pin insertion port 56d Socket pin 56e Notch 57 Connector 57a Foot 57b Lead wire 61 Role selection means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status indicator LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
Description of the Related Art 86 Push button 87 Cross key 91 Performance output control means 110 Medal selector 111 Medal passage 111a Vertical section 111b Inclined section 111c Entrance 111d Exit 112 Gap 113 Selector base 120 Chute member 121 Medal guide passage 122 Bottom section 123 Inner wall section 124 Outer wall section 125 Step section 126 Fixing section 127 Screw 130 Return member 131 Return receiving port 132 Medal return passage 133 Payout receiving port 134 Medal payout passage 135 Upper edge section 140 Closing member 151 Setting key insertion port 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 200 Hall computer 301 Interrupt waiting monitor register 302 Interrupt disable flag (IFF1 register, IFF2 register)
500 Timer circuit 501 (PTC) 8-bit counter 502 (PTC) Prescaler register 503 (PTC) Counter setting register 504 (PTC) Interrupt flag

Claims (1)

A control chip is provided.
the control chip has a plurality of pins;
the control chip has a surface with a plurality of recesses;
Among the plurality of recesses, a first recess and a second recess have different depths ,
A recess is provided at approximately the center of a predetermined side in the longitudinal direction of the control chip,
The plurality of pins are arranged on the predetermined side,
The recess of the predetermined side is free of the plurality of pins,
Among the plurality of pins on the predetermined side, a predetermined pin adjacent to the recess is connected to GND.
Amusement machine.

Images